NOTICE TO BIDDERS BID BOOK GENERAL CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
CITY COUNCIL CHAMBERS ACCESSIBLITY IMPROVEMENT AND AUDIO, VIDEO AND SOUND SYSTEM PROJECT
SPECIFICATION NO. PW 2015-14 APPROVAL DATE: JULY 2016 ENGINEERING STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS DATED: APRIL 2016
PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT 1375 ASH STREET ARROYO GRANDE, CA 93420
CITY COUNCIL CHAMBERS ACCESSIBILITY IMPROVEMENT AND AUDIO, VIDEO AND SOUND SYSTEM PROJECT
Specification No. PW 2015-14
Approval Date: July 8, 2016
Recommended for Approval:
Capital Improvement Project Manager Date
Approved for Construction:
Director of Public Works Date
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 1 July 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
Division Section Title
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING DOCUMENTS GROUP
DIVISION 00 – NOTICE TO BIDDERS, BID BOOK, GENERAL CONDITIONS AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS BID SUBMISSION BID DOCUMENTS PROJECT INFORMATION QUALIFICATIONS AWARD ACCOMODATION BID ITEM LIST LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 10285.1 STATEMENT PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 10162 QUESTIONNAIRE PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 10232 STATEMENT LABOR CODE SECTION 1725.5 STATEMENTS NONCOLLUSION DECLARATION BIDDER ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS QUALIFICATIONS ATTACH BIDDER’S BOND TO ACCOMPANY BID
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS CONTRACT PAYMENT BOND FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND GENERAL LIABILITY ENDORSEMENT AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ENDORSEMENT WORKER’S COMPENSATION/ EMPLOYMENT LIABILITY ENDORSEMENT AUDIO VISUAL PROGRAM LINE ITEM DETAIL FOR AV EQUIPMENT – BASE BID LINE ITEM DETAIL FOR AV EQUIPMENT – BID ADDITIVES
ACCESSIBILITY SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
General Requirements Subgroup
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY 012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 1 July 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Facility Construction Subgroup
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 062023 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 087100 DOOR HARDWARE
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 092400 CEMENT PLASTERING 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096543 LINOLEUM FLOORING 096816 SHEET CARPETING 099113 PAINTING
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 101423 PANEL SIGNAGE 10211319 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 123216 MANUFACTURED PLASTIC-LAMINATED-FACED CASEWORK 123661 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOPS
Facility Services Subgroup
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 220719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 1 July 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 223400 FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 224100 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES
DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 231123 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 233113 METAL DUCTS 233416 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 238126 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 262416 PANELBOARDS 262726 WIRING DEVICES 265119 LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265219 EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 270526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270536 CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMM. PATHWAYS AND CABLING 271500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
AUDIO, VIDEO AND SOUND SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 3
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING DOCUMENTS GROUP
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
BID SUBMISSION
CITY OF ARROYO GRANDE, CALIFORNIA
Sealed bids will be received by the City of Arroyo Grande at the Public Works Administration Office located at 1375 Ash Street, Arroyo Grande California 93420, until
2:00 p.m. on July 26, 2016 at which time they will be publicly opened and read aloud. Submit bid in a sealed envelope plainly marked:
CITY COUNCIL CHAMBERS ACCESSIBILITY IMPROVEMENT AND AUDIO, VIDEO AND SOUND SYSTEM PROJECT SPECIFICATION NO. PW 2015-14
Any bid received after the time and date specified will not be considered and will be returned to the bidder unopened. Bids received by Fax or Email will not be considered.
By submission of bid you agree to comply with all instructions and requirements in this notice and the contract documents.
All bids must be submitted on the Bid Item List form(s) provided and submitted with all other Bid Forms included in the Bid Book.
Each bid must be accompanied by either a: 1. certified check 2. cashier's check 3. bidder's bond made payable to the City of Arroyo Grande for an amount equal to ten percent of the bid amount as a guaranty. Guaranty will be forfeited to the City Arroyo Grande if the bidder, to whom the contract is awarded, fails to enter into the contract.
The City of Arroyo Grande reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids or waive any informality in a bid.
All bids are to be compared on the basis of the Public Works Director's estimate of the quantities of work to be done, as shown on the Bid Item List.
Bids will only be accepted from bidders that are licensed in compliance with the provisions of Chapter 9, Division III of Business and Professions Code.
The award of the contract, if awarded, will be to the lowest responsive bid submitted by a responsible contractor whose bid complies with the requirements prescribed herein. If the contract is awarded, the contract will be awarded within 60 calendar days after the opening of the bids.
i NOTICE TO BIDDERS
Failure to raise defects in the notice to bidders or bid forms prior to bid opening constitute a waiver of those defects.
BID DOCUMENTS A copy of the plans and specifications may be downloaded, free of charge, from the City’s website at: http://www.arroyogrande.org/Bids.aspx; are available for viewing at the following plan rooms: Central California Builders Exchange, Santa Maria Valley Contractors Association, Salinas Valley Builders Exchange, and San Luis Obispo County Builders Exchange; or a printed copy is available by contacting Blueprint Express, 618 East Grand Avenue, Arroyo Grande, CA 93420, (805) 481-1655 for a non- refundable fee of the cost of duplication.
Standard Specifications and Engineering Standards, where referenced, may be downloaded, free of charge, from the City’s website at: http://www.arroyogrande.org/DocumentCenter/Home/View/3151. A printed copy may be obtained by contacting the City of Arroyo Grande Community Development Department at (805) 473-5420 and paying a non-refundable fee, or by contacting Blueprint Express, 618 East Grand Avenue, Arroyo Grande, CA 93420, (805) 481-1655 for a non- refundable fee of the cost of duplication.
You are responsible to obtain all issued addenda prior to bid opening. Addenda will be available to download at the City’s website listed above or at the office of the Public Works Director.
Contact the Capital Improvement Project Manager, Jill McPeek at (805) 473-5444 or the Public Works Department at (805) 473-5460 prior to bid opening to verify the number of addenda issued.
You are responsible to verify your contact information is correct on the plan holders list located on the City’s website at: http://www.arroyogrande.org/Bids.aspx.
PROJECT INFORMATION In general, the project is to construct accessible restroom facilities to meet current ADA requirements, as well as to upgrade the audio, video and sound system equipment in the City Council Chambers.
The project estimated construction cost is $310,000 for the Base Bid.
Contract time is established as 56 working days.
In compliance with section 1773 of the Labor Code, the State of California Department of Industrial Relations has established prevailing hourly wage rates for each type of workman. Current wage rates may be obtained from the Division of Labor web site: www.dir.ca.gov/DLSR/PWD/. This project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the Department of Industrial Relations.
ii NOTICE TO BIDDERS
You and any subcontractors must be registered with the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to Section 1725.5.
There will be a non-mandatory pre-bid meeting 2:00 pm on Tuesday, July 19, 2016 at the City Council Chambers. Contact Jill McPeek at (805) 473-5444 with any questions.
QUALIFICATIONS You must possess a valid Class B Contractor's License at the time of the bid opening.
You or your subcontractors must have at least (1) Infocomm CTS certified project manager and (1) Infocomm CTS-D certified engineer on staff for the duration of the project. You or your subcontractors must provide a Creston Certified Programmer, and must have a value Crestron DMC-E or Extron XTP Systems Engineer Certification.
You must have experience constructing projects similar to the work specified for this project. Provide three similar reference projects completed as either the prime or subcontractor. One of the three reference projects must have been completed under contract with a City, County, State or Federal Government agency as the prime contractor. All referenced projects must be completed within the last five years from this project’s bid opening date.
All referenced projects must be for private and/or public commercial buildings.
Failure to provide reference projects as specified in this section and as required on the qualification form may be cause to reject a bid as being non-responsive.
It is the City of Arroyo Grande’s intent to award the contract to the lowest responsive bid submitted by a responsible bidder. If in the bidder’s opinion the contract has been or may be improperly awarded, the bidder may protest the contract award.
Protests must be filed no later than five working days after either: 1. bid opening date 2. notification of rejected bid.
Protest must be in writing and received by the project manager located at: 1375 Ash Street Arroyo Grande, CA 93420.
Valid protests must contain the following information: 1. the reasons for the protest 2. any supporting documentation 3. the ruling expected by the City to remedy the protest. Any protest not containing all required information will be deemed invalid and rejected.
iii NOTICE TO BIDDERS
The City will consider additional documentation or other supporting information regarding the protest if submitted in compliance with the specified time limits. Anything submitted after the specified time limit will be rejected and not be considered.
The Director of Public Works or Designee may request additional information to be submitted within three days of the request, unless otherwise specified, and will notify the protester of ruling within ten days of determination.
Pursuant to the Public Records Act (Government Code, § 6250, et seq.), the City will make public records available upon request.
AWARD The lowest bidder will be determined using the BASE BID.
As a condition to executing a contract with the City, two bonds each equal to one hundred percent of the total contract price are required in compliance with Section 3- 1.05 of the Standard Specifications.
You may substitute securities for moneys withheld under the contract in compliance with the provisions of the Public Contract Code, Section 10263.
ACCOMMODATION If any accommodations are needed to participate in the bid process, please contact Jill McPeek at (805) 473-5444. Requests should be made as soon as possible to allow time for accommodation.
iv BID BOOK
All bid forms must be completed and submitted with your bid. Failure to submit these forms and required bid bond will be cause to reject the bid as nonresponsive. Staple all bid forms together.
THE UNDERSIGNED, agrees that they have carefully examined: 1. the location of the proposed work 2. the plans and specifications 3. read the accompanying instructions to bidders 4. any supplemental project information and propose to furnish all: 5. materials 6. labor to complete all the required work satisfactorily in compliance with 7. plans 8. specifications 9. general conditions and supplementary conditions for the prices set forth in the bid item list:
BID ITEM LIST FOR CITY COUNCIL CHAMBERS ACCESSIBILITY IMPROVEMENT AND AUDIO, VIDEO AND SOUND SYSTEM PROJECT SPECIFICATION NO. PW 2015-14
Item Item Unit of Estimated Item Price Total No. Description Measure Quantity (in figures) (in figures) Construction of Council 1 SG(1) Chambers Accessibility 1 LS Improvements Construction of Council 2 APP(2) Chambers Audio, Video 1 LS and Sound Improvements Bid Total (or Base Bid) $ Company Name:
(1) See “Line Item Detail – Base Bid” in Appendices for additional information. (2) See “Accessibility Specifications Group” for additional information.
Item Item Unit of Estimated Item Price Total No. Description Measure Quantity (in figures) (in figures) Additive - AV Operator 1 APP 1 LS (3) Console Total Unit Price No. 1 $
2 APP(3) Additive - AV PA System 1 LS Total Unit Price No. 2 $
A BID BOOK
Item Item Unit of Estimated Item Price Total No. Description Measure Quantity (in figures) (in figures) Additive - AV Chambers 3 APP 1 LS (3) Alternate Displays Total Unit Price No. 3 $
4 APP(3) Additive - AV Lighting 1 LS Total Unit Price No. 4 $ Additive - AV Production 5 APP 1 LS (3) Control Surface Total Unit Price No. 5 $ Company Name:
(3) See “Line Item Detail – Bid Additives” in Appendices for additional information.
B BID BOOK
C BID BOOK
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
Pursuant to Section 4100 of the Public Contracts Code and section 2-1.33C of the standard specifications, the Bidder is required to furnish the following information for each Subcontractor performing more than 1/2 percent (0.5%) of the total base bid. Do not list alternative subcontractors for the same work. Subcontracting must not total more than fifty percent (50%) of the submitted bid except as allowed in Section 5-1.13A of the standard specifications.
For Streets & Highways projects, subcontractors performing less than ten thousand dollars ($10,000) worth of work need not be mentioned. Subcontractors must be registered with the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5 to be listed. NOTE: If there are no subcontractors, write “NONE” and submit with bid.
% of Address and Phone Total Name Under Which Number of Office, Mill or Specific Description of Base Subcontractor is Licensed License Number Shop Subcontract Bid
Attach additional sheets as needed.
D BID BOOK
PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 10285.1 STATEMENT In compliance with Public Contract Code Section 10285.1 (Chapter 376, Stats. 1985), the bidder hereby declares under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the bidder, or any subcontractor to be engaged by the bidder, has ____, has not ____ been convicted within the preceding three years of any offenses referred to in that section, including any charge of fraud, bribery, collusion, conspiracy, or any other act in violation of any state or federal antitrust law in connection with the bidding upon, award of, or performance of, any public works contract, as defined in Public Contract Code Section 1101, with any public entity, as defined in Public Contract Code Section 1100, including the Regents of the University of California or the Trustees of the California State University. The term "bidder" is understood to include any partner, member, officer, director, responsible managing officer, or responsible managing employee thereof, as referred to in Section 10285.1.
NOTE: The bidder must place a check mark after "has" or "has not" in one of the blank spaces provided. The above Statement is part of the Bid. Signing this Bid on the signature portion constitute signature of this Statement. Bidders are cautioned that making a false certification may subject the certifier to criminal prosecution.
PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 10162 QUESTIONNAIRE In compliance with Public Contract Code Section 10162, the Bidder must complete, under penalty of perjury, the following questionnaire:
Has the bidder, any officer of the bidder, or any employee of the bidder who has a proprietary interest in the bidder, ever been disqualified, removed, or otherwise prevented from bidding on, or completing a federal, state, or local government project because of a violation of law or a safety regulation?
Yes No
If the answer is yes, attach a letter explaining the circumstances
PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 10232 STATEMENT In compliance with Public Contract Code Section 10232, you hereby state under penalty of perjury, that no more than one final unappealable finding of contempt of court by a federal court has been issued against you within the immediately preceding two-year period because of your failure to comply with an order of a federal court which orders you to comply with an order of the National Labor Relations Board.
E BID BOOK
LABOR CODE SECTION 1725.5 STATEMENTS The bidder has delinquent liability to an employee or the state for any assessment of back wages or related damages, interest, fines, or penalties pursuant to any final judgment, order, or determination by a court or any federal, state, or local administrative agency, including a confirmed arbitration award. Any judgment, order, or determination that is under appeal is excluded, provided that the contractor has secured the payment of any amount eventually found due through a bond or other appropriate means.
Yes No
The bidder is currently debarred under Section 1777.1 or under any other federal or state law providing for the debarment of contractors from public works.
Yes No
Attach documentation of registration with the Department of Industrial Relations and date of registration per Labor Code Section 1725.5(a)(1).
NOTE: The above Statements and Questionnaire are part of the Bid. Signing this Bid on the signature portion constitute signature of this Statement and Questionnaire. Bidders are cautioned that making a false certification may subject the certifier to criminal prosecution.
F BID BOOK
NONCOLLUSION DECLARATION
I, , declare that I am of , the party making the foregoing bid that the bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; that the bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that the bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or that anyone refrained from bidding; that the bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the public body awarding the contract of anyone interested in the proposed contract; that all statements contained in the bid are true; and, further, that the bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, or paid, and will not pay, any fee to any corporation, partnership, company association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof to effectuate a collusive or sham bid.
Executed on , 20 , in __ I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing is true and correct.
(Signature and Title of Declarant) (SEAL) Subscribed and sworn to before me this ______day of ______, 20_____
Notary Public
Company Name: ______
G BID BOOK
Bidder Acknowledgements By signing below, the bidder acknowledges and confirms that this bid is based on the information contained in the contract documents, including the notice to bidders, plans, specifications, general conditions, supplementary conditions, and addendum number(s) . (Note: You are responsible to verify the number of addenda prior to the bid opening.)
The undersigned further agrees that in case of default in executing the required contract, with necessary bonds, within eight days, (not including Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays), after having received a mailed notice that the contract is ready for signature, the proceeds of the check or bond accompanying his bid will become the property of the City of Arroyo Grande.
Licensed in accordance with an act providing for the registration of contractors, License No. , Expiration Date .
The above statement is made under penalty of perjury, and any bid not containing this information "will be considered non-responsive and will be rejected” by the City.
Signature of Bidder
(Print Name and Title of Bidder)
Business Name (DBA):
Owner/Legal Name:
Indicate One: Sole-proprietor Partnership Corporation
List Partners/Corporate Officers: Name Title
Name Title
Name Title
Business Address
Street Address
Mailing Address
City, State, Zip Code
H BID BOOK
Phone Number
Fax Number
Email Address
Date
I BID BOOK
Qualifications Failure to furnish complete reference information, as specified in this project’s Notice to Bidders, is cause to reject the bid.
Reference Number 1 Customer Name & Contact Individual
Telephone & Fax Number
Street Address, City, State, Zip Code
Is this similar to the project Describe the services provided and how this project is being bid or did this project similar to that which is being bid: include remodel activity? Yes
No □ □ Was this contract for a public agency? Yes □ No □ Date project completed:
J BID BOOK
Reference Number 2 Customer Name & Contact Individual
Telephone & Fax Number
Street Address, City, State, Zip Code
Is this similar to the project Describe the services provided and how this project is being bid or did this project similar to that which is being bid: include remodel activity? Yes
No □ □ Was this contract for a public agency? Yes □ No □ Date project completed:
K BID BOOK
Reference Number 3 Customer Name & Contact Individual
Telephone & Fax Number
Street Address, City, State, Zip Code
Is this similar to the project Describe the services provided and how this project is being bid or did this project similar to that which is being bid: include remodel activity? Yes
No □ □ Was this contract for a public agency? Yes □ No □ Date project completed:
L BID BOOK
ATTACH BIDDER'S BOND TO ACCOMPANY BID
Know all men by these presents:
That we ______, AS PRINCIPAL, and
______, AS SURETY, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Arroyo Grande in the sum of:
______Dollars (______) to be paid to said City or its certain attorney, its successors and assigns; for which payment, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors or assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents:
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the certain bid of the above bounden ______to construct ______(insert name of street and limits to be improved or project) dated ______is accepted by the City of Arroyo Grande, and if the above bounden ______, his heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns shall duly enter into and execute a contract for such construction and shall execute and deliver the two bonds described within ten (10) days (not including Saturdays, Sundays, or legal holidays) after the above bounden,
______, has received notice by and from the said City of Arroyo Grande that said contract is ready for execution, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force and virtue.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we hereunto set our hands and seals this ___ day of ______, 20____.
M BID BOOK
Bidder Principal:
Signature Date Title:
Surety:
Bidder's signature is not required to be notarized. Surety's signature must be notarized. Equivalent form may be substituted(Rev. 6-30-14)
N GENERAL CONDITIONS
GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. DEFINITIONS; GENERAL 3.1.3 Contractor Responsibility for Construction 1.1 City Means, Methods and Sequences 1.2 Contractor 3.1.4 Verification of Applications for Payment 1.3 Architect 3.1.5 Rejection of Work 1.4 The Work 3.2 Submittals 1.5 The Project 3.2.1 Architect’s Review 1.6 Surety 3.2.2 Time for Architect’s Review 1.7 Subcontractors; Sub‐Subcontractors 3.3 Changes to the Work; Change Orders 1.8 Material Supplier 3.4 Completion 1.9 Drawings and Specifications 3.5 Interpretation of Contract Documents 1.10 Special Conditions; Supplemental Conditions 3.6 Request for Information 1.11 Contract Documents 3.7 Communications; Architect’s Role 1.12 Intent and Correlation of Contract Documents 3.8 Termination of Architect; Substitute Architect 1.12.1 Work of the Contract Documents 1.12.2 Technical Terms 4. THE CONTRACTOR 1.12.3 Conflict in Contract Documents 4.1 Contractor Review of Contract Documents 1.13 Shop Drawings; Samples; Product Data 4.1.1 Examination of Contract Documents (“Submittals”) 4.1.2 Field Measurements 1.14 Omitted 4.1.3 Dimensions; Layouts and Field Architecting 1.15 City Inspector 4.1.4 Work in Accordance With Contract Documents 1.16 Contract Document Terms 4.2 Site Investigation; Subsurface Conditions 1.17 Contractor’s Superintendent 4.2.1 Contractor Investigation 1.18 Record Drawings 4.2.2 Subsurface Data 1.19 Project Manager 4.2.3 Subsurface Conditions 1.20 Construction Equipment 4.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.21 Site 4.3.1 Supervision of the Work 1.22 Field Clarifications 4.3.2 Responsibility for the Work 1.23 Defective or Non‐Conforming Work 4.3.3 Surveys 1.24 Delivery 4.3.4 Construction Utilities 1.25 Notice to Proceed 4.3.5 Existing Utilities; Removal, Relocation and 1.26 Progress Reports; Verified Reports Protection 1.27 Laws 4.4 Labor and Materials 4.4.1 Payment for Labor, Materials and Services 2. CITY 4.4.2 Employee Discipline 2.1 Information Required of City 4.4.3 Contractor’s Superintendent 2.1.1 Surveys; Site Information 4.4.4 Prohibition on Harassment 2.1.2 Permits; Fees 4.4.4.1 City’s Policy Prohibiting Harassment 2.1.3 Drawings and Specifications 4.4.4.2 Contractor’s Adoption of Anti‐ 2.1.4 Furnishing of Information Harassment Policy 2.2 City’s Right to Stop the Work 4.4.4.3 Prohibition on Harassment at the Site 2.3 Partial Occupancy or Use 4.5 Taxes 2.3.1 City’s Right to Partial Occupancy 4.6 Permits, Fees and Notices; Compliance With Laws 2.3.2 No Acceptance of Defective or Nonconforming 4.6.1 Payment of Permits, Fees 2.4 Work 4.6.2 Compliance With Laws 2.5 The City Inspector 4.6.3 Notice of Variation From Laws 4.7 Submittals 3. ARCHITECT 4.7.1 Purpose of Submittals 3.1 Architect’s Administration of the Contract 4.7.2 Contractor’s Submittals 3.1.1 Administration of Contract 4.7.2.1 Prompt Submittals 3.1.2 Periodic Site Inspections 4.7.2.2 Approval of Subcontractor Submittals 4.7.2.3 Verification of Submittal Information
General Conditions Page 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS
4.7.2.4 Information Included in Submittals 5. SUBCONTRACTORS 4.7.2.5 Contractor Responsibility for Deviations 5.1 Subcontracts 4.7.2.6 No Performance of Work Without 5.2 Substitution of Listed Subcontractor Approval 5.2.1 Substitution Process 4.7.3 Architect Review of Submittals 5.2.2 Responsibilities of Contractor Upon 4.7.4 Deferred Approval Items Substitution of Subcontractor 4.8 Materials and Equipment 4.8.1 Specified Materials, Equipment 6. INSURANCE; INDEMNITY; BONDS 4.8.2 Prior Approval of Substitutions or Alternatives 6.1 Workers’ Compensation Insurance; Employer’s 4.8.3 Placement of Material and Equipment Orders Liability Insurance 4.8.4 City’s Right to Place Orders for Materials 6.2 Commercial General Liability and Property Insurance and/or Equipment 6.3 Builder’s Risk “All‐Risk” Insurance 4.9 Safety 6.4 Coverage Amounts 4.9.1 Safety Programs 6.5 Evidence of Insurance; Subcontractor’s Insurance 4.9.2 Safety Precautions 6.5.1 Certificates of Insurance 4.9.3 Safety Signs, Barricades 6.5.2 Subcontractors’ Insurance 4.9.4 Safety Notices 6.6 Maintenance of Insurance 4.9.5 Safety Coordinator 6.7 Contractor’s Insurance Primary 4.9.6 Emergencies 6.8 Indemnity 4.9.7 Hazardous Materials 6.9 Payment Bond; Performance Bond 4.9.7.1 Use of Hazardous Materials 4.9.7.2 Prohibition on Use of Asbestos 7. CONTRACT TIME Construction Building Materials 7.1 Substantial Completion of the Work Within Contract (“ACBMs”) Time 4.9.7.3 Disposal of Hazardous Materials 7.2 Progress and Completion of the Work 4.10 Maintenance of Documents 7.2.1 Time of Essence 4.10.1 Documents at Site 7.2.2 Substantial Completion 4.10.2 Maintenance of Record Drawings 7.2.3 Correction or Completion of the Work After 4.11 Use of Site Substantial Completion 4.12 Clean‐Up 7.2.3.1 Items for Correction or Completion 4.13 Access to the Work 7.2.3.2 Time for Completing Correction or 4.14 Facilities and Information for the City Inspector Completion Items 4.14.1 Information to City Inspector 7.2.4 Final Completion 4.14.2 Facilities for City Inspector 7.2.5 Contractor Responsibility for Multiple 4.15 Patents and Royalties Inspections 4.16 Cutting and Patching 7.2.6 Final Acceptance 4.17 Encountering of Hazardous Materials 7.3 Progress Schedule 4.18 Wage Rates; Employment of Labor 7.3.1 Submittal of Preliminary Construction Schedule 4.18.1 Determination of Prevailing Rates 7.3.2 Review of Preliminary Construction Schedule 4.18.2 Prevailing Rate Penalty 7.3.3 Preparation and Submittal of Contract 4.18.3 Payroll Records Construction Schedule 4.18.4 Hours of Work 7.3.4 Revisions to Approved Construction Schedule 4.18.4.1 Limits on Hours of Work 7.3.5 Updates to Approved Construction Schedule 4.18.4.2 Penalty for Excess Hours 7.3.6 Contractor Responsibility for Construction 4.18.4.3 Contractor Responsibility Schedule 4.18.5 Apprentices 7.4 Adjustment of Contract Time 4.18.5.1 Employment of Apprentices 7.4.1 Excusable Delays 4.18.5.2 Apprenticeship Certificate 7.4.2 Compensable Delays 4.18.5.3 Ratio of Apprentices to Journeymen 7.4.3 Inexcusable Delays 4.18.5.4 Exemption From Ratios 7.4.4 Adjustment of Contract Time 4.18.5.5 Contributions to Trust Funds 7.4.4.1 Procedure for Adjustment of Contract 4.18.5.6 Contractor’s Compliance Time 4.18.6 Employment of Independent Contractors 7.4.4.2 Limitations Upon Adjustment of Contract 4.19 Assignment of Antitrust Claims Time on Account of Delays
General Conditions Page 2 GENERAL CONDITIONS
7.5 Liquidated Damages 9.4.1.3.2 Materials and Equipment 9.4.1.3.3 Construction Equipment 8. CONTRACT PRICE 9.4.1.3.4 Mark‐up on Costs of Changes to 8.1 Contract Price the Work 8.2 Cost Breakdown 9.4.1.4 Contractor Maintenance of Records 8.3 Progress Payments 9.4.2 Adjustment to Contract Time 8.3.1 Applications for Progress Payments 9.4.3 Addition or Deletion of Alternate Bid Item(s) 8.3.2 City’s Review of Applications for Progress 9.5 Change Orders Payments 9.6 Contractor Notice of Changes 8.3.3 Architect and City Inspector Review of 9.7 Disputed Changes Applications for Progress Payments 9.8 Emergencies 8.3.4 City’s Disbursement of Progress Payments 9.9 Minor Changes in the Work 8.3.4.1 Timely Disbursement of Progress 9.10 Unauthorized Changes Payments 8.3.4.2 Untimely Disbursement of Progress 10. SEPARATE CONTRACTORS Payments 10.1 City’s Right to Award Separate Contracts 8.3.4.3 City’s Right to Disburse Progress 10.2 City’s Coordination of Separate Contractors Payments by Joint Checks 10.3 Mutual Responsibility 8.3.4.4 No Waiver of Defective or Non‐ 10.4 Discrepancies or Defects Conforming Work 8.3.5 Progress Payments for Changed Work 11. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 8.3.6 Materials or Equipment Not Incorporated Into 11.1 Tests; Inspections; Observations the Work 11.1.1 Contractor’s Notice 8.3.6.1 Limitations Upon Payment 11.1.2 Cost of Tests and Inspections 8.3.6.2 Materials or Equipment Delivered and 11.1.3 Testing/Inspection Laboratory Stored at the Site 11.1.4 Additional Tests, Inspections and Approvals 8.3.6.3 Materials or Equipment Not Delivered or 11.2 Delivery of Certificates Stored at the Site 11.3 Timeliness of Tests, Inspections and Approvals 8.3.6.4 Materials or Equipment in Fabrication or Transit 12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 8.3.7 Exclusions From Progress Payments 12.1 Inspection of the Work 8.3.8 Title to Work 12.1.1 Access to the Work 8.3.9 Substitute Security for Retention 12.1.2 Limitations Upon Inspections 8.4 Final Payment 12.2 Uncovering of Work 8.4.1 Application for Final Payment 12.3 Rejection of Work 8.4.2 Conditions Precedent to Disbursement of Final 12.4 Correction of Work Payment 12.5 Removal of Non‐Conforming or Defective Work 8.4.3 Disbursement of Final Payment 12.6 Failure of Contractor to Correct Work 8.4.4 Waiver of Claims 12.7 Acceptance of Defective or Non‐Conforming Work 8.4.5 Claims Asserted After Final Payment 8.5 Withholding of Payments 13. WARRANTIES 8.6 Payments to Subcontractors 13.1 Workmanship and Materials 13.2 Warranty Work 9. CHANGES 13.3 Guarantee 9.1 Changes in the Work 13.4 Survival of Warranties 9.2 Oral Order of Change in the Work 9.3 Contractor Submittal of Data 14. SUSPENSION OF WORK 9.4 Adjustment to Contract Price and Contract Time on 14.1 City’s Right to Suspend Work Account of Changes to the Work 14.2 Adjustments to Contract Price and Contract Time 9.4.1 Adjustment to Contract Price 9.4.1.1 Mutual Agreement 15. TERMINATION 9.4.1.2 Determination by the City 15.1 Termination for Cause 9.4.1.3 Basis for Adjustment of Contract Price 15.1.1 City’s Right to Terminate 9.4.1.3.1 Labor 15.1.2 City’s Rights Upon Termination
General Conditions Page 3 GENERAL CONDITIONS
15.1.3 Completion by the Surety 15.1.4 Assignment and Assumption of Subcontracts 15.1.5 Costs of Completion 15.1.6 Contractor Responsibility for Damages 15.1.7 Conversion to Termination for Convenience 15.1.8 City’s Rights Cumulative 15.2 Termination for Convenience of the City
16. MISCELLANEOUS 16.1 Governing Law 16.2 Marginal Headings; Interpretation 16.3 Successors and Assigns 16.4 Cumulative Rights and Remedies; No Waiver 16.5 Severability 16.6 No Assignment by Contractor 16.7 Gender and Number 16.8 Independent Contractor Status 16.9 Notices 16.10 Disputes; Continuation of Work 16.11 Dispute Resolution; Arbitration 16.11.1 Claims Under $375,000.00 16.11.2 Arbitration 16.12 Capitalized Terms 16.13 Attorneys Fees 16.14 Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted 16.15 Days 16.16 Entire Agreement.
General Conditions Page 4 GENERAL CONDITIONS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1. DEFINITIONS; GENERAL 1.1 City. The “City” refers to The City of Arroyo Grande and unless otherwise stated, includes the City’s authorized representatives, including the Project Manager, if a Project Manager is designated, the City Council and the City’s officers, employees, agents and representatives.
1.2 Contractor. The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement; references to “Contractor” include the Contractor’s authorized representative. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, references therein to “Contractor” shall be deemed to include references to Subcontractors and Sub‐Subcontractors.
1.3 Architect .The Architect is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement; references to the “Architect” includes the Architect’s authorized representative(s) and Design Consultants to the Architect and their respective authorized representatives(s).
1.4 The Work. The “Work” is the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment or services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.
1.5 The Project. The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed by the Contractor under the Contract Documents which may be the whole or a part of the Project and which may include construction by the City or by separate contractors.
1.6 Surety. The Surety is the person or entity that executes, as surety, the Contractor’s Labor and Material Payment Bond and/or Performance Bond.
1.7 Subcontractors; Sub‐Subcontractors. A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work. “Subcontractor” does not include a separate contractor to the City or subcontractors of any separate contractor. A Sub‐ Subcontractor is a person or entity of any tier, who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site.
1.8 Material Supplier. A Material Supplier is any person or entity who only furnishes materials, equipment or supplies for the Work without fabricating, installing or consuming them in the Work.
1.9 Drawings and Specifications. The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, showing generally, the design, location and dimensions of the Work and may include without limitation, plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules or diagrams. The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards, criteria and workmanship for the Work and related services. The Drawings and Specifications delineate and describe the Work and its component parts so as to permit skilled and competent contractors to bid upon the Work and prosecute the same to completion.
1.10 Special Conditions; Supplemental Conditions. If made a part of the Contract Documents, Special Conditions and Supplemental Conditions are special or supplemental provisions, not otherwise provided for in the Agreement or the General Conditions.
1.11 Contract Documents. The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between the City and the Contractor, Conditions of the Contract (whether General, Special, Supplemental or
General Conditions Page 5 GENERAL CONDITIONS
otherwise), Drawings, Specifications, including addenda thereto issued prior to execution of the Agreement and any other documents listed in the Agreement. The Contract Documents shall include modifications issued after execution of the Agreement. The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction.
1.12 Intent and Correlation of Contract Documents. 1.12.1 Work of the Contract Documents. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable therefrom as being necessary to produce the intended results. Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections or articles, and the arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. Where any portion of the Contract Documents is silent and information appears elsewhere in the Contract Documents, such other portions of the Contract Documents shall control. 1.12.2 Technical Terms. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words or terms that have well‐known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.
1.12.3 Conflict in Contract Documents. Conflicts, inconsistencies or ambiguities in the Contract Documents shall be resolved by the Architect in accordance with Article 3.1.9 of the General Conditions; where conflicts or inconsistencies arise between the Drawings and the Specifications, in resolving such conflicts or inconsistencies, the Architect will be governed generally by the following standards: the Drawings are intended to describe matters relating to placement, type, quantity and the like; the Specifications are intended to describe matters relating to quality, materials, compositions, manufacturers and the like.
1.13 Shop Drawings; Samples; Product Data (“Submittals”). Shop Drawings are diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub‐ Subcontractor, manufacturer, Material Supplier, or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Samples are physical examples of materials, equipment or workmanship forming a part of, or to be incorporated into the Work. Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings, Samples and Product Data prepared or furnished by the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors or Material Suppliers are collectively referred to as “Submittals”.
1.14 Ommitted.
1.15 City Inspector. The City Inspector is the individual designated and employed by the City in accordance with the requirements of Title 24 of the California Code of Regulations. The City Inspector is authorized to act on behalf of the City and in connection with the Project as provided for in the Contract Documents and in Title 24 of the California Code of Regulations, as the same may be amended from time to time.
1.16 Contract Document Terms. The term “provide” means “provide complete in place” or to “furnish and install” such item. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the terms “approved”; “directed”; “satisfactory”; “accepted”; “acceptable”; “proper”; “required”; “necessary” and “equal” shall mean as approved, directed, satisfactory, accepted, acceptable, proper, required, necessary and equal, in the opinion of the Architect. The term “typical” as used
General Conditions Page 6 GENERAL CONDITIONS
in the Contract Documents shall require the installation or furnishing of such item(s) of the Work designated as “typical” in all other areas similarly marked as “typical”; Work in such other areas shall conform to that shown as “typical” or as reasonably inferable therefrom.
1.17 Contractor’s Superintendent. The Contractor’s Superintendent is the individual employed by the Contractor whose principal responsibility shall be the supervision and coordination of the Work; the Contractor’s Superintendent shall not perform routine construction labor. Communications relating to the Work or the Contract Documents given to the Contractor’s Superintendent shall be deemed to have been given to the Contractor.
1.18 Record Drawings. The Record Drawings are a set of the Drawings marked by the Contractor during the performance of the Work to indicate completely and accurately the actual as‐built condition of the Work. The Record Drawings shall be sufficient for a capable and qualified drafter to modify the Drawings to reflect and indicate the Work actually in place at Final Completion of the Work.
1.19 Project Manager. The Project Manager, if any, is the individual or entity designated as such in the Special Conditions. The Project Manager is an independent contractor retained by the City and shall be authorized and empowered to act on behalf of the City. In the event that a Project Manager is not designated in the Special Conditions, the City reserves the right to designate a Project Manager at any time during Contractor’s performance of the Work. The City reserves the right to remove or replace the Project Manager during Contractor’s performance of the Work. The designation of a Project Manager, if one has not been designated in the Special Conditions, or the removal or replacement of the designated Project Manager shall not result in adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Time or otherwise affect, limit or restrict Contractor’s obligations hereunder.
1.20 Construction Equipment. “Construction Equipment” is equipment utilized for the performance of any portion of the Work, but which is not incorporated into the Work.
1.21 Site. The Site is the physical area designated in the Contract Documents for Contractor’s performance, construction and installation of the Work. The extent, nature and scope of the Work which can be performed in, on or about the Site shall be limited as set forth in the Contract Documents or by operation of the Laws.
1.22 Field Clarifications. A written or graphic document consisting of supplementary details, instructions or information issued on behalf of the City which clarifies or supplements the Contract Documents and which becomes a part of the Contract Documents upon issuance. Field Clarifications do not constitute an adjustment of the Contract Time or the Contract Price, unless a Change Order relating to a Field Clarification is authorized and issued under the Contract Documents.
1.23 Defective or Non‐Conforming Work. Defective or non‐conforming Work is any Work which is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient by: (a) not conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents; (b) not conforming to the standards of workmanship of the applicable trade or industry; (c) not being in compliance with the requirements of any inspection, reference, standard, test, or approval required by the Contract Documents; or (d) damage occurring prior to Final Completion of all of the Work. The Contractor shall promptly correct, repair or replace any portion of the Work subject to a Notice of Non‐Compliance. The form of the Notice of Non‐ Compliance is incorporated into the Special Conditions.
General Conditions Page 7 GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.24 Delivery. The term “delivery” used in conjunction with any equipment, materials or other items to be incorporated into the Work shall mean the unloading and storage in a protected condition pending incorporation into the Work.
1.25 Notice to Proceed. The Notice to Proceed is the written notice issued by or on behalf of the City to the Contractor authorizing the Contractor to proceed with commencement of the Work and which establishes the date for commencement of the Contract Time.
1.26 Progress Reports; Verified Reports. Progress Reports are written reports prepared by the Contractor and its Subcontractors on a daily basis. Daily Progress Reports shall be completed and submitted to the City not later than 9:00 A.M. of the ensuing business day. Daily Progress Reports must include: (i) the number of labor and supervising personnel at the Site; (ii) the labor/work classification of each laborer; (iii) a detailed description of the Work in progress and completed; (iv) weather/environmental conditions; and (v) problems encountered with a potential impact to the Contract Time or the Contract Price. Verified Reports are periodic written reports prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the DSA; Verified Reports shall be in such form and content as required by the applicable provisions of Title 24 of the California Code of Regulations. A material obligation of the Contractor is the preparation of complete and accurate Progress Reports, if required, and Verified Reports as well as the timely submission of the same.
1.27 Laws. The term “Laws” as used in the Contract Documents shall refer to all laws, ordinances, codes, rules and/or regulations promulgated by any governmental or quasi‐governmental agency with jurisdiction over any portion of the Work and which apply to any portion of the Work. Laws refer to those enacted and in effect as of the execution of the Agreement, amendments thereto occurring during the performance of the Work and subsequently enacted Laws that take effect during the performance of the Work. No adjustment of the Contract Time or the Contract Price shall be allowed for the Contractor’s compliance with the Laws.
2. CITY 2.1 Information Required of City. 2.1.1 Surveys; Site Information. Information, if any, concerning physical characteristics of the Site, including without limitation, surveys, soils reports, and utility locations, to be provided by the City are set forth in the Contract Documents. Information not provided by the City or necessary information in addition to that provided by the City concerning physical characteristics of the Site which is required shall be obtained by Contractor without adjustment to the Contract Price or the Contract Time. 2.1.2 Permits; Fees. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the City shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities which relate to the Work of the Contractor under the Contract Documents. If permits and fees are designated as the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for obtaining the same; the cost of such permits or fees and any costs incurred by the Contractor in obtaining such permits shall be included within the Contract Price. 2.1.3 Drawings and Specifications. Except as otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents, the City shall furnish the Contractor, free of charge, the number of copies of the Drawings and the Specifications as set forth in the Special Conditions. All of the Drawings and the Specifications provided by the City to the Contractor remain the property of the City; the Contractor shall not use the Drawings or the Specifications in connection with any other work of improvement other than the Work of the Project. 2.1.4 Furnishing of Information. Information or services to be provided by the City under the Contract Documents shall be furnished by the City with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in the orderly progress of the Work. Information about existing conditions
General Conditions Page 8 GENERAL CONDITIONS
furnished by the City under the Contract Documents is obtained from sources believed to be reliable, but the City neither guarantees or warrants that such information is complete and accurate. The Contractor shall verify all information provided by the City. To the extent that the Contract Documents depict existing conditions on or about the Site, or the Work involves the renovation, removal or remodeling of existing improvements, or the Work involves any tie‐in or other connection with any existing improvements, the conditions and/or existing improvements depicted in the Contract Documents are as they are believed to exist. Contractor shall bear the risk of any variations between conditions or existing improvements depicted in the Contract Documents and those conditions or existing improvements actually encountered in the performance of the Work. The existence of any variations between conditions or existing improvements depicted in the Contract Documents and those actually encountered in the performance of the Work shall not result in any City liability therefore, nor shall any such variations result in an adjustment of the Contract Time or the Contract Price.
2.2 City’s Right to Stop the Work. In addition to the City’s right to suspend the Work or terminate the Contract pursuant to the Contract Documents, the City, may, by written order, direct the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such stop work order has been eliminated if the Contractor: (i) fails to correct Work which is not in conformity and in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, or (ii) otherwise fails to carry out the Work in conformity and accordance with the Contract Documents. The right of the City to stop the Work hereunder shall not be deemed a duty on the part of the City to exercise such right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, nor shall the City’s exercise of such right waive or limit the exercise of any other right or remedy of the City under the Contract Documents or at law.
2.3 Partial Occupancy or Use. 2.3.1 City’s Right to Partial Occupancy. The City may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work, provided that: (i) the City has obtained the consent of, or is otherwise authorized by, public authorities with jurisdiction thereof, to so occupy or use such portion of the Work and (ii) the City and the Contractor have accepted, in writing, the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, utilities, damage to the Work, insurance and the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents for such portion of the Work partially used or occupied by the City. If the Contractor and the City are unable to agree upon the matters set forth in (ii) above, the City may nevertheless use or occupy any portion of the Work, with the responsibility for such matters subject to resolution in accordance with the Contract Documents. Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use of the Work, or portions thereof, the City, the City Inspector , the Contractor and the Architect shall jointly inspect the portions of the Work to be occupied or to be used to determine and record the condition of the Work. The City’s use or occupancy of the Work or portions thereof pursuant to the preceding shall not be deemed “completion” of the Work as that term is used in Public Contract Code §7107. 2.3.2 No Acceptance of Defective or Nonconforming Work. Unless otherwise expressly agreed upon by the City and the Contractor, the City’s partial occupancy or use of the Work or any portion thereof, shall not constitute the City’s acceptance of the Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents or which is otherwise defective.
General Conditions Page 9 GENERAL CONDITIONS
2.4 The City Inspector. In addition to the authority and rights of the City Inspector as provided for elsewhere in the Contract Documents, all of the Work shall be performed under the observation of the City Inspector. The City Inspector shall have access to all parts of the Work at any time, wherever located and whether partially or completely fabricated, manufactured, furnished or installed. The performance of the duties of the City Inspector under the Contract Documents shall not relieve or limit the Contractor’s performance of its obligations under the Contract Documents.
3. ARCHITECT 3.1 Architect’s Administration of the Contract 3.1.1 Administration of Contract. The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be one of the City’s representatives during construction until the time that Final Payment is due the Contractor under the Contract Documents. The Architect will advise and consult with the City, the Project Manager and the City Inspector with respect to the administration of the Contract and the Work. The Architect is authorized to act on behalf of the City to the extent provided for in the Contract Documents; and shall have the responsibilities and powers established by law, including Title 24 of the California Code of Regulations. 3.1.2 Periodic Site Inspections. The Architect will visit the Site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the completed Work and to determine, in general, if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous Site inspections to check quality or quantity of the Work. On the basis of Site observations as an Architect, the Architect will keep the City informed of the progress of the Work, and will endeavor to guard the City against defects and deficiencies in the Work. 3.1.3 Contractor Responsibility for Construction Means, Methods and Sequences. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, these being solely the Contractor’s responsibility. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or of any other persons performing portions of the Work.
3.1.4 Verification of Applications for Payment. In accordance with Article 8 hereof, the Architect will review the Contractor’s Applications for Progress Payments and for Final Payment, verify the extent of Work performed and the amount properly due the Contractor on such Application for Payment.
3.1.5 Rejection of Work. The Architect is authorized to reject Work which is defective or does not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, for implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Architect will have authority to require additional inspections or testing of the Work, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. Neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith by the Architect to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the at to the Contractor, Subcontractors, Material Suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons performing portions of the Work.
General Conditions Page 10 GENERAL CONDITIONS
3.2 Submittals. 3.2.1 Architect’s Review. The Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor’s Submittals, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review of Submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s Submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of its obligations under the Contract Documents. The Architect’s review of Submittals shall not constitute approval of safety measures, programs or precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect’s approval of a specific item in a Submittal shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component with the Submittal(s) required and relating to such assembly have been reviewed by the Architect. 3.2.2 Time for Architect’s Review. The Architect’s review of Submittals will be conducted promptly so as not to delay or hinder the progress of the Work or the activities of the Contractor, the City or the City’s separate contractors while allowing sufficient time, in the Architect’s reasonable professional judgment, to permit adequate review of Submittals. The foregoing notwithstanding, the Architect’s review and return of Submittals will conform with the time limits and other conditions, if any, set forth in the Specifications or the Submittal Schedule if the Submittal Schedule is required by other provisions of the Contract Documents.
3.3 Changes to the Work; Change Orders. The Architect will prepare Change Orders, and may authorize minor Changes in the Work that do not result in adjustment of the Contract Time or the Contract Price.
3.4 Completion. The Architect will conduct observations to determine the date of Substantial Completion and the date of Final Completion, will receive and forward to the City, for the City’s review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract Documents and assembled by the Contractor, and will verify that the Contractor has complied with all requirements of the Contract Documents and is entitled to receipt of Final Payment. If the Architect is requested by the Contractor to conduct observations to determine Substantial Completion or Final Completion and the Architect determines that Substantial Completion or Final Completion have not been achieved by the Contractor the Contractor shall be solely responsible for all fees, costs and expenses of the Architect to conduct subsequent observation(s) to determine if Substantial Completion or Final Completion have been achieved.
3.5 Interpretation of Contract Documents. The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents on written request of either the City or the Contractor. The Architect’s respond to such requests with reasonable promptness and within the time limits agreed upon, if any. If no agreement is reached establishing the time for the Architect’s review and response to requests, the Architect shall be afforded a fifteen (15) day period after receipt of such request to review and respond thereto. Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of Drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both the City and the Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents.
General Conditions Page 11 GENERAL CONDITIONS
3.6 Request for Information. If the Contractor encounters any condition which the Contractor believes, in good faith and with reasonable basis, is the result of an ambiguity, conflict, error or omission in the Contract Documents (collectively “The Conditions”) it shall be affirmative obligation of the Contractor to timely notify the Architect, in writing, of the Conditions encountered and to request information from the Architect necessary to address and resolve any such Conditions before proceeding with any portion of the Work affected or which may be affected by such Conditions. If the Contractor fails to timely notify the Architect in writing of any Conditions encountered and the Contractor proceeds to perform any portion of the Work containing or affected by such Conditions, the Contractor shall bear all costs associated with or required to correct, remove, or otherwise remedy any portion of the Work affected thereby without adjustment of the Contract Time or the Contract Price. In requesting information of the Architect to address and resolve any Conditions the Contractor shall act with promptness in submitting any such written request so as to allow the Architect a reasonable period of time to review, evaluate and respond to any such request, taking into account the then current status of the progress and completion of the Work and the actual or potential impact of any such Conditions upon the completion of the Work within the Contract Time. The Contract Time shall not be subject to adjustment in the event that the Contractor shall fail to timely request information from the Architect. The Architect’s responses to any such Contractor request for information shall conform to the standards and time frame set forth in Article 3.5 of these General Conditions. The foregoing provisions notwithstanding, in the event that the Architect reasonably determines that any of Contractor’s request(s) for information: (i) does not reflect adequate or competent supervision or coordination by the Contractor or any Subcontractor; or (ii) does not reflect the Contractor’s adequate or competent knowledge of the requirements of the Work or the Contract Documents; or (iii) is not justified for any other reason, Contractor shall be liable to the City for all costs incurred by the City associated with the processing, reviewing, evaluating and responding to any such request for information, including without limitation, fees of the Architect and any other design consultant to the Architect or the City. In responding to any of Contractor’s request(s) for information, the Architect shall, in the response, indicate if the Architect has made the determination pursuant to the preceding sentence and, if so, the amount of costs to be borne by the Contractor for the processing, review, evaluation and response to the request for information. Thereafter, the City is authorized to deduct such amount from any portion of the Contract Price then or thereafter due the Contractor.
3.7 Communications; Architect’s Role. All communications regarding the Work, the performance thereof or the Contract Documents shall be in writing; verbal communications shall be reduced to writing. Communications between the Contractor and the City shall be through the Architect. Communications between separate contractors, if any, shall be through the Architect. All written communications between the Contractor and any Subcontractor, Material Supplier or others directly or indirectly engaged by the Contractor to perform or provide any portion of the Work shall be available to the City, the Project Manager and the Architect for review, inspection and reproduction as may be requested from time to time. Failure or refusal of the Contractor to permit the City, the Project Manager or Architect to review, inspect or reproduce such written communications may be deemed a default of Contractor hereunder.
3.8 Termination of Architect; Substitute Architect. In case of termination of employment of the Architect, the City shall appoint a substitute Architect whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect.
4. THE CONTRACTOR 4.1 Contractor Review of Contract Documents. 4.1.1 Examination of Contract Documents. The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by the City pursuant to the Contract Documents and shall at once report, in writing, to the Architect
General Conditions Page 12 GENERAL CONDITIONS
any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered. If the Contractor performs any Work knowing, or with reasonable diligence should have known that, it involves an error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without prior notice to the Architect of the same, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such performance and shall bear all attributable costs for correction of the same. 4.1.2 Field Measurements. Prior to commencement of the Work, or portions thereof, the Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions at the Site and shall carefully compare such field measurements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor with information provided in the Contract Documents. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall be reported to the Architect at once. 4.1.3 Dimensions; Layouts and Field Architecting. Dimensions indicated in the Drawings are intended for reference only. The Drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and schematic in nature; the Contractor shall be solely responsible for dimensioning and coordinating the Work of the Contract Documents. All field Architecting required for laying out the Work and establishing grades for earthwork operations shall be by the Contractor at its expense. Any field Architecting or other Architecting to be provided or performed by the Contractor under the Contract Documents and required or necessary for the proper execution or installation of the Work shall be provided and performed by the an Architect duly registered under the laws of the State of California in the Architecting discipline for such portion of the Work. 4.1.4 Work in Accordance With Contract Documents. The Contractor shall perform all of the Work in strict conformity with the Contract Documents and approved Submittals.
4.2 Site Investigation; Subsurface Conditions. 4.2.1 Contractor Investigation. The Contractor shall be responsible for, and by executing the Agreement acknowledges, that it has carefully examined the Site and has taken all steps it deems reasonably necessary to ascertain all conditions which may effect the Work, or the cost thereof, including, without limitation, conditions bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling or storage of materials; availability of labor or utilities; access to the Site; and the physical conditions and the character of equipment, materials, labor and services necessary to perform the Work. Any failure of the Contractor to do so will not relieve it from the responsibility for fully and completely performing all Work without adjustment to the Contract Price or the Contract Time. The City assumes no responsibility to the Contractor for any understandings or representations concerning conditions or characteristics of the Site, or the Work, made by any of its officers, employees or agents prior to the execution of the Agreement, unless such understandings or representations are expressly set forth in the Agreement. 4.2.2 Subsurface Data. By executing the Agreement, the Contractor acknowledges that it has examined the boring data and other subsurface data available and satisfied itself as to the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials, including without limitation, obstacles which may be encountered in performance of the Work, insofar as this information is reasonably ascertainable from an inspection of the Site, review of available subsurface data and analysis of information furnished by the City under the Contract Documents. Subsurface data or other soils investigation report provided by the City hereunder are not a part of the Contract Documents. Information contained in such data or report regarding subsurface conditions, elevations of existing grades, or below grade elevations are approximate only and is neither guaranteed or warranted by the City to be complete and accurate. The Contractor shall examine all boring and other subsurface data to make its own independent interpretation of the subsurface conditions and acknowledges that its bid is based upon its own opinion of the conditions which may be encountered. The City assumes no responsibility for any conclusions or interpretations made by Contractor on the basis of available subsurface data or other information furnished by City under the Contract Documents.
General Conditions Page 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS
4.2.3 Subsurface Conditions. If the Work under the Contract Documents involves digging trenches or other excavations that extend deeper than four feet below the surface, the Contractor shall promptly and before the following conditions are disturbed, notify the City Inspector , in writing, of any: (i) material that the Contractor believes may be material that is hazardous waste, as defined in California Health and Safety Code §25117, that is required to be removed to a Class I or Class II or Class III disposal site in accordance with provisions of existing law; (ii) subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing from those indicated; or (iii) unknown physical conditions at the site of any unusual nature, different materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in the Work or the character provided for in the Contract Documents. If upon notice to the City of the conditions described above and upon the City’s investigation thereof, the City determines that the conditions so materially differ or involve such hazardous materials which require an adjustment to the Contract Price or the Contract Time, the City shall issue a Change Order in accordance with Article 9 hereof. In accordance with California Public Contract Code §7104, any dispute arising between the Contractor and the City as to any of the conditions listed in (i), (ii) or (iii) above, shall not excuse the Contractor from the completion of the Work within the Contract Time and the Contractor shall proceed with all Work to be performed under the Contract Documents. The City reserves the right to terminate the Contract pursuant to Article 15.2 hereof should the City determine not to proceed because of any condition described in (i), (ii) or (iii) above.
4.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures. 4.3.1 Supervision of the Work. The Contractor shall supervise and direct performance of the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract Documents, unless Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of completed or partially completed portions of Work to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. 4.3.2 Responsibility for the Work. The Contractor shall be responsible to the City for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and all other persons performing any portion of the Work under a contract with the Contractor. The Contractor shall not be relieved of the obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Project Manager, City Inspector or the Architect in the Architect’s administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. 4.3.3 Surveys. The Contractor shall prepare or cause to be prepared all detailed surveys necessary for performance of the Work, including without limitation, slope stakes, points, lines and elevations. The Contractor shall be responsible for the establishment, location, maintenance and preservation of benchmarks, reference points and stakes for the Work. The cost of any surveys and the establishment, location, maintenance and preservation of benchmarks, reference points and stakes shall be included within the Contract Price. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all loss or costs resulting from the loss, destruction, disturbance or damage of benchmarks, reference points or stakes. 4.3.4 Construction Utilities. The Contractor shall arrange for the furnishing of and shall pay the costs of all utility services, including, without limitation, electricity, water, gas and telephone necessary for performance of the Work and the Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall furnish and install necessary or appropriate temporary distributions of utilities, including meters, to the Site. Any such
General Conditions Page 14 GENERAL CONDITIONS
temporary distributions shall be removed by the Contractor upon completion of the Work. The costs of all such utility services, including the installation and removal of temporary distributions thereof, shall be borne by the Contractor and included in the Contract Price. 4.3.5 Existing Utilities; Removal, Relocation and Protection. In accordance with California Government Code §4215, the City shall assume the responsibility for the timely removal, relocation, or protection of existing main or trunkline utility facilities located on the Site which are not identified in the Drawings, Specifications or other Contract Documents. Contractor shall be compensated for the costs of locating, repairing damage not due to the Contractor’s failure to exercise reasonable care, and removing or relocating such utility facilities not indicated in the Drawings, Specifications and other Contract Documents with reasonable accuracy, and for equipment on the Site necessarily idled during such work. Contractor shall not be assessed Liquidated Damages for delay in completion of the Work when such delay is caused by the failure of the City or the City of the utility to provide for removal or relocation of such utility facilities. Nothing in this Article 4.3.5 shall be deemed to require the City to indicate the presence of existing service laterals or appurtenances whenever the presence of such utilities on the Site can be inferred from the presence of other visible facilities, such as buildings, meters and junction boxes, on or adjacent to the Site. If the Contractor encounters utility facilities not identified by the City in the Drawings, Specifications or other Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately notify, in writing, the City, the City Inspector, the Architect, the Project Manager and the utility owner. In the event that such utility facilities are owned by a public utility, the public utility shall have the sole discretion to perform repairs or relocation work or permit the Contractor to do such repairs or relocation work at a reasonable price.
4.4 Labor and Materials. 4.4.1 Payment for Labor, Materials and Services. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, Construction Equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated in the Work. 4.4.2 Employee Discipline. The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees, the employees of any Subcontractor or Sub‐ subcontractor, and all other persons performing any part of the Work at the Site. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. The Contractor shall dismiss from its employ and direct any Subcontractor or Sub‐subcontractor to dismiss from their employment any person deemed by the City to be unfit or incompetent to perform Work and thereafter, the Contractor shall not employ nor permit the employment of such person for performance of any part of the Work without the prior written consent of the City, which consent may be withheld in the reasonable discretion of the City. 4.4.3 Contractor’s Superintendent. The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and all necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Site at all times during performance of the Work. The Contractor’s communications relating to the Work or the Contract Documents shall be through the Contractor’s superintendent. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor and communications given to the superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. The Contractor shall dismiss the superintendent or any of his/her assistants if they are deemed, in the sole reasonable judgment of the City, to be unfit, incompetent or incapable of performing the functions assigned to them. In such event, the City shall have the right to approve of the replacement superintendent or assistant.
General Conditions Page 15 GENERAL CONDITIONS
4.4.4 Prohibition on Harassment. 4.4.4.1 City’s Policy Prohibiting Harassment. The City is committed to providing a campus and workplace free of sexual harassment and harassment based on factors such as race, color religion, national origin, ancestry, age, medical condition, marital status, disability or veteran status. Harassment includes without limitation, verbal, physical or visual conduct which creates an intimidating, offensive or hostile environment such as racial slurs; ethnic jokes; posting of offensive statements, posters or cartoons or similar conduct. Sexual harassment includes without limitation the solicitation of sexual favors, unwelcome sexual advances, or other verbal, visual or physical conduct of a sexual nature. 4.4.4.2 Contractor’s Adoption of Anti‐Harassment Policy. Contractor shall adopt and implement all appropriate and necessary policies prohibiting any form of discrimination in the workplace, including without limitation harassment on the basis of any classification protected under local, state or federal law, regulation or policy. Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to prevent harassment from occurring, including without limitation affirmatively raising the subject of harassment among its employees, expressing strong disapproval of any form of harassment, developing appropriate sanctions, informing employees of their right to raise and how to raise the issue of harassment and informing complainants of the outcome of an investigation into a harassment claim. Contractor shall require that any Subcontractor or Sub‐subcontractor performing any portion of the Work to adopt and implement policies in conformity with this Article 4.4.4. 4.4.4.3 Prohibition on Harassment at the Site. Contractor shall not permit any person, whether employed by Contractor, a Subcontractor, Sub‐subcontractor, or any other person or entity, performing any Work at or about the Site to engage in any prohibited form of harassment. Any such person engaging in a prohibited form of harassment directed to any individual performing or providing any portion of the Work at or about the Site shall be subject to appropriate sanctions in accordance with the anti‐harassment policy adopted and implemented pursuant to Article 4.4.4.2 above. Any person, performing or providing Work on or about the Site engaging in a prohibited form of harassment directed to any student, faculty member or staff of the City or directed to any other person on or about the Site shall be subject to immediate removal and shall be prohibited thereafter from providing or performing any portion of the Work. Upon the City’s receipt of any notice or complaint that any person employed directly or indirectly by Contractor in performing or providing the Work has engaged in a prohibited form of harassment, the City will promptly undertake an investigation of such notice or complaint. In the event that the City, after such investigation, reasonably determines that a prohibited form of harassment has occurred, the City shall promptly notify the Contractor of the same and direct that the person engaging in such conduct be immediately removed from the Site. Unless the City’s determination that a prohibited form of harassment has occurred is grossly negligent or without reasonable cause, City shall have no liability for directing the removal of any person determined to have engaged in a prohibited form of harassment nor shall the Contract Price or the Contract Time be adjusted on account thereof. Contractor and the Surety shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the City and its employees, officers, board of trustees, agents, and representatives from any and all claims, liabilities, judgments, awards, actions or causes of actions, including without limitation, attorneys’ fees, which arise out of, or pertain in any manner to: (i) the assertion by any person dismissed from performing or
General Conditions Page 16 GENERAL CONDITIONS
providing work at the direction of the City pursuant to this Article 4.4.4.3; or (ii) the assertion by any person that any person directly or indirectly under the employment or direction of the Contractor has engaged in a prohibited form of harassment directed to or affecting such person. The obligations of the Contractor and the Surety under the preceding sentence are in addition to, and not in lieu of, any other obligation of defense, indemnity and hold harmless whether arising under the Contract Documents, at law or otherwise; these obligations survive completion of the Work or the termination of the Contract.
4.5 Taxes. The Contractor shall pay, without adjustment of the Contract Price, all sales, consumer, use and other taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Contractor under the Contract Documents.
4.6 Permits, Fees and Notices; Compliance With Laws. 4.6.1 Payment of Permits, Fees. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permits, other permits, governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary or required for the proper execution and completion of the Work. 4.6.2 Compliance With Laws. The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and other orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. 4.6.3 Notice of Variation From Laws. If the Contractor knows, or has reason to believe, that any portion of the Contract Documents are at variance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, regulations or rules, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and the City Inspector , in writing, of the same. If the Contractor performs Work knowing, or with reasonable diligence should have known, it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, rules or regulations applicable to the Work without such notice to the Architect and the City Inspector, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work and shall bear the attributable costs arising or associated therefrom, including without limitation, the removal, replacement or correction of the same.
4.7 Submittals. 4.7.1 Purpose of Submittals. Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals (collectively “Submittals”) are not Contract Documents. The purpose for submission of Submittals is to demonstrate, for those portions of the Work for which Submittals are required, the manner in which the Contractor proposes to provide or incorporate such item of the Work in conformity with the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. 4.7.2 Contractor’s Submittals. 4.7.2.1 Prompt Submittals. The Contractor shall review, approve and submit to the Architect or such other person or entity designated by the City, the number of copies of Submittals required by the Contract Documents. All Submittals required by the Contract Documents shall be prepared, assembled and submitted by the Contractor to the Architect within the time frames set forth in the Submittal Schedule incorporated and made a part of the Approved Construction Schedule prepared and submitted by the Contractor pursuant to Article 7 of these General Conditions. Contractor’s submission of Submittals in conformity with the Submittal Schedule is a material consideration of the Contract. In the event of Contractor’s failure or refusal to deliver Submittals to the Architect in accordance with the Submittal Schedule, the Contractor shall be subject to per diem assessments in the amount set forth in the Special Conditions for each day of delayed submission for any Submittal beyond the
General Conditions Page 17 GENERAL CONDITIONS
date set forth in the Submittal Schedule for Contractor’s submission of such Submittal. Contractor and City acknowledge and agree that if Contractor shall fail to deliver Submittals in accordance with the Submittal Schedule, the City will incur costs and expenses not contemplated by the Contract Documents, the exact amount of which are difficult to ascertain and fix. Contractor and the City acknowledge and agree that the per diem assessment for delayed submission of Submittals set forth in the Special Conditions represents a reasonable estimate of costs and expenses the City will incur as a result of delayed submission of Submittals and that the same is not a penalty. Notwithstanding Contractor’s submission of all required Submittals in accordance with the Submittal Schedule, in the event that the City or the Architect reasonably determines that all or any portion of such Submittals fail to comply with the requirements of Articles 4.7.2.2, 4.7.2.3 and 4.7.2.4 of these General Conditions and/or such Submittals are not otherwise complete and accurate so as to require re‐submission, Contractor shall bear all costs associated with the review and approval of resubmitted Submittals, including without limitation Architect’s fees incurred in connection therewith; provided that such costs are in addition to, and not in lieu of, any per diem assessments imposed under this Article 4.7.2.1 for Contractor’s delayed submission of Submittals. In the event of the City’s imposition of the per diem assessments due to the Contractor’s delayed submission of Submittals or in the event of the City’s assessment of costs and expenses incurred to review incomplete or inaccurate Submittals, the City may deduct the same from any portion the Contract Price then or thereafter due the Contractor. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents or which do not otherwise conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents may be returned without action. No adjustment to the Contract Time or the Contract Price shall be granted to the Contractor on account of its failure to make timely submission of any Submittal. 4.7.2.2 Approval of Subcontractor Submittals. All Submittals prepared by Subcontractors, of any tier, Material Suppliers, manufacturers or distributors shall bear the written approval of the Contractor thereto prior to submission to the Architect for review. Any Submittal not bearing the Contractor’s written approval shall be subject to return to the Contractor for re‐submittal in conformity herewith, with the same being deemed to not have been submitted. Any delay, impact or cost associated therewith shall be the sole and exclusive responsibility of the Contractor without adjustment to the Contract Time or the Contract Price. 4.7.2.3 Verification of Submittal Information. By approving and submission of Submittals, the Contractor represents to the City and Architect that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements, field construction criteria, catalog numbers and similar data related thereto and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such Submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. 4.7.2.4 Information Included in Submittals. All Submittals shall be accompanied by a written transmittal or other writing by the Contractor providing an identification of the portion of the Drawings or the Specifications pertaining to the Submittal, with each Submittal numbered consecutively for ease of reference along with the following information: (i) date of submission; (ii) project name; (iii) name of submitting Subcontractor; and (iv) if applicable, the revision number. The foregoing information is in addition to, and not in lieu
General Conditions Page 18 GENERAL CONDITIONS
of, any other information required for the Architect’s review, evaluation and approval of the Contractor’s Submittals. 4.7.2.5 Contractor Responsibility for Deviations. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for correcting deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect’s approval of Submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submission of the Submittal and the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Submittals by the Architect’s approval thereof. 4.7.2.6 No Performance of Work Without Approval. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring the Architect’s review and approval of Submittals until the Architect has completed its review and granted its approval of such Submittal. The Contractor shall not perform any portion of the Work forming a part of a Submittal or which is affected by a related Submittal until the entirety of the Submittal or other related Submittal has been fully approved. Such Work shall be in accordance with approved Submittals and other applicable portions of the Contract Documents. 4.7.3 Architect Review of Submittals. The purpose of the Architect’s review of Submittals and the time for the Architect’s return of Submittals to the Contractor shall be as set forth elsewhere in the Contract Documents. If the Architect returns a Submittal as rejected or requiring correction(s) and re‐submission, the Contractor, so as not to delay the progress of the Work, shall promptly thereafter resubmit a Submittal conforming with the requirements of the Contract Documents; the resubmitted Submittal shall indicate the portions thereof modified in order to obtain the Architect’s approval. When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness of such calculations and certifications accompanying Submittals. The Architect’s review of the Submittals is for the limited purposes described in the Contract Documents. 4.7.4 Deferred Approval Items. In the event that any portion of the Work is designated in the Contract Documents as a “Deferred Approval” item, Contractor shall be solely and exclusively responsible for the preparation of Submittals for such item(s) in a timely manner so as not to delay or hinder the completion of the Work within the Contract Time. All work, labor, materials, equipment or services necessary to complete the design, Architecting and permitting/approval of Deferred Approval Items shall be provided or performed by the Contractor without adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Time.
4.8 Materials and Equipment. 4.8.1 Specified Materials, Equipment. References in the Contract Documents to any specific article, device, equipment, product, material, fixture, patented process, form, method or type of construction, by name, make, trade name, or catalog number, with or without the words “or equal” shall be deemed to establish a minimum standard of quality or performance, and shall not be construed as limiting competition. 4.8.2 Prior Approval of Substitutions or Alternatives. The Contractor may propose to furnish alternatives or substitutes for a particular item specified in the Contract Documents, provided that the Contractor provides advance written notice to the Architect of such proposed substitution or alternative and certifies to the Architect that the quality, performance capability and functionality (including visual and/or aesthetic effect) of the proposed alternative or substitute will meet or exceed the quality, performance capability and functionality of the item or process specified, and must demonstrate to the Architect that the use of the substitution or alternative is appropriate and will not delay completion of the Work or result in an increase to the Contract Price. The
General Conditions Page 19 GENERAL CONDITIONS
Contractor shall submit Architecting, construction, dimension, visual, aesthetic and performance data to the Architect to permit its proper evaluation of the proposed substitution or alternative. If requested by the Architect, Contractor shall promptly furnish any additional information or data regarding a proposed substitution or alternative which the Architect deems reasonably necessary for the evaluation of the proposed substitution or alternative. The Contractor shall not provide, furnish or install any substitution or alternative without the Architect’s prior approval of the same; any alternative or substitution installed or incorporated into the Work without first obtaining the Architect’s approval of the same shall be subject to removal pursuant to Article 12 hereof. The Architect’s decision shall be final regarding the approval or disapproval of the Contractor’s proposed substitutions or alternatives. Neither the Contract Time nor the Contract Price shall be increased on account of any substitution or alternative proposed by the Contractor and which is approved by the Architect; provided, however, that in the event a substitution or alternative is approved by the Architect and purchase, fabrication and/or installation or such approved substitution or alternative shall be less expensive than the originally specified item, the Contract Price shall be reduced by the actual cost savings realized by the Contractor’s furnishing and/or installation of such approved substitution or alternative. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all costs and fees of the Architect, of the Architect’s consultant(s) and/or governmental agencies to review and/or approve any proposed substitution or alternative. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any increase in the cost of any approved substitution or alternative or any Work affected by such alternative or substitution. The foregoing notwithstanding, all requests for the Architect’s review and approval of any proposed substitution or alternative and all Architecting, construction, dimension and performance data substantiating the equivalency of the proposed substitution or alternative shall be submitted by Contractor not later than four (4) days prior to the date and time established as Bid Proposal Deadline. Any request for approval of proposed alternatives or substitutions submitted thereafter may be summarily rejected. The foregoing process and time limits shall apply to any proposed substitution or alternative regardless of whether the substitute or alternate item is to be provided, furnished or installed by Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Sub‐ Subcontractor, Material Supplier or Manufacturer. 4.8.3 Placement of Material and Equipment Orders. Contractor shall, after award of the Contract, promptly and timely place all orders for materials and/or equipment necessary for completion of the Work so that delivery of the same shall be made without delay or interruption to the timely completion of the Work. Contractor shall require that any Subcontractor or Sub‐Subcontractor performing any portion of the Work similarly place orders for all materials and/or equipment to be furnished by any such Subcontractor or Sub‐Subcontractor in a prompt and timely manner so that delivery of the same shall be made without delay or interruption to the timely completion of the Work. Upon request of the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish reasonably satisfactory written evidence of the placement of orders for materials and/or equipment necessary for completion of the Work, including without limitation, orders for materials and/or equipment to be provided, furnished or installed by any Subcontractor or Sub‐Subcontractor. 4.8.4 City’s Right to Place Orders for Materials and/or Equipment. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Contract Documents, in the event that the Contractor shall, upon request of the Architect, fail or refuse, for any reason, to provide reasonably satisfactory written evidence of the placement of orders for materials and/or equipment necessary for completion of the Work, or should the City determine, in its sole and reasonable discretion, that any orders for materials and/or equipment have not been placed in a manner so that such materials and/or equipment will be delivered to the Site so the Work can be completed without delay or interruption, the City shall have the right, but
General Conditions Page 20 GENERAL CONDITIONS
not the obligation, to place such orders on behalf of the Contractor. In the event that the City shall exercise the right to place orders for materials and/or equipment pursuant to the foregoing, the City’s conduct in that regard shall not be deemed to be an exercise, by the City, of any control over the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures for completion of the Work, all of which remain the responsibility and obligation of the Contractor. Notwithstanding the right of the City to place orders for materials and/or equipment pursuant to the foregoing, the election of the City to exercise, or not to exercise, such right shall not relieve the Contractor from any of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents, including without limitation, completion of the Work within the Contract Time and for the Contract Price. If the City exercises the right hereunder to place orders for materials and/or equipment on behalf of Contractor pursuant to the foregoing, Contractor shall reimburse the City for all costs and fees incurred by the City in placing such orders; such costs and fees may be deducted by the City from the Contract Price then or thereafter due the Contractor.
4.9 Safety 4.9.1 Safety Programs. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety programs required by applicable law, ordinance, regulation or governmental orders in connection with the performance of the Contract, or otherwise required by the type or nature of the Work. The Contractor’s safety program shall include all actions and programs necessary for compliance with California or federally statutorily mandated workplace safety programs, including without limitation, compliance with the California Drug Free Workplace Act of 1990 (California Government Code §§8350 et seq.). Without limiting or relieving the Contractor of its obligations hereunder, the Contractor shall require that its Subcontractors similarly initiate and maintain all appropriate or required safety programs. 4.9.2 Safety Precautions. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating and maintaining reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; (ii) the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor’s Subcontractors or Sub‐subcontractors; and (iii) other property or items at the site of the Work, or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. 4.9.3 Safety Signs, Barricades. The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and conditions resulting from performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection of property and persons, including, without limitation, posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying Citys and users of adjacent sites and utilities. 4.9.4 Safety Notices. The Contractor shall give or post all notices required by applicable law and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. 4.9.5 Safety Coordinator. The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor’s organization at the Site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents and the implementation and maintenance safety precautions and programs. This person shall be the Contractor’s superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the City Inspector and the Architect. 4.9.6 Emergencies. In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. 4.9.7 Hazardous Materials.
General Conditions Page 21 GENERAL CONDITIONS
4.9.7.1 Use of Hazardous Materials. In the event that the Contractor, any Subcontractor or anyone employed directly or indirectly by them shall use, at the Site, or incorporate into the Work, any material or substance deemed to be hazardous or toxic under any law, rule, ordinance, regulation or interpretation thereof (collectively “Hazardous Materials”), the Contractor shall comply with all laws, rules, ordinances or regulations applicable thereto and shall exercise all necessary safety precautions relating to the use, storage or disposal thereof. 4.9.7.2 Prohibition on Use of Asbestos Construction Building Materials (“ACBMs”). Notwithstanding any provision of the Drawings or the Specifications to the contrary, it is the intent of the City that ACBMs not be used or incorporated into any portion of the Work. In the event that any portion of the Work depicted in the Drawings or the Specifications shall require materials or products which the Contractor knows, or should have known with reasonably diligent investigation, to contain ACBMs, Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and the City Inspector of the same so that an appropriate alternative can be made in a timely manner so as not to delay the progress of the Work. Contractor warrants to the City that there are no materials or products used or incorporated into the Work which contain ACBMs. Whether before or after completion of the Work, if it is discovered that any product or material forming a part of the Work or incorporated into the Work contains ACBMs, the Contractor shall at its sole cost and expense remove such product or material in accordance with any laws, rules, procedures and regulations applicable to the handling, removal and disposal of ACBMs and to replace such product or material with non‐ACBM products or materials and to return the affected portion(s) of the Work to the finish condition depicted in the Drawings and Specifications relating to such portion(s) of the Work. Contractor’s obligations under the preceding sentence shall survive the termination of the Contract, the warranty period provided under the Contract Documents, the Contractor’s completion of the Work or the City’s acceptance of the Work. In the event that the Contractor shall fail or refuse, for any reason, to commence the removal and replacement of any material or product containing ACBMs forming a part of, or incorporated into the Work, within ten (10) days of the date of the City’s written notice to the Contractor of the existence of ACBM materials or products in the Work, the City may thereafter proceed to cause the removal and replacement of such materials or products in any manner which the City determines to be reasonably necessary and appropriate; all costs, expenses and fees, including without limitation fees and costs of consultants and attorneys, incurred by the City in connection with such removal and replacement shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and the Contractor’s Performance Bond Surety. 4.9.7.3 Disposal of Hazardous Materials. Contractor shall be solely and exclusively responsible for the disposal of any Hazardous Materials on or about the Contractor’s obligations hereunder shall include without limitation, the transportation and disposal of any Hazardous Materials in strict conformity with any and all applicable laws, regulations, orders, procedures or ordinances.
4.10 Maintenance of Documents. 4.10.1 Documents at Site. The Contractor shall maintain at the Site: (i) one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications and all addenda thereto; (ii) Change Orders approved by the City and all other modifications to the Contract Documents; (iii) Submittals reviewed by the Architect; (iv) Record Drawings; (v) Material Safety Data Sheets (AMSDS”) accompanying any materials, equipment or products delivered or stored at the Site or incorporated into the Work; and (vi) all building and other codes or regulations
General Conditions Page 22 GENERAL CONDITIONS
applicable to the Work, including without limitation, Title 24, Part 2 of the California Code of Regulations. During performance of the Work, all documents maintained by Contractor at the Site shall be available to the City, the Project Manager, the Architect, the City Inspector and DSA for review, inspection or reproduction. Upon completion of the Work, all documents maintained at the Site by the Contractor pursuant to the foregoing shall be assembled and transmitted to the Architect for delivery to the City. 4.10.2 Maintenance of Record Drawings. During its performance of the Work, the Contractor shall maintain Record Drawings consisting of a set of the Drawings that are marked to indicate all field changes made to adapt the Work depicted in the Drawings to field conditions, changes resulting from Change Orders and all concealed or buried installations, including without limitation, piping, conduit and utility services. All buried or concealed items of Work shall be completely and accurately marked and located on the Record Drawings. The Record Drawings shall be clean and all changes, corrections and dimensions shall be marked in a neat and legible manner in a contrasting color. Record Drawings relating to the Structural, Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing portions of the Work shall indicate without limitation, circuiting, wiring sizes, equipment/member sizing and shall depict the entirety of the as built conditions of such portions of the Work. The Contractor shall continuously maintain the Record Drawings during the performance of the Work. At any time during the Contractor’s performance of the Work, upon the request of the City, the City Inspector or the Architect, the Contractor shall make the Record Drawings maintained here under available for the City’s review and inspection. The City’s review and inspection of the Record Drawings during the Contractor’s performance of the Work shall be only for the purpose of generally verifying that Contractor is continuously maintaining the Record Drawings in a complete and accurate manner; any such inspection or review shall not be deemed to be the City’s approval or verification of the completeness or accuracy thereof. The failure or refusal of the Contractor to continuously maintain complete and accurate Record Drawings or to make available the Record Drawings for inspection and review by the City may be deemed by the City to be Contractor’s default of a material obligation hereunder. Without waiving, restricting or limiting any other right or remedy of the City for the Contractor’s failure or refusal to continuously maintain the Record Drawings, the City may, upon reasonably determining that the Contractor has not, or is not, continuously maintaining the Record Drawings in a complete and accurate manner, take appropriate action to cause the continuous maintenance of complete and accurate Record Drawings, in which event all fees and costs incurred or associated with such action shall be charged to the Contractor and the City may deduct the amount of such fees and costs from any portion of the Contract Price then or thereafter due the Contractor. In accordance with Article 8.4.2 of these General Conditions, prior to receipt of the Final Payment, Contractor shall deliver the Record Drawings to the Architect.
4.11 Use of Site. The Contractor shall confine operations at the Site to areas permitted by law, ordinances or permits, subject to any restrictions or limitations set forth in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not unreasonably encumber the Site or adjoining areas with materials or equipment. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for providing security at the Site with all such costs included in the Contract Price. The City shall at all times have access to the Site.
4.12 Clean‐Up. The Contractor shall at all times keep the Site and all adjoining areas free from the accumulation of any waste material or rubbish caused or generated by performance of the Work. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, Contractor shall maintain the Site in a “rake‐ clean” standard on a daily basis. In the event that the Work of the Contract Documents includes painting and/or the installation of floor covering, prior to commencement of any painting operations or the installation of any flooring covering, the area and adjoining areas of the Site
General Conditions Page 23 GENERAL CONDITIONS
where paint is to be applied or floor covering is to be installed shall be in a “broom‐clean” condition. Prior to completion of the Work, Contractor shall remove from the Site all rubbish, waste material, excess excavated material, tools, Construction Equipment, machinery, surplus material and any other items which are not the property of the City under the Contract Documents. Upon completion of the Work, the Site and all adjoining areas shall be left in a neat and broom clean condition satisfactory to City. The City Inspector or Project Manager shall be authorized to direct the Contractor’s clean‐up obligations hereunder. If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided for in the Contract Documents, the City may do so, and all costs incurred in connection therewith shall be charged to the Contractor; the City may deduct such costs from any portion of the Contract Price then or thereafter due the Contractor.
4.13 Access to the Work. The Contractor shall provide the DSA, the City, the Project Manager, the City Inspector , the Architect and the Architect’s consultant(s) with access to the Work, whether in place, preparation and progress and wherever located.
4.14 Facilities and Information for the City Inspector. 4.14.1 Information to City Inspector . The Contractor shall furnish the City Inspector access to the Work for obtaining such information as may be necessary to keep the City Inspector fully informed respecting the progress, quality and character of the Work and materials, equipment or other items incorporated therein. 4.14.2 Facilities for City Inspector . The Contractor shall provide, at no additional cost or expense to the City, for use by the City, the Project Manager and the City Inspector , at the Site, a temporary trailer meeting or exceeding the requirements set forth in the Specifications, along with the items of furniture, furnishings and office equipment identified in the Specifications. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all costs, including without limitation, utility and telephone services associated with the use of such temporary trailer, until removal of the same is authorized by the City. The costs for providing of all such items pursuant to the foregoing shall be included within the Contract Price. In the event that the Contractor shall not provide a temporary trailer, the furniture, furnishings and office equipment set forth in the Specifications, or fail to pay timely any utility charges or other charges arising out of the use of the same, the City may, as applicable, procure a temporary trailer and/or office furniture, furnishings and equipment conforming to these requirements, or pay such outstanding charges. Contractor shall reimburse the City for all costs, including the City’s administrative costs, incurred by the City pursuant to the preceding sentence; in lieu of the Contractor’s reimbursement and at the sole and exclusive discretion of the City, such costs may be deducted by the City from any portion of the Contract Price or thereafter due the Contractor.
4.15 Patents and Royalties. The Contractor and the Surety shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the City and its agents, employees and officers from any claim, demand or legal proceeding arising out of or pertaining, in any manner, to any actual or claimed infringement of patent rights in connection with performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.
4.16 Cutting and Patching. The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make the component parts thereof fit together properly. The Contractor shall not damage or endanger any portion of the Work, or the fully or partially completed construction of the City or separate contractors by cutting, patching, excavation or other alteration. The Contractor shall not cut, patch or otherwise alter the construction by the City or separate contractor without the prior written consent of the City or separate contractor thereto, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold consent to the request of the City or separate contractor to cut, patch or otherwise alter the Work.
General Conditions Page 24 GENERAL CONDITIONS
4.17 Encountering of Hazardous Materials. In the event the Contractor encounters Hazardous Materials at the Site which have not been rendered harmless or for which there is no provision in the Contract Documents for containment, removal, abatement or handling of such Hazardous Materials, the Contractor shall immediately stop the Work in the affected area, but shall diligently proceed with the Work in all other unaffected areas. Upon encountering such Hazardous Materials, the Contractor shall immediately notify the City Inspector and the Architect, in writing, of such condition. The Contractor shall proceed with the Work in such affected area only after such Hazardous Materials have been rendered harmless, contained, removed or abated. In the event such Hazardous Materials are encountered, the Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Time to the extent that the Work is stopped and Substantial Completion of the Work is affected thereby. In no event shall there be an adjustment to the Contract Price solely on account of the Contractor encountering such Hazardous Materials.
4.18 Wage Rates; Employment of Labor. 4.18.1 Determination of Prevailing Rates. Pursuant to the provisions of Division 2, Part 7, Chapter 1, Article 2 of the California Labor Code at §§1770 et seq., the City has obtained from the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations the general prevailing rate of per diem wages and the prevailing rate for holiday and overtime work in the locality in which the Work is to be performed. Holidays shall be as defined in the collective bargaining agreement applicable to each particular craft, classification or type of worker employed under the Contract. Per diem wages include employer payments for health and welfare, pensions, vacation, travel time and subsistence pay as provided in California Labor Code §1773.8, apprenticeship or other training programs authorized by California Labor Code §3093, and similar purposes when the term “per diem wages” is used herein. Holiday and overtime work, when permitted by law, shall be paid for at the rate of at least one and one‐half (1½) times the above specified rate of per diem wages, unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall post, at appropriate and conspicuous locations on the Site, a schedule showing all determined general prevailing wage rates. 4.18.2 Payment of Prevailing Rates. There shall be paid each worker of the Contractor, or any Subcontractor, of any tier, engaged in the Work, not less than the general prevailing wage rate, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the Contractor or any Subcontractor, of any tier, and such worker. 4.18.3 Prevailing Rate Penalty. The Contractor shall, as a penalty, forfeit Fifty Dollars ($50.00) to the City for each calendar day or portion thereof, for each worker paid less than the prevailing rates as determined by the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations for such work or craft in which such worker is employed for the Work by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor, of any tier, in connection with the Work. Pursuant to California Labor Code §1775, the difference between prevailing wage rates and the amount paid to each worker each calendar day, or portion thereof, for which each worker paid less than the prevailing wage rate, shall be paid to each worker by the Contractor. 4.18.4 Payroll Records. Pursuant to California Labor Code §1776, the Contractor and each Subcontractor, of any tier, shall keep an accurate payroll record, showing the name, address, social security number, work classification, straight time and overtime hours worked each day and week, and the actual per diem wages paid to each person employed for the Work. The payroll records shall be certified and available for inspection at all reasonable hours at the principal office of the Contractor on the following basis: (i) a certified copy of an employee’s payroll record shall be made available for inspection or furnished to such employee or his/her authorized representative on request; (ii) a certified copy of all payroll records shall be made available for inspection or furnished upon request to the City, the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement and the Division of Apprenticeship Standards of the Department of Industrial Relations; (iii) a certified copy of payroll records shall be made available
General Conditions Page 25 GENERAL CONDITIONS
upon request to the public for inspection or copies thereof made; provided, however, that a request by the public shall be made through either the City, the Division of Apprenticeship Standards, or the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement. If the requested payroll records have not been provided, the requesting party shall, prior to being provided the records, reimburse the cost of preparation by the Contractor, Subcontractors and the entity through which the request was made; the public shall not be given access to such records at the principal office of the Contractor; (iv) the Contractor shall file a certified copy of the payroll records with the entity that requested such records within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request; (v) any copy of records made available for inspection as copies and furnished upon request to the public or any public agency by the City, the Division of Apprenticeship Standards or the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement shall be marked or obliterated in such a manner as to prevent disclosure of an individual’s name, address and social security number. The name and address of the Contractor or any Subcontractor, of any tier, performing a part of the Work shall not be marked or obliterated. The Contractor shall inform the City of the location of payroll records, including the street address, city and county and shall, within five (5) working days, provide a notice of a change or location and address. In the event of noncompliance with the requirements of this Article 4.18.4, the Contractor shall have ten (10) days in which to comply, subsequent to receipt of written notice specifying in what respects the Contractor must comply herewith. Should noncompliance still be evident after such 10‐day period, the Contractor shall, as a penalty to the City, forfeit Twenty‐Five Dollars ($25.00) for each calendar day, or portion thereof, for each worker, until strict compliance is effectuated. Upon the request of the Division of Apprenticeship Standards or the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement, such penalties shall be withheld from any portion of the Contract Price then or thereafter due the Contractor. The responsibility for compliance with the foregoing provisions is solely that of the Contractor. 4.18.5 Hours of Work. 4.18.5.1 Limits on Hours of Work. Pursuant to California Labor Code §1810, eight (8) hours of labor shall constitute a legal day’s work. Pursuant to California Labor Code §1811, the time of service of any worker employed at any time by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor, of any tier, upon the Work or upon any part of the Work, is limited and restricted to eight (8) hours during any one calendar day and forty (40) hours during any one calendar week, except as hereafter provided. Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions, Work performed by employees of Contractor or any Subcontractor, of any tier, in excess of eight (8) hours per day and forty (40) hours during any one week, shall be permitted upon compensation for all hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours per day at not less than one and one‐half (1½) times the basic rate of pay. 4.18.5.2 Penalty for Excess Hours. The Contractor shall pay to the City a penalty of Twenty‐five Dollars ($25.00) for each worker employed on the Work by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, of any tier, for each calendar day during which such worker is required or permitted to work more than eight (8) hours in any calendar day and forty (40) hours in any one calendar week, in violation of the provisions of the California Labor Code, unless compensation to the worker so employed by the Contractor is not less than one and one‐half (1½) times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours per day. 4.18.5.3 Contractor Responsibility. Any Work performed by workers necessary to be performed after regular working hours or on Sundays or other holidays shall be performed without adjustment to the Contract Price or any other additional expense to the City.
General Conditions Page 26 GENERAL CONDITIONS
4.18.6 Apprentices. 4.18.6.1 Employment of Apprentices. Any apprentices employed to perform any of the Work shall be paid the standard wage paid to apprentices under the regulations of the craft or trade for which such apprentice is employed, and such individual shall be employed only for the work of the craft or trade to which such individual is registered. Only apprentices, as defined in California Labor Code §3077 who are in training under apprenticeship standards and written apprenticeship agreements under California Labor Code §§3070 et seq. are eligible to be employed for the Work. The employment and training of each apprentice shall be in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship standards and apprentice agreements under which such apprentice is training. 4.18.6.2 Apprenticeship Certificate. When the Contractor or any Subcontractor, of any tier, in performing any of the Work employs workers in any Apprenticeable Craft or Trade, the Contractor and such Subcontractor shall apply to the Joint Apprenticeship Committee administering the apprenticeship standards of the craft or trade in the area of the site of the Work for a certificate approving the Contractor or such Subcontractor under the apprenticeship standards for the employment and training of apprentices in the area or industry affected, provided, however, that the approval as established by the Joint Apprenticeship Committee or Committees shall be subject to the approval of the Administrator of Apprenticeship. The Joint Apprenticeship Committee or Committees, subsequent to approving the Contractor or Subcontractor, shall arrange for the dispatch of apprentices to the Contractor or such Subcontractor in order to comply with California Labor Code §1777.5. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall submit contract award information to the applicable Joint Apprenticeship Committee which shall include an estimate of journeyman hours to be performed under the Contract, the number of apprentices to be employed, and the approximate dates the apprentices will be employed. There shall be an affirmative duty upon the Joint Apprenticeship Committee or Committees, administering the apprenticeship standards of the crafts or trades in the area of the site of the Work, to ensure equal employment and affirmative action and apprenticeship for women and minorities. Contractors or Subcontractors shall not be required to submit individual applications for approval to local Joint Apprenticeship Committees provided they are already covered by the local apprenticeship standards. 4.18.6.3 Ratio of Apprentices to Journeymen. The ratio of Work performed by apprentices to journeymen, who shall be employed in the Work, may be the ratio stipulated in the apprenticeship standards under which the Joint Apprenticeship Committee operates, but in no case shall the ratio be less than one hour of apprentice work for each five hours of labor performed by a journeyman, except as otherwise provided in California Labor Code §1777.5. The minimum ratio for the land surveyor classification shall not be less than one apprentice for each five journeymen. Any ratio shall apply during any day or portion of a day when any journeyman, or the higher standard stipulated by the Joint Apprenticeship Committee, is employed at the site of the Work and shall be computed on the basis of the hours worked during the day by journeymen so employed, except for the land surveyor classification. The Contractor shall employ apprentices for the number of hours computed as above before the completion of the Work. The Contractor shall, however, endeavor, to the greatest extent possible, to employ apprentices during the same time period that the journeymen in the same craft or trade are employed at the site of the Work. Where an hourly apprenticeship ratio is not feasible for a particular craft or trade, the Division of Apprenticeship Standards, upon
General Conditions Page 27 GENERAL CONDITIONS
application of a Joint Apprenticeship Committee, may order a minimum ratio of not less than one apprentice for each five journeymen in a craft or trade classification. The Contractor or any Subcontractor covered by this Article and California Labor Code §1777.5, upon the issuance of the approval certificate, or if it has been previously approved in such craft or trade, shall employ the number of apprentices or the ratio of apprentices to journeymen stipulated in the apprenticeship standards. Upon proper showing by the Contractor that it employs apprentices in such craft or trade in the State of California on all of its contracts on an annual average of not less than one apprentice to each five journeymen, the Division of Apprenticeship Standards may grant a certificate exempting the Contractor from the 1‐to‐5 ratio as set forth in this Article and California Labor Code §1777.5. This Article shall not apply to contracts of general contractors, or to contracts of specialty contractors not bidding for work through a general or prime contractor, involving less than Thirty Thousand Dollars ($30,000.00) or twenty (20) working days. The term “Apprenticeable Craft or Trade”, as used herein shall mean a craft or trade determined as an Apprenticeable occupation in accordance with rules and regulations prescribed by the Apprenticeship Council. 4.18.6.4 Exemption From Ratios. The Joint Apprenticeship Committee shall have the discretion to grant a certificate, which shall be subject to the approval of the Administrator of Apprenticeship, exempting the Contractor from the 1‐to‐5 ratio set forth in this Article when it finds that any one of the following conditions are met: (i) unemployment for the previous three‐month period in such area exceeds an average of fifteen percent (15%) or; (ii) the number of apprentices in training in such area exceeds a ratio of 1‐to‐5 in relation to journeymen, or; (iii) the Apprenticeable Craft or Trade is replacing at least one‐ thirtieth (1/30) of its journeymen annually through apprenticeship training, either on a statewide basis or on a local basis, or; (iv) if assignment of an apprentice to any Work performed under the Contract Documents would create a condition which would jeopardize such apprentice’s life or the life, safety or property of fellow employees or the public at large, or if the specific task to which the apprentice is to be assigned is of such a nature that training cannot be provided by a journeyman. When such exemptions from the 1‐to‐5 ratio between apprentices and journeymen are granted to an organization which represents contractors in a specific trade on a local or statewide basis, the member contractors will not be required to submit individual applications for approval to local Joint Apprenticeship Committees, provided they are already covered by the local apprenticeship standards. 4.18.6.5 Contributions to Trust Funds. The Contractor or any Subcontractor, of any tier, who, performs any of the Work by employment of journeymen or apprentices in any Apprenticeable Craft or Trade and who is not contributing to a fund or funds to administer and conduct the apprenticeship program in any such craft or trade in the area of the site of the Work, to which fund or funds other contractors in the area of the site of the Work are contributing, shall contribute to the fund or funds in each craft or trade in which it employs journeymen or apprentices in the same amount or upon the same basis and in the same manner as the other contractors do, but where the trust fund administrators are unable to accept such funds, contractors not signatory to the trust agreement shall pay a like amount to the California Apprenticeship Council. The Division of Labor Standards Enforcement is authorized to enforce the payment of such contributions to such fund(s) as set forth in California Labor Code §227. Such contributions shall not result in an increase in the Contract Price.
General Conditions Page 28 GENERAL CONDITIONS
4.18.6.6 Contractor’s Compliance. The responsibility of compliance with this Article for all Apprenticeable Trades or Crafts is solely and exclusively that of the Contractor. All decisions of the Joint Apprenticeship Committee(s) under this Article are subject to the provisions of California Labor Code §3081. In the event the Contractor willfully fails to comply with the provisions of this Article and California Labor Code §1777.5, pursuant to California Labor Code §1777.7, the Contractor shall: (i) be denied the right to bid on any public works contract for a period of one (1) year from the date the determination of non‐compliance is made by the Administrator of Apprenticeship; and (ii) forfeit, as a civil penalty, Fifty Dollars ($50.00) for each calendar day of noncompliance. Notwithstanding the provisions of California Labor Code §1727, upon receipt of such determination, the City shall withhold such amount from the Contract Price then due or to become due. Any such determination shall be issued after a full investigation, a fair and impartial hearing, and reasonable notice thereof in accordance with reasonable rules and procedures prescribed by the California Apprenticeship Council. Any funds withheld by the City pursuant to this Article shall be deposited in the General Fund or other similar fund of the City. The interpretation and enforcement of California Labor Code §§1777.5 and 1777.7 shall be in accordance with the rules and procedures of the California Apprenticeship Council. 4.18.7 Employment of Independent Contractors. Pursuant to California Labor Code §1021.5, Contractor shall not willingly and knowingly enter into any agreement with any person, as an independent contractor, to provide any services in connection with the Work where the services provided or to be provided requires that such person hold a valid contractors license issued pursuant to California Business and Professions Code §§7000 et seq. and such person does not meet the burden of proof of his/her independent contractor status pursuant to California Labor Code §2750.5. In the event that Contractor shall employ any person in violation of the foregoing, Contractor shall be subject to the civil penalties under California Labor Code §1021.5 and any other penalty provided by law. In addition to the penalties provided under California Labor Code §1021.5, Contractor’s violation of this Article 4.18.7 or the provisions of California Labor Code §1021.5 shall be deemed an event of Contractor’s default under Article 15.1 of these General Conditions. The Contractor shall require any Subcontractor or Sub‐ Subcontractor performing or providing any portion of the Work to adhere to and comply with the foregoing provisions.
4.19 Assignment of Antitrust Claims. Pursuant to California Government Code §4551, the Contractor and its Subcontractor(s), of any tier, hereby offers and agrees to assign to the City all rights, title and interest in and to all causes of action they may have under Section 4 of the Clayton Act, (15 U.S.C. §15) or under the Cartwright Act (California Business and Professions Code §§16700 et seq.), arising from purchases of goods, services or materials hereunder or any Subcontract. This assignment shall be made and become effective at the time the City tenders Final Payment to the Contractor, without further acknowledgment by the parties. If the City receives, either through judgment or settlement, a monetary recovery in connection with a cause of action assigned under California Government Code §§4550 et seq., the assignor thereof shall be entitled to receive reimbursement for actual legal costs incurred and may, upon demand, recover from the City any portion of the recovery, including treble damages, attributable to overcharges that were paid by the assignor but were not paid by the City as part of the Contract Price, less the expenses incurred by the City in obtaining that portion of the recovery. Upon demand in writing by the assignor, the City shall, within one year from such demand, reassign the cause of action assigned pursuant to this Article if the assignor has been or may have been injured by the violation of law for which the cause of action arose: and (i) the City has not been injured thereby; or (ii) the City declines to file a court action for the cause of action.
General Conditions Page 29 GENERAL CONDITIONS
5. SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 Subcontracts. Any Work performed for the Contractor by a Subcontractor shall be pursuant to a written agreement between the Contractor and such Subcontractor which specifically incorporates by reference the Contract Documents and which specifically binds the Subcontractor to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including without limitation, the policies of insurance required under Article 6 of these General Conditions and obligates the Subcontractor to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities of the Contractor which by the Contract Documents the Contractor assumes toward the City and the Architect. The foregoing notwithstanding, no contractual relationship shall exist, or be deemed to exist, between any Subcontractor and the City, unless the Contract is terminated and City, in writing, elects to assume the Subcontract. Each Subcontract for a portion of the Work shall provide that such Subcontract may be assigned to the City if the Contract is terminated by the City pursuant to Article 15.1 hereof, subject to the prior rights of the Surety obligated under a bond relating to the Contract. The Contractor shall provide to the City copies of all executed Subcontracts and Purchase Orders to which Contractor is a party within thirty (30) days after Contractor’s execution of the Agreement. During performance of the Work, the Contractor shall, from time to time, as and when requested by the City, the Architect or the Project Manager provide the City with copies of any and all Subcontracts or Purchase Orders relating to the Work and all modifications thereto. The Contractor’s failure or refusal, for any reason, to provide copies of such Subcontracts or Purchase Orders in accordance with the two preceding sentences is Contractor’s default of a material term of the Contract Documents.
5.2 Substitution of Listed Subcontractor. 5.2.1 Substitution Process. Any request of the Contractor to substitute a listed Subcontractor will be considered only if such request is in strict conformity with this Article 5.2 and California Public Contract Code §4107. All costs incurred by the City, including without limitation, costs of the City Inspector , the Architect, the Project Manager or attorneys fees in the review and evaluation of a request to substitute a listed Subcontractor shall be borne by the Contractor; such costs may be deducted by the City from the Contract Price then or thereafter due the Contractor. 5.2.2 Responsibilities of Contractor Upon Substitution of Subcontractor. The City’s consent to Contractor’s substitution of a listed Subcontractor shall not relieve Contractor from its obligation to complete the Work within the Contract Time and for the Contract Price. The substitution of a listed Subcontractor shall not, under any circumstance, result in, or give rise to any increase of the Contract Price or the Contract Time on account of such substitution. In the event of the City’s consent to the substitution of a listed Subcontractor, the Architect shall determine the extent to which, if any, revised or additional Submittals will be required of the newly substituted Subcontractor. In the event that the Architect determines that revised or additional Submittals are required of the newly substituted Subcontractor, the Architect shall promptly notify the Contractor, in writing, of such requirement. In such event, revised or additional Submittals shall be submitted to Architect not later than thirty (30) days following the date of the Architect’s written notice to the Contractor pursuant to the foregoing sentence; provided that if in the reasonable and good faith judgment of the Architect, the progress of the Work or completion of the Work requires submission of additional or revised Submittals by the newly substituted Subcontractor in less than thirty (30) days, the Architect shall so state in its written notice to the Contractor. In the event that the revised or additional Submittals are not submitted by Contractor within thirty (30) days, or such earlier time as determined by the Architect pursuant to the preceding sentence, following the Architect’s written notice of the requirement for revised or additional Submittals, Contractor shall be subject to the per diem assessments for late Submittals as set forth these General Conditions. Any revised or additional Submittals required pursuant to this Article 5.2.2 shall conform with the requirements of these General
General Conditions Page 30 GENERAL CONDITIONS
Conditions. Contractor shall reimburse the City for all fees and costs, including without limitation fees of the Architect or any Design Consultant to the Architect or the City and DSA fees, incurred or associated with the processing, review and evaluation of any revised or additional Submittals required pursuant to this Article 5.2.2; the City may deduct such fees and costs from any portion of the Contract Price then or thereafter due the Contractor. In the event that additional or revised Submittals are required pursuant to this Article 5.2.2, such requirement shall not result in an increase to the Contract Time or the Contract Price.
6. INSURANCE; INDEMNITY; BONDS 6.1 Workers’ Compensation Insurance; Employer’s Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain Workers’ Compensation Insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims under workers’ or workmen’s compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable to the Work to be performed, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. Contractor shall purchase and maintain Employer’s Liability Insurance covering bodily injury (including death) by accident or disease to any employee which arises out of the employee’s employment by Contractor. The Employer’s Liability Insurance required of Contractor hereunder may be obtained by Contractor as a separate policy of insurance or as an additional coverage under the Workers’ Compensation Insurance required to be obtained and maintained by Contractor hereunder. The limits of liability for the Employer’s Liability Insurance required hereunder shall be as set forth in the Agreement.
6.2 Commercial General Liability and Property Insurance. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain Commercial General Liability and Property Insurance covering the types of claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor’s operations under the Contract Documents and for which the Contractor may be legally responsible: (i) claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease or death of the Contractor’s employees; (ii) claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease or death of any person other than the Contractor’s employees; (iii) claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (a) by a person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to employment of such person by the Contractor, or (b) by another person; (iv) claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; (v) claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damages arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; and (vi) contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents.
6.3 Builder’s Risk “All‐Risk” Insurance. The Contractor, during the progress of the Work and until Final Acceptance of the Work by the City upon completion of the entire Contract, shall maintain Builder’s Risk “All‐Risk” Completed Value Insurance Coverage on all insurable Work included under the Contract Documents which coverage is to provide extended coverage and insurance against vandalism and malicious mischief, perils of fire, sprinkler leakage, civil authority, sonic boom, collapse and flood upon the entire Work which is the subject of the Contract Documents, and including completed Work and Work in progress to the full insurable value thereof. Contractor’s Builders Risk Insurance shall include coverage and insurance against the perils of earthquake if so indicated in the Agreement. Such insurance shall include the City as an additional named insured, and any other person with an insurable interest designated by the City as an additional named insured. The risk of damage to the Work due to the perils covered by the Builder’s Risk “All Risk” Insurance, as well as any other hazard which might result in damage to the Work, is that of the Contractor and the Surety, and no claims for such loss or damage shall be recognized by the City, nor will such loss or damage excuse the complete and satisfactory performance of the Contract by the Contractor.
General Conditions Page 31 GENERAL CONDITIONS
6.4 Coverage Amounts. The insurance required of the Contractor hereunder shall be written for not less than any limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents, or required by law, whichever is greater. In the event of any loss or damage covered by a policy of insurance required to be obtained and maintained by the Contractor hereunder, the Contractor shall be solely and exclusively responsible for the payment of the deductible, if any, under such policy of insurance, without adjustment to the Contract Price on account thereof.
6.5 Evidence of Insurance; Subcontractor’s Insurance. 6.5.1 Certificates of Insurance. Prior to commencing the Work, Contractor shall deliver to the City Certificates of Insurance evidencing the insurance coverages required by the Contract Documents. Failure or refusal of the Contractor to so deliver Certificates of Insurance may be deemed by the City to be a default of a material obligation of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, and thereupon the City may proceed to exercise any right or remedy provided for under the Contract Documents or at law. The Certificates of Insurance and the insurance policies required by the Contract Documents shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under such policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least thirty (30) days prior written notice has been given to the City. The insurance policies required of Contractor hereunder shall also name the City as an additional insured as its interests may appear. Should any policy of insurance be canceled before Final Acceptance of the Work by the City and the Contractor fails to immediately procure replacement insurance as required, the City reserves the right to procure such insurance and to deduct the premium cost thereof and other costs incurred by the City in connection therewith from any sum then or thereafter due the Contractor under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall, from time to time, furnish the City, when requested, with satisfactory proof of coverage of each type of insurance required by the Contract Documents; failure of the Contractor to comply with the City’s request may be deemed by the City to be a default of a material obligation of the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 6.5.2 Subcontractors’ Insurance. Contractor shall require that every Subcontractor, of any tier, performing or providing any portion of the Work obtain and maintain the policies of insurance set forth in Articles 6.1 and 6.2 of these General Conditions; the coverages and limits of liability of such policies of insurance to be obtained and maintained by Subcontractors shall be as set forth in the Special Conditions. The policies of insurance to be obtained and maintained by Subcontractors hereunder are in addition to, and not in lieu of, Contractor obtaining and maintaining such policies of insurance. Each of the policies of insurance obtained and maintained by a Subcontractor hereunder shall conform with the requirements of this Article 6. Upon request of the City, Contractor shall promptly deliver to the City Certificates of Insurance evidencing that the Subcontractors have obtained and maintained policies of insurance in conformity with the requirements of this Article 6. Failure or refusal of the Contractor to provide the City with Subcontractors’ Certificates of Insurance evidencing the insurance coverages required hereunder is a material default of Contractor hereunder.
6.6 Maintenance of Insurance. Any insurance bearing on the adequacy of performance of Work shall be maintained after the City’s Final Acceptance of all of the Work for the full one year correction of Work period and any longer specific guarantee or warranty periods set forth in the Contract Documents. Should such insurance be canceled before the end of any such periods and the Contractor fails to immediately procure replacement insurance as specified, the City reserves the right to procure such insurance and to charge the cost thereof to the Contractor. Nothing contained in these insurance requirements is to be construed as limiting the extent of the Contractor’s responsibility for payment of damages resulting from its operations or performance of the Work under the Contract Documents, including without limitation the Contractor’s obligation to pay Liquidated Damages. In no instance will the City’s exercise of its option to
General Conditions Page 32 GENERAL CONDITIONS
occupy and use completed portions of the Work relieve the Contractor of its obligation to maintain insurance required under this Article until the date of Final Acceptance of the Work by the City, or such time thereafter as required by the Contract Documents. The insurer providing any insurance coverage required hereunder shall be to the reasonable satisfaction of the City.
6.7 Contractor’s Insurance Primary. All insurance and the coverages thereunder required to be obtained and maintained by Contractor hereunder, if overlapping with any policy of insurance maintained by the City, shall be deemed to be primary and non‐contributing with any policy maintained by the City and any policy or coverage thereunder maintained by City shall be deemed excess insurance. To the extent that the City maintains a policy of insurance covering property damage arising out of the perils of fire or other casualty covered by the Contractor’s Builder’s Risk Insurance or the Comprehensive General Liability Insurance of the Contractor or any Subcontractor, the City, Contractor and all Subcontractors waive rights of subrogation against the others. The costs for obtaining and maintaining the insurance coverages required herein shall be included in the Contract Price.
6.8 Indemnity. Unless arising solely out of the active negligence, gross negligence or willful misconduct the City or the Architect, the Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless: (i) the City and its Board of Trustees, officers, employees, agents and representatives (including the City Inspector ); (ii) the Architect and its consultants for the Work and their respective agents and employees; and (iii) if one is designated by the City for the Work, the Project Manager and its agents and employees from and against any and all damages, losses, claims, demands or liabilities whether for damages, losses or other relief, including, without limitation attorneys fees and costs which arise, in whole or in part, from the Work, the Contract Documents or the acts, omissions or other conduct of the Contractor or any Subcontractor or any person or entity engaged by them for the Work. The Contractor’s obligations under the foregoing include without limitation: (i) injuries to or death of persons; (ii) damage to property; or (iii) theft or loss of property; and (iv) other losses, liabilities, damages or costs resulting from, in whole or part, any acts, omissions or other conduct of Contractor, any of Contractor’s Subcontractors, of any tier, or any other person or entity employed directly or indirectly by Contractor in connection with the Work and their respective agents, officers or employees. If any action or proceeding, whether judicial, administrative, arbitration or otherwise, shall be commenced on account of any claim, demand or liability subject to Contractor’s obligations hereunder, and such action or proceeding names the City as a party thereto, the Contractor shall, at its sole cost and expense, defend the City in such action or proceeding with counsel reasonably satisfactory to City. In the event that there shall be any judgment, award, ruling, settlement, or other relief arising out of any such action or proceeding to which the City is bound by, Contractor shall pay, satisfy or otherwise discharge any such judgment, award, ruling, settlement or relief; Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the City from any and all liability or responsibility arising out of any such judgment, award, ruling, settlement or relief. The Contractor’s obligations hereunder are binding upon Contractor’s Performance Bond Surety and these obligations shall survive notwithstanding Contractor’s completion of the Work or the termination of the Contract.
6.9 Payment Bond; Performance Bond. Prior to commencement of the Work, the Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond as security for Contractor’s faithful performance of the Contract and a Labor and Material Payment Bond as security for payment of persons or entities performing work, labor or furnishing materials in connection with Contractor’s performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Special Conditions, the amounts of the Performance Bond and the Payment Bond required hereunder shall be one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Price. Said Labor and Material Payment Bond and Performance Bond shall be in the form and content set forth in the Contract Documents. The failure or refusal of the Contractor to furnish either the Performance Bond or the Labor and Material Payment Bond in strict conformity with this Article 6.9 may be deemed by the City as a default by the
General Conditions Page 33 GENERAL CONDITIONS
Contractor of a material obligation hereunder. Upon request of the Contractor, the City may consider and accept, but is not obligated to do so, multiple sureties on such bonds. The Surety on any bond required under the Contract Documents shall be an Admitted Surety Insurer as that term is defined in California Code of Civil Procedure §995.120.
7. CONTRACT TIME 7.1 Substantial Completion of the Work Within Contract Time. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, the Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments thereto, allotted in the Contract Documents for achieving Substantial Completion of the Work. The date for commencement of the Work is the date established by the Notice to Proceed issued by the City pursuant to the Agreement, which shall not be postponed by the failure to act of the Contractor or of persons or entities for whom the Contractor is responsible. The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect and the City Inspector as such in accordance with the Contract Documents.
7.2 Progress and Completion of the Work. 7.2.1 Time of Essence. Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence. By executing the Agreement, the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing and achieving Substantial Completion of the Work. The Contractor shall employ and supply a sufficient force of workers, material and equipment, and prosecute the Work with diligence so as to maintain progress, to prevent Work stoppage and to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract Time. 7.2.2 Substantial Completion. Substantial Completion is that stage in the progress of the Work when the Work is complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the City can occupy or use the Work for its intended purpose. The Architect and the City Inspector upon request by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents shall determine Substantial Completion. The good faith and reasonable determination of Substantial Completion by the City Inspector and the Architect shall be controlling and final. 7.2.3 Correction or Completion of the Work After Substantial Completion. 7.2.3.1 Items for Correction or Completion. Upon achieving Substantial Completion of the Work, the City, the City Inspector, the Project Manager, the Architect and the Contractor shall jointly inspect the Work and prepare a comprehensive list of items of the Work to be corrected or completed by the Contractor. The exclusion of, or failure to include, any item on such list shall not alter or limit the obligation of the Contractor to complete or correct any portion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 7.2.3.2 Time for Completing Correction or Completion Items. In addition to setting forth items for correction or completion pursuant to Article 7.2.3.1, the City, Contractor and Architect shall, after the joint inspection, establish a reasonable time for Contractor’s completion of all items requiring correction or completion. If the City, the Contractor and the Architect are unable to mutually agree upon the time for the Contractor’s completion of such items, the Architect shall determine such time, and in such event, the time determined by the Architect shall be final and binding upon the City and Contractor so long as the Architect’s determination is made in good faith. The Contractor shall promptly and diligently proceed to complete or correct all items noted on such list within the time established. In the event that the Contractor shall fail or refuse, for any reason, to complete items requiring completion or correction within the time so established, Contractor shall be subject to assessment of Liquidated Damages in accordance with Article 7.4 hereof. The foregoing notwithstanding, if the Contractor fails or refuses to complete all items of the
General Conditions Page 34 GENERAL CONDITIONS
Work requiring correction or completion within the time established, the City may, in its sole and exclusive discretion and without further notice to Contractor, elect to cause the completion of such items of the Work requiring correction or completion, provided, however, that such election by the City is in addition to, and not in lieu of, any other right or remedy of the City under the Contract Documents or at law. If the City elects to complete items of the Work requiring correction or completion, pursuant to the foregoing, Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred by the City in connection therewith and the City may deduct such costs from the Contract Price then or thereafter due the Contractor; if these costs exceed the remaining Contract Price due to the Contractor, the Contractor and the Performance Bond Surety are liable to City for any such excess costs. 7.2.4 Final Completion. Final Completion is that stage of the Work when all Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, including without limitation, the performance of all correction or completion items noted upon Substantial Completion, and the Contract has been otherwise fully performed by the Contractor. The Architect and the City Inspector upon request of the Contractor shall determine final Completion. The good faith and reasonable determination of Final Completion by the City Inspector and the Architect shall be controlling and final. 7.2.5 Contractor Responsibility for Multiple Inspections. In the event the Contractor shall request determination of Substantial Completion or Final Completion by the City Inspector and the Architect and it is determined by the City Inspector and the Architect that the Work does not then justify certification of Substantial Completion or Final Completion and re‐inspection is required at a subsequent time to make such determination, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs of such reinspection, including without limitation, the fees of the Architect and the salary of the City Inspector. The City may deduct such costs from the Contract Price then due or thereafter due to the Contractor. 7.2.6 Final Acceptance. Final Acceptance of the Work shall occur upon approval of the Work by the City’s Board of Trustees; such approval shall be submitted for adoption at the next regularly scheduled meeting of the City’s Board of Trustees after the determination of Final Completion. The commencement of any warranty or guarantee period under the Contract Documents shall be deemed to be the date upon which the City’s Board of Trustees approves of the Final Acceptance of the Work.
7.3 Progress Schedule. 7.3.1 Submittal of Preliminary Construction Schedule. Within five (5) days following execution of the Agreement, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the City, the Project Manager and the Architect a Preliminary Construction Schedule indicating, in graphic form, the estimated rate of progress and sequence of all Work required under the Contract Documents. The purpose of the Preliminary Construction Schedule is to assure adequate planning and execution of the Work so that it is completed within the Contract Time and to permit evaluation of the progress of the Work. The Preliminary Construction Schedule shall indicate the dates for commencement and completion of various portions of the Work, including, without limitation, the procurement and fabrication of major items, material and equipment forming a part of, or to be incorporated into, the Work as well as Site construction activities. The Preliminary Construction Schedule shall identify all Submittals required, the portion(s) of the Work for which the identified Submittals relate to and the date upon which each Submittal required will be transmitted to the Architect for review (“The Submittal Schedule”). The Contractor’s use of any particular scheduling method, system or program for depiction of the Preliminary Construction Schedule shall be at the Contractor’s discretion; provided however, the City may direct the Contractor’s use of a particular progress
General Conditions Page 35 GENERAL CONDITIONS
scheduling technique, methodology or computer software program, if in the City’s sole reasonable judgment such other technique, methodology or computer software program is reasonably necessary to depict the progress and scheduling of the Work or the logic and relationship of activities necessary to complete the Work. The City’s direction in this regard shall not be deemed control over or assumption of construction means, methods or sequences, all of which remain the Contractor’s responsibility. Further, unless unreasonable under the circumstances, such direction shall not give rise to an increase in the Contract Time or the Contract Price. The Contractor may submit a Preliminary Construction Schedule depicting completion of the Work in a duration shorter than the Contract Time; provided that such Preliminary Construction Schedule shall not be a basis for adjustment to the Contract Price in the event that completion of the Work shall occur after the time depicted therein, nor shall such Preliminary Construction Schedule be the basis for any extension of the Contract Time, the Contractor’s entitlement to any extension of the Contract Time shall be based upon the Contract Time and not on any shorter duration which may be depicted in the Contractor’s Preliminary Construction Schedule. In the event any of the Construction Schedules required under this Article 7.3 utilizes the Critical Path Method of project scheduling, or other similar method which incorporates therein any “float” time, such float shall be deemed to belong to and owned by the City. As used herein, “float time” shall be deemed to refer to the time between the earliest start date and the latest start date, or between the earliest finish date and the latest finish date of each activity shown on the Construction Schedule. 7.3.2 Review of Preliminary Construction Schedule. The City, the Project Manager and the Architect shall review the Preliminary Construction Schedule submitted by the Contractor pursuant to Article 7.3.1 above for conformity with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Within fifteen (15) days of the date of receipt of the Preliminary Construction Schedule, the Preliminary Construction Schedule will be returned to the Contractor with comments to the form or content thereof. Review of the Preliminary Progress Schedule and any comments thereto by the City, the Project Manager and/or the Architect shall not be deemed to be the assumption of construction means, methods or sequences by the City, the Project Manager or the Architect, all of which remain the Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents. 7.3.3 Preparation and Submittal of Contract Construction Schedule. Within ten (10) days of the City’s return of the Preliminary Construction Schedule to the Contractor pursuant to Article 7.3.2 above, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect and the Project Manger the Construction Schedule which incorporates therein the comments to the Preliminary Construction Schedule. Upon the Contractor’s submittal of such Construction Schedule, the City, the Project Manager and the Architect shall review the same for purposes of determining conformity with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Within fifteen (15) days of the receipt of the Construction Schedule, the City will approve such Construction Schedule or will return the same to the Contractor with comments to the form or content. In the event there are comments to the form or content thereof, the Contractor, shall within seven (7) days of receipt of such comments, revise and resubmit the Construction Schedule incorporating therein such comments. Upon the City’s approval of the form and content of a Construction Schedule, the same shall be deemed the “Approved Construction Schedule.” The City’s approval of a Construction Schedule shall be for the sole and limited purpose of determining conformity with the requirements of the Contract Documents. By the Approved Construction Schedule, the City shall not be deemed to have exercised control over, or approval of, construction means, methods or sequences, all of which remain the responsibility and obligation of the Contractor in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents. Further, the Approved Construction Schedule shall not operate to limit or restrict any of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents nor
General Conditions Page 36 GENERAL CONDITIONS
relieve the Contractor from the full, faithful and timely performance of such obligations in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents. The activities, commencement and completion dates of activities, and the sequencing of activities depicted on the Approved Construction Schedule shall not be modified or revised by the Contractor without the prior consent, or direction, of the City and the Architect. Updates to the Approved Construction Schedule pursuant to Article 7.3.5 below shall not be deemed revisions to the Approved Construction Schedule. In the event that the Approved Construction Schedule shall depict completion of the Work in a duration shorter than the Contract Time, the same shall not be a basis for an adjustment of the Contract Time or the Contract Price in the event that actual completion of the Work shall occur after such the time depicted in such Approved Construction Schedule. In such event, the Contract Price shall not be subject to adjustment on account of any additional costs incurred by the Contractor to complete the Work prior to the Contract Time, as adjusted in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents. Any adjustment of the Contract Time or the Contract Price shall be based upon the Contract Time set forth in the Contract Documents and not any shorter duration which may depicted in the Approved Construction Schedule. 7.3.4 Revisions to Approved Construction Schedule. In the event that the progress of the Work or the sequencing of the activities of the Work shall materially differ from that indicated in the Approved Construction Schedule, as determined by the City in its reasonable discretion and judgment, the City may direct the Contractor to revise the Approved Construction Schedule; within fifteen (15) days of the City’s direction, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect and the Project Manager a revised Approved Construction Schedule, for review and approval by the City. The Contractor may request consent of the City to revise the Approved Construction Schedule. Any such request shall be considered by the City only if in writing setting forth the Contractor’s proposed revision(s) to the Approved Construction Schedule and the reason(s) therefore. The City may consent to, or deny, any such request of the Contractor to revise the Approved Construction Schedule in its reasonable discretion. 7.3.5 Updates to Approved Construction Schedule. The Contractor shall monitor and update the Approved Construction Schedule on a monthly basis, or more frequently as required by the conditions or progress of the Work, or as may be requested by the City. The Contractor shall provide the City, the Project Manager and the Architect with updated Approved Construction Schedules indicating progress achieved and activities commenced or completed within the prior updated Approved Construction Schedule. Updates to the Approved Construction Schedule shall not include any revisions to the activities, commencement and completion dates of activities or the sequencing of activities depicted on the Approved Construction Schedule. Any such revisions to the Approved Construction Schedule shall result in the City’s rejection of such update and Contractor shall, within seven (7) days of the City’s rejection of such update, submit to the Architect and the Project Manager an Updated Approved Construction Schedule which does not incorporate any such revisions. If requested by the City, the Contractor shall also submit, with its updates to the Approved Construction Schedule a narrative statement including a description of current and anticipated problem areas of the Work, delaying factors and their impact, and an explanation of corrective action taken or proposed by the Contractor. If the progress of the Work is behind the Approved Construction Schedule, the Contractor shall indicate what measures will be taken to place the Work back on schedule. The City may, from time to time, and in the City’s sole and exclusive discretion, transmit to the Contractor’s Performance Bond Surety the Approved Construction Schedule, any updates thereof and the narrative statement described hereinabove. The City’s election to transmit, or not to transmit such information, to the Contractor’s Performance Bond Surety shall not limit the Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents.
General Conditions Page 37 GENERAL CONDITIONS
7.3.6 Contractor Responsibility for Construction Schedule. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation, submittal and maintenance of the Construction Schedules required by the Contract Documents, and any failure of the Contractor to do so may be deemed by the City as the Contractor’s default in the performance of a material obligation under Contract Documents. Any and all costs or expenses required or incurred to prepare, submit, maintain, and update the Construction Schedules shall be solely that of the Contractor and no such cost or expense shall be charged to the City. The Contract Price shall not be subject to adjustment on account of costs, fees or expenses incurred or associated with the Contractor’s preparation, submittal, maintenance or updating of the Construction Schedules.
7.4 Adjustment of Contract Time. If Substantial Completion is delayed, adjustment, if any, to the Contract Time on account of such delay shall be in accordance with this Article 7.4. 7.4.1 Excusable Delays. If Substantial Completion of the Work is delayed by Excusable Delays, the Contract Time shall be subject to adjustment for such reasonable period of time as determined by the Architect; Excusable Delays shall not result in any increase in the Contract Price. Excusable Delays refer to unforeseeable and unavoidable casualties or other unforeseen causes beyond the control, and without fault or neglect, of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, Material Supplier or other person directly or indirectly engaged by the Contractor in performance of any portion of the Work. Excusable Delays include unanticipated and unavoidable labor disputes, unusual and unanticipated delays in transportation of equipment, materials or Construction Equipment reasonably necessary for completion and proper execution of the Work, and unanticipated unusually severe weather conditions. Neither the financial resources of the Contractor or any person or entity directly or indirectly engaged by the Contractor in performance of any portion of the Work shall be deemed conditions beyond the control of the Contractor. If an event of Excusable Delay occurs, the Contract Time shall be subject to adjustment hereunder only if the Contractor establishes: (i) full compliance with all applicable provisions of the Contract Documents relative to the method, manner and time for Contractor’s notice and request for adjustment of the Contract Time; (ii) that the event(s) forming the basis for Contractor’s request to adjust the Contract Time are outside the reasonable control and without any fault or neglect of the Contractor or any person or entity directly or indirectly engaged by Contractor in performance of any portion of the Work; and (iii) that the event(s) forming the basis for Contractor’s request to adjust the Contract Time directly and adversely impacted the progress of the Work as indicated in the Approved Construction Schedule or the most recent updated Approved Construction Schedule relative to the date(s) of the claimed event(s) of Excusable Delay. The foregoing provisions notwithstanding, if the Special Conditions set forth a number of “Rain Days” to be anticipated during performance of the Work, the Contract Time shall not be adjusted for rain related unusually severe weather conditions until and unless the actual number of Rain Days during performance of the Work shall exceed those noted in the Special Conditions and such additional Rain Days shall have directly and adversely impacted the progress of the Work as depicted in the Approved Construction Schedule or the most recent updated Approved Construction Schedule relative to the date(s) of such additional Rain Days. 7.4.2 Compensable Delays. If Substantial Completion of the Work is delayed and such delay is caused by the acts or omissions of the City, the Architect, or separate contractor employed by the City (collectively “Compensable Delays”), upon Contractor’s request and notice, in strict conformity with Articles 7 and 9 of these General Conditions, the Contract Time will be adjusted by Change Order for such reasonable period of time as determined by the Architect and the City. In accordance with California Public Contract Code §7102, if the Contractor’s progress is delayed by any of the events described in the preceding sentence, Contractor shall not be precluded from the recovery of damages
General Conditions Page 38 GENERAL CONDITIONS
directly and proximately resulting therefrom, provided that the City is liable for the delay, the delay is unreasonable under the circumstances involved and the delay was not within the reasonable contemplation of the City and the Contractor at the time of execution of the Agreement. In such event, Contractor’s damages, if any, shall be limited to direct, actual and unavoidable additional costs of labor, materials or Construction Equipment directly resulting from such delay, and shall exclude indirect or other consequential damages, including without limitation, home‐office and other home‐office general administrative costs for services, products and personnel. Except as expressly provided for herein, Contractor shall not have any other claim, demand or right to adjustment of the Contract Price arising out of delay, interruption, hindrance or disruption to the progress of the Work. Adjustments to the Contract Price and the Contract Time, if any, on account of Changes to the Work or Suspension of the Work shall be governed by the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, including without limitation, Articles 9 and 14 of these General Conditions. 7.4.3 Inexcusable Delays. Inexcusable Delays refer to any delay to the progress of the Work caused by events or factors other than those specifically identified in Articles 7.4.1 and 7.4.2 above. Neither the Contract Price nor the Contract Time shall be adjusted on account of Inexcusable Delays. 7.4.4 Adjustment of Contract Time. 7.4.4.1 Procedure for Adjustment of Contract Time. The Contract Time shall be subject to adjustment only in strict conformity with applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. Failure of Contractor to request adjustment(s) of the Contract Time in strict conformity with applicable provisions of the Contract Documents shall be deemed Contractor’s waiver of the same. 7.4.4.2 Limitations Upon Adjustment of Contract Time on Account of Delays. Any adjustment of the Contract Time on account of an Excusable Delay or a Compensable Delay shall be limited as set forth herein. If an Excusable Delay and a Compensable Delay occur concurrently, the maximum extension of the Contract Time shall be the number of days from the commencement of the first delay to the cessation of the delay which ends last. If an Inexcusable Delay occurs concurrently with either an Excusable Delay or a Compensable Delay, the maximum extension of the Contract Time shall be the number of days, if any, which the Excusable Delay or the Compensable Delay exceeds the period of time of the Inexcusable Delay. In addition to the foregoing limitations upon extension of the Contract Time, no adjustment of the Contract Time shall be made on account of any Excusable Delays or Compensable Delays unless such delay(s) actually and directly impact Work or Work activities on the critical path of the then current and updated Approved Construction Schedule as of the date on which such delay first occurs. The City shall not be deemed in breach of, or otherwise in default of any obligation hereunder, if the City shall deny any request by the Contractor for an adjustment of the Contract Time for any delay which does not actually and directly impact Work or Work activities on the then current and updated Approved Construction Schedule.
7.5 Liquidated Damages. Should the Contractor neglect, fail or refuse to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract Time, as adjusted, the Contractor agrees to pay to the City the amount of per diem Liquidated Damages set forth in the Special Conditions, not as a penalty but as Liquidated Damages, for every day beyond the Contract Time, as adjusted, until Substantial Completion of the Work is achieved. The Liquidated Damages amount set forth in the Special Conditions is agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the City because of the difficulty of fixing the City’s actual damages in the event of delayed Substantial Completion of the Work. The Contractor and the City specifically agree that said amount is a reasonable estimate of the City’s damage in such event, and that such amount does not constitute a penalty. Liquidated
General Conditions Page 39 GENERAL CONDITIONS
Damages may be deducted from the Contract Price then or thereafter due the Contractor. The Contractor and the Surety shall be liable to the City for any Liquidated Damages exceeding any amount of the Contract Price then held or retained by the City. Notwithstanding achievement of Substantial Completion of the Work, in the event that the Contractor shall fail or refuse, for any reason, to promptly and diligently commence performance of all correction or completion items noted upon Substantial Completion and to complete the same within a reasonable time, as determined pursuant to Article 7.2.3.2 hereof, the Contractor shall be liable to the City for the per diem Liquidated Damages set forth in the Contract Documents from the date that such items should have been corrected or completed until the date that all such items are actually corrected or completed. In the event that the Contractor shall fail or refuse to correct or complete items of the Work noted upon Substantial Completion and the City elects to exercise its right to cause completion or correction of such items pursuant to Article 7.2.3.2 hereof, the City’s assessment of Liquidated Damages pursuant to the foregoing shall be in addition, and not in lieu of, the City’s right to charge Contractor with the cost of completing or correcting such items of the Work, as provided for under Article 7.2.3.2. The Contractor and the City acknowledge and agree that the provisions of this Article 7.5 are reasonable under the circumstances existing at the time of the Contractor’s execution of the Agreement.
8. CONTRACT PRICE 8.1 Contract Price. The Contract Price is the amount stated in the Agreement as such, and subject to any authorized adjustments thereto in accordance with the Contract Documents, is the total amount payable by the City to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. The City’s payment of the Contract Price to the Contractor shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents.
8.2 Cost Breakdown. Within fifteen (15) days of the execution of the Agreement by Contractor, Contractor shall furnish, on forms provided by the City, a detailed estimate and complete Cost Breakdown of the Contract Price. The Cost Breakdown shall be subject to the City’s review and approval of the form and content thereof. In the event that the City shall reasonably object to any portion of the Cost Breakdown, within ten (10) days of the City’s receipt of the Cost Breakdown, the City shall notify the Contractor, in writing of the City’s objection(s) to the Cost Breakdown. Within five (5) days of the date of the City’s written objection(s), Contractor shall submit a revised Cost Breakdown to the City for review and approval. The foregoing procedure for the preparation, review and approval of the Cost Breakdown shall continue until the City has approved of the entirety of the Cost Breakdown. Once the City approves the Cost Breakdown, the Cost Breakdown shall not be thereafter modified or amended by the Contractor without the prior consent and approval of the City, which may be granted or withheld in the sole reasonable discretion of the City. Notwithstanding any provision of the Contract Documents to the contrary, payment of the Contractor’s overhead, supervision and general conditions costs and profit, as such items are reflected in the Cost Breakdown, shall be made by the City in equal installments with its disbursements of Progress Payments and the Final Payment with the amount of each such installment equal to the aggregate amount of such items as reflected in the Cost Breakdown divided by the number of months of the Contract Time.
8.3 Progress Payments. 8.3.1 Applications for Progress Payments. During the Contractor’s performance of the Work, the Contractor shall submit monthly, on the first working day of each month, to the Project Manager and the Architect, Applications for Progress Payments, on forms approved by the City, setting forth an itemized estimate of Work completed in the preceding month for the purpose of the City’s making of Progress Payments thereon. Values utilized in the Applications for Progress Payments shall be based upon the City approved Cost Breakdown pursuant to Article 8.2 above and such values shall be only for determining the basis of Progress Payments to Contractor, and shall not be
General Conditions Page 40 GENERAL CONDITIONS
considered as fixing a basis for adjustments, whether additive or deductive, to the Contract Price, or for determining the extent of Work actually completed. 8.3.2 City’s Review of Applications for Progress Payments. In accordance with Public Contract Code §20104.50, upon receipt of an Application for Progress Payment, the City shall cause the same to be reviewed by the City Inspector , the Project Manager, if one is designated by the City, and the Architect, as soon as is practicable after receipt of such Application for Progress Payment. Such review shall be for the purpose of determining that the Application for Progress Payment is a proper Progress Payment request. For purposes of this Article 8.3.2, an Application for Progress Payment shall be deemed “proper” only if it is submitted on the form approved by the City, with all of the requested information of such form of Application for Progress Payment completely and accurately provided by the Contractor and such completed Application for Progress Payment is accompanied by: (i) Certified Payrolls of the Contractor and all Subcontractors, of any tier, for laborers performing any portion of the Work for which a Progress Payment is requested; (ii) duly completed and executed forms of Conditional Waiver and Release of Rights Upon Progress Payment in accordance with California Civil Code §3262 of the Contractor, all Subcontractors of any tier, and Material Suppliers covering the Progress Payment requested; (iii) duly completed and executed forms of Unconditional Waiver and Release of Rights upon Progress Payment in accordance with California Civil Code §3262 of the Contractor, all Subcontractors of any tier, and Material Suppliers covering the Progress Payment received by the Contractor under the prior Application for Progress Payment; (iv) if applicable, a current union statement reflecting that the Contractor and any Subcontractor of any tier, are current in the payment of any supplemental fringe benefits required pursuant to any collective bargaining agreement to which the Contractor or any such Subcontractor is a party to or is otherwise bound by; and (v) a certification by the Contractor that it has continuously maintained, or caused to maintained, the Record Drawings reflecting the actual as‐built conditions of the Work performed be for which the Progress Payment is requested, it being understood that such certification is subject to verification by the City, City Inspector, Architect or the Project Manager prior to disbursement of the Progress Payment. In accordance with Public Contract Code §20104.50, an Application for Progress Payment determined by the City not to be a proper Application for Progress Payment shall be returned by the City to the Contractor as soon as is practicable after receipt of the same from the Contractor, but in no event not more than seven (7) days after the City’s receipt thereof. The City’s return of any Application for Progress Payment pursuant to the preceding sentence shall be accompanied by a written document setting forth the reason(s) why the Application for Progress Payment is not proper. 8.3.3 Architect and City Inspector Review of Applications for Progress Payments. Upon receipt of an Application for Progress Payment, the Architect and the City Inspector shall inspect and verify the Work to determine whether it has been performed in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents and to determine the portion of the Application for Progress Payment which is properly due to the Contractor under the terms of the Contract Documents. 8.3.4 City’s Disbursement of Progress Payments. 8.3.4.1 Timely Disbursement of Progress Payments. In accordance with Public Contract Code §20104.50, within thirty (30) days after the City’s receipt of a proper Application for Progress Payment, there shall be paid, by City, to Contractor a sum equal to ninety percent (90%) of the value of the Work indicated in the Application for Progress Payment which is actually in place as of the date of the Application for Progress Payment and as verified and approved by the City Inspector and the Architect and the pro rata portion of the Contractor’s overhead, supervision and general conditions costs and profit for that month; provided, however, that the City’s obligation to disburse any Progress Payment
General Conditions Page 41 GENERAL CONDITIONS
shall be subject to the City’s receipt of all documents set forth in Article 8.3.2 above, each and all of which are conditions precedent to the City’s obligation to disburse Progress Payments. If an Application for Progress Payment is determined not to be proper due to the failure or refusal of the Contractor to submit documents with the Application for Progress Payment, as required by Article 8.3.2, or incompleteness or inaccuracies in any such documents submitted or if it is reasonably determined that the Record Drawings have not been continuously maintained to reflect the actual as built conditions of the Work completed in the period for which the Progress Payment is requested, the thirty (30) day period hereunder for the City’s timely disbursement of a Progress Payment shall be deemed to commence on the date that the City is actually in receipt of documents not submitted with the Application for Progress Payment, or corrections to documents with the Application for Progress Payment so as to render them complete and accurate, or the date upon which the Contractor accurately and fully completes preparation of the Record Drawings relating to the Work for which the Progress Payment is requested. 8.3.4.2 Untimely Disbursement of Progress Payments. In accordance with Public Contract Code §20104.50, in the event that the City shall fail to make any Progress Payment within thirty (30) days after receipt of an undisputed and properly submitted Application for Progress Payment, the City shall pay the Contractor interest on the undisputed amount of such Application for Progress Payment equal to the legal rate of interest set forth in California Code of Civil Procedure §685.010(a). The foregoing notwithstanding, in the event that the City shall determine that any Application for Progress Payment is not proper, pursuant to Article 8.3.2 above, and the City does not return such Application for Progress Payment within the seven (7) day period provided for in Article 8.3.2, the period of time for the City’s disbursement of the Progress Payment on such Application for Progress Payment without incurring the interest liability shall be reduced by the number of days exceeding the seven (7) day return period. 8.3.4.3 City’s Right to Disburse Progress Payments by Joint Checks. Provided that the City is in receipt of the applicable Subcontract or Purchase Order, the City, may in its sole discretion, issue joint checks to the Contractor and such Subcontractor or Material Supplier in satisfaction of its obligation to make Progress Payments or the Final Payment due hereunder. 8.3.4.4 No Waiver of Defective or Non‐Conforming Work. The approval of any Application for Progress Payment or the disbursement of any Progress Payment to the Contractor shall not be deemed nor constitute acceptance of defective Work or Work not in conformity with the Contract Documents. 8.3.5 Progress Payments for Changed Work. The Contractor’s Applications for Progress Payment may include requests for payment on account of Changes in the Work which have been properly authorized and approved by the City Inspector, the Architect and all other governmental agencies with jurisdiction over such Change in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents and for which a Change Order has been issued. Except as provided for herein, no other payment shall be made by the City for Changes in the Work. 8.3.6 Materials or Equipment Not Incorporated Into the Work. 8.3.6.1 Limitations Upon Payment. Except as expressly provided for herein, no payments shall be made by the City on account of any item of the Work, including without limitation, materials or equipment which, at the time of the Contractor’s submittal of an Application for Progress Payment, has/have not been incorporated into and made a part of the Work.
General Conditions Page 42 GENERAL CONDITIONS
8.3.6.2 Materials or Equipment Delivered and Stored at the Site. The City may, in its sole and exclusive discretion, make payment for materials or equipment not yet incorporated into the Work if, at or prior to the time of the Contractor’s submittal of a an Application for Progress Payment incorporating therein a request for payment of such materials or equipment if all of the following are complied with: (i) the materials or equipment have been delivered to the Site; (ii) adequate arrangements, reasonably satisfactory to the City, have been made by the Contractor to store and protect such materials or equipment at the Site including without limitation, insurance reasonably satisfactory to the City, covering and protecting against the risk of loss, destruction, theft or other damage to such materials or equipment while in storage; and (iii) the establishment of procedures reasonably satisfactory to the City by which title to such materials or equipment will be vested in the City upon the City’s payment therefore. The Contractor acknowledges that the discretion to make, or not to make, payment for materials or equipment delivered or stored at the site of the Work pursuant to the preceding sentence shall be exercised exclusively by the City; the City’s exercise of discretion not to make payment for materials or equipment delivered or stored at the Site, but not yet incorporated into the Work shall not be deemed the City’s default hereunder. In the event that the City shall elect to make payment for materials or equipment delivered and stored at the Site, the costs and expenses incurred to comply with the requirements of (ii) and (iii) of this Article 8.3.6.2 shall be borne solely and exclusively by the Contractor and no payment shall be made by the City on account of such costs and expenses. 8.3.6.3 Materials or Equipment Not Delivered or Stored at the Site. No payments shall be made by the City for materials or equipment to be incorporated into the Work where such materials or equipment have not been delivered or stored at the Site. The foregoing notwithstanding, the City may, in its sole and exclusive discretion, elect to make payment for materials or equipment not incorporated into the Work and which are not delivered or stored at the Site at or prior to the time of the Contractor’s submittal of an Application for Progress Payment incorporating therein a request for payment of such materials or equipment provided that each and all of the following have been complied with: (i) adequate arrangements, reasonably satisfactory to the City, have been made by the Contractor to store and protect such materials or equipment which include without limitation, insurance reasonably satisfactory to the City, covering and protecting against the risk of loss, destruction, theft or other damage to such materials or equipment while in storage; and (ii) the establishment of procedures reasonably satisfactory to the City by which title to such materials or equipment will be vested in the City upon the City’s payment therefore. The Contractor acknowledges that the discretion to make, or not to make, payment for such materials or equipment pursuant to the preceding sentence shall be exercised exclusively by the City; the City’s exercise of discretion not to make payment for such materials or equipment shall not be deemed the City’s default hereunder. In the event that the City shall elect to make payment for materials or equipment not at the Site, the costs and expenses incurred to comply with the requirements of (i) and (ii) of this Article 8.3.6.3 shall be borne solely and exclusively by the Contractor and no payment shall be made by the City on account of such costs and expenses. 8.3.6.4 Materials or Equipment in Fabrication or Transit. The provisions of this Article 8.3.6 notwithstanding, the City shall not make any payment on account of any materials or equipment which are in the process of being fabricated or which are in transit to the Site of or other storage location.
General Conditions Page 43 GENERAL CONDITIONS
8.3.7 Exclusions From Progress Payments. In addition to the City’s right to withhold disbursement of any Progress Payment provided for in the Contract Documents, neither the Contractor’s Application for Progress Payment shall include, nor shall the City be obligated to disburse any portion of the Contract Price for amounts which the Contractor does not intend to pay any Subcontractor, of any tier, or Material Supplier because of a dispute or any other reason. 8.3.8 Title to Work. The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Progress Payment will pass to the City no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Progress Payment, all Work for which a Progress Payment has been previously issued and the Contractor has received payment from the City therefor shall, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, stop notices, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, Material Suppliers or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work. 8.3.9 Substitute Security for Retention. In accordance with the provisions of California Public Contract Code §22300, eligible and equivalent securities may be substituted for any monies withheld by the City to ensure the Contractor’s performance under the Contract Documents at the request and expense of the Contractor and in conformity with the provisions of California Public Contract Code §22300. The foregoing and the provisions of California Public Contract Code §22300 notwithstanding, failure of the Contractor to request the substitution of eligible and equivalent securities for monies to be withheld by the City prior to the Contractor’s submission of its first application for Progress Payment shall be deemed a waiver of such right.
8.4 Final Payment. 8.4.1 Application for Final Payment. When the Contractor has achieved Final Completion of the Work and has otherwise fully performed its obligations under the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall submit an Application for Final Payment on such form as approved by the City. Thereupon, the Architect and the City Inspector will promptly make a final inspection of the Work and when the Architect and the City Inspector find the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and that the Contract has been fully performed by the Contractor, the Architect and the City Inspector will thereupon promptly approve the Application for Final Payment, stating that to the best of their knowledge, information and belief, the Work has been completed in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents. The Final Payment shall include the remaining balance of the Contract Price and any retention from Progress Payments previously withheld by the City. 8.4.2 Conditions Precedent to Disbursement of Final Payment. Neither Final Payment nor any remaining Contract Price shall become due until the Contractor submits to the City each and all of the following, the submittal of which are conditions precedent to the City’s obligation to disburse the Final Payment: (i) an affidavit or certification by the Contractor that payrolls, bills for materials and other indebtedness incurred in connection with the Work for which the City or the City’s property may or might be responsible or encumbered have been paid or otherwise satisfied; (ii) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after the Contractor’s receipt of Final Payment is currently in effect; (iii) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover any period following Final Payment as required by the Contract Documents; (iv) consent of the Surety on the Labor and Material Payment Bond and Performance Bond, to Final Payment if required; (v) duly completed and executed forms of Conditional or Unconditional Waivers and Releases of rights upon Final Payment of the Contractor, Subcontractors of any tier and Material Suppliers in accordance with
General Conditions Page 44 GENERAL CONDITIONS
California Civil Code §3262, with each of the same stating that there are, or will be, no claims for additional compensation after disbursement of the Final Payment; (vi) Operations and Maintenance manuals and separate warranties provided by any manufacturer or distributor of any materials or equipment incorporated into the Work; (vii) the Record Drawings; (viii) the form of Guarantee included in the Contract Documents duly executed by an authorized representative of the Contractor; (ix) any and all other items or documents required by the Contract Documents to be delivered to the City upon completion of the Work; and (x) if required by the City, such other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, stop notices, claims, security interest or encumbrances arising out of the Contract to the extent and in such form as may be required by the City. 8.4.3 Disbursement of Final Payment. Provided that the City is then in receipt of all documents and other items in Article 8.4.2 above as conditions precedent to the City’s obligation to disburse Final Payment, not later than sixty (60) days following Final Acceptance the City shall disburse the Final Payment to the Contractor. Pursuant to California Public Contract Code §7107, if there is any dispute between the City and the Contractor at the time that disbursement of the Final Payment is due, the City may withhold from disbursement of the Final Payment an amount not to exceed one hundred fifty percent (150%) of the amount in dispute. 8.4.4 Waiver of Claims. The Contractor’s acceptance of the Final Payment is a waiver and release by the Contractor of any and all claims against the City for compensation or otherwise in connection with the Contractor’s performance of the Contract. 8.4.5 Claims Asserted After Final Payment. Any lien, stop notice or other claim filed or asserted after the Contractor’s acceptance of the Final Payment by any Subcontractor, of any tier, laborer, Material Supplier or others in connection with or for Work performed under the Contract Documents shall be the sole and exclusive responsibility of the Contractor who further agrees to indemnify, defend and hold harmless the City and its officers, agents, representatives and employees from and against any claims, demands or judgments arising or associated therewith, including without limitation attorneys fees incurred by the City in connection therewith. In the event any lien, stop notice or other claim of any Subcontractor, Laborer, Material Supplier or others performing Work under the Contract Documents remain unsatisfied after Final Payment is made, Contractor shall refund to City all monies that the City may pay or be compelled to pay in discharging any lien, stop notice or other claim, including, without limitation all costs and reasonable attorneys fees incurred by City in connection therewith.
8.5 Withholding of Payments. The City may withhold any Progress Payment or the Final Payment, in whole or in part, or backcharge the Contractor to the extent it may deem advisable to protect the City on account of: (i) defective Work or Work not in conformity with the requirements of the Contract Documents which is not remedied; (ii) failure of the Contractor to make payments when due Subcontractors or Material Suppliers for materials or labor; (iii) claims filed or reasonable evidence of the probable filing of claims by Subcontractors, laborers, Material Suppliers, or others performing any portion of the Work under the Contract Documents for which the City may be liable or responsible including, without limitation, Stop Notice Claims filed with the City pursuant to California Civil Code §3179 et seq.; (iv) a reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the then unpaid balance of the Contract Price; (v) tax demands filed in accordance with California Government Code §12419.4; (vi) other claims, penalties and/or forfeitures for which the City is required or authorized to retain funds otherwise due the Contractor; (vii) any amounts due from the Contractor to the City under the terms of the Contract Documents; or (viii) the Contractor’s failure to perform any of its obligations under the Contract Documents or its default under the Contract Documents or its failure to maintain adequate progress of the Work. In addition to the foregoing, the City shall not be obligated to process any Application for Progress Payment or Final Payment, nor shall Contractor be entitled to any Progress Payment or
General Conditions Page 45 GENERAL CONDITIONS
Final Payment so long as any lawful or proper direction concerning the Work or the performance thereof or any portion thereof, given by the City, the City Inspector , the Architect or any public authority having jurisdiction over the Work, or any portion thereof, shall not be fully and completely complied with by the Contractor. When the City is reasonably satisfied that the Contractor has remedied any such deficiency, payment shall be made of the amount withheld.
8.6 Payments to Subcontractors. The Contractor shall pay all Subcontractors for and on account of Work of the Contract performed by such Subcontractors in accordance with the terms of their respective subcontracts and as provided for pursuant to California Public Contract Code §10262, the provisions of which are deemed incorporated herein by this reference. In the event of the Contractor’s failure to make payment to Subcontractors in conformity with California Public Contract Code §10262, the provisions of California Public Contract Code §10253 shall apply; by this reference, the provisions of California Public Contract Code §10253 are incorporated herein in its entirety, except that the references in said Section 10253 to “the director” shall be deemed to refer to the City.
9. CHANGES 9.1 Changes in the Work. The City, at any time, by written Construction Change Directive (CCD), may make Changes within the general scope of the Work under the Contract Documents or issue additional instructions, require additional Work or direct deletion of Work. The Contractor shall not proceed with any Change involving an increase or decrease in the Contract Price or the Contract Time without prior written authorization from the City. The foregoing notwithstanding, the Contractor shall promptly commence and diligently complete any Change to the Work subject to the City’s written authorized issued pursuant to the preceding sentence; the Contractor shall not be relieved or excused from its prompt commencement and diligent completion of any Change subject to the City’s written authorization by virtue of the absence or inability of the Contractor and the City to agree upon the extent of any adjustment to the Contract Time or the Contract Price on account of such Change. The issuance of a Change Order pursuant to this Article 9 in connection with any Change authorized by the City under this Article 9.1 shall not be deemed a condition precedent to Contractor’s obligation to promptly commence and diligently complete any such Change authorized by the City hereunder. The City’s right to make Changes shall not invalidate the Contract nor relieve the Contractor of any liability or other obligations under the Contract Documents. Any requirement of notice of Changes in the scope of Work to the Surety shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Changes to the Work depicted or described in the Drawings or the Specifications shall be subject to approval by the DSA. The City may make Changes to bring the Work or the Project into compliance with environmental requirements or standards established by state or federal statutes and regulations enacted after award of the Contract.
9.2 Oral Order of Change in the Work. Any oral order, direction, instruction, interpretation, or determination from the City, the City Inspector or the Architect which in the opinion of the Contractor causes any change to the scope of the Work, or otherwise requires an adjustment to the Contract Price or the Contract Time, shall be treated as a Change only if the Contractor gives the Architect and the City Inspector written notice within ten (10) days of the order, directions, instructions, interpretation or determination and prior to acting in accordance therewith. Time is of the essence in Contractor’s written notice pursuant to the preceding sentence so that the City can promptly investigate and consider alternative measures to address the order, direction, instruction, interpretation or determination giving rise to Contractor’s notice. Accordingly, Contractor acknowledges that its failure, for any reason, to give written notice within ten (10) days of such order, direction, instruction, interpretation or determination shall be deemed Contractor’s waiver of any right to assert or claim any entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Time or the Contract Price on account of such order, direction, instruction, interpretation or determination. The written notice shall state the date, circumstances, extent of
General Conditions Page 46 GENERAL CONDITIONS
adjustment to the Contract Price or the Contract Time, if any, requested, and the source of the order, directions, instructions, interpretation or determination that the Contractor regards as a Change. Unless the Contractor acts in strict accordance with this procedure, any such order, direction, instruction, interpretation or determination shall not be treated as a Change and the Contractor hereby waives any claim for any adjustment to the Contract Price or the Contract Time on account thereof.
9.3 Contractor Submittal of Data. Within thirty (30) days after receipt of a written order directing a Change in the Work or furnishing the written notice regarding any oral order directing a Change in the Work, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect, the City Inspector and the City a detailed written statement setting forth the general nature of the Change, the amount of any adjustment to the Contract Price on account thereof, properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation of the same, and the extent of adjustment of the Contract Time, if any, required by such Change. No claim or adjustment to the Contract Price or the Contract Time shall be allowed if not asserted by the Contractor in strict conformity herewith or if asserted after Final Payment is made under the Contract Documents.
9.4 Adjustment to Contract Price and Contract Time on Account of Changes to the Work. 9.4.1 Adjustment to Contract Price. Adjustments to the Contract Price due to Changes in the Work shall be determined by application of one of the following methods, in the following order of priority: 9.4.1.1 Mutual Agreement. By negotiation and mutual agreement, on a lump sum basis, between the City and the Contractor on the basis of the estimate of the actual and direct increase or decrease in costs on account of the Change. Upon request of the City or the Architect, the Contractor shall provide a detailed estimate of increase or decrease in costs directly associated with performance of the Change along with cost breakdowns of the components of the Change and supporting data and documentation. The Contractor’s estimate of increase or decrease in costs pursuant to the foregoing, if requested, shall be in sufficient detail and in such form as to allow the City, the City Inspector and the Architect to review and assess the completeness and accuracy thereof. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any additional costs or additional time arising out of, or related in any manner to, its failure to provide the estimate of costs within the time specified in the request of the City or the Architect for such estimate. 9.4.1.2 Determination by the City. By the City, whether or not negotiations are initiated pursuant to Article 9.4.1.1 above, based upon actual and necessary costs incurred by the Contractor as determined by the City on the basis of the Contractor’s records. In the event that the procedure set forth in this Article 9.4.1.2 is utilized to determine the extent of adjustment to the Contract Price on account of Changes to the Work, promptly upon determining the extent of adjustment to the Contract Price, the City shall notify the Contractor in writing of the same; the Contractor shall be deemed to have accepted the City’s determination of the amount of adjustment to the Contract Price on account of a Change to the Work unless Contractor shall notify the City, the Architect and the City Inspector , in writing, not more than fifteen (15) days from the date of the City’s written notice, of any objection to the City’s determination. Failure of the Contractor to timely notify the City, the Architect and the City Inspector of Contractor’s objections to the City’s determination of the extent of adjustment to the Contract Price shall be deemed Contractor’s acceptance of the City’s determination and a waiver of any right or basis of the Contractor to thereafter protest or otherwise object to the City’s determination. Notwithstanding any objection of the Contractor to the City’s determination of the extent of any
General Conditions Page 47 GENERAL CONDITIONS
adjustment to the Contract Price pursuant to this Article 9.4.1.2, Contractor shall, pursuant to Article 9.7 below, diligently proceed to perform and complete any such Change. 9.4.1.3 Basis for Adjustment of Contract Price. If Changes in the Work require an adjustment of the Contract Price pursuant to Articles 9.4.1.1 or 9.4.1.2 above, the basis for adjustment of the Contract Price shall be as follows: 9.4.1.3.1 Labor. Contractor shall be compensated for the costs of labor actually and directly utilized in the performance of the Change. Such labor costs shall be limited to field labor for which there is a prevailing wage rate classification. Wage rates for labor shall not exceed the prevailing wage rates in the locality of the Site and shall be in the labor classification(s) necessary for the performance of the Change. Use of a labor classification which would increase labor costs associated with any Change shall not be permitted. Labor costs shall exclude costs incurred by the Contractor in preparing estimate(s) of the costs of the Change, in the maintenance of records relating to the costs of the Change, coordination and assembly of materials and information relating to the Change or performance thereof, or the supervision and other overhead and general conditions costs associated with the Change or performance thereof. 9.4.1.3.2 Materials and Equipment. Contractor shall be compensated for the costs of materials and equipment necessarily and actually used or consumed in connection with the performance of Changes. Costs of materials and equipment may include reasonable costs of transportation from a source closest to the site of the Work and delivery to the Site. If discounts by Material Suppliers are available for materials necessarily used in the performance of Changes, they shall be credited to the City. If materials and/or equipment necessarily used in the performance of Changes are obtained from a supplier or source owned in whole or in part by the Contractor, compensation therefore shall not exceed the current wholesale price for such materials or equipment. If, in the reasonable opinion of the City, the costs asserted by the Contractor for materials and/or equipment in connection with any Change is excessive, or if the Contractor fails to provide satisfactory evidence of the actual costs of such materials and/or equipment from its supplier or vendor of the same, the costs of such materials and/or equipment and the City’s obligation for payment of the same shall be limited to the then lowest wholesale price at which similar materials and/or equipment are available in the quantities required to perform the Change. The City may elect to furnish materials and/or equipment for Changes to the Work, in which event the Contractor shall not be compensated for the costs of furnishing such materials and/or equipment or any mark‐up thereon. 9.4.1.3.3 Construction Equipment. Contractor shall be compensated for the actual cost of the necessary and direct use of Construction Equipment in the performance of Changes to the Work. Use of such Construction Equipment in the performance of Changes to the Work shall be compensated in increments of fifteen (15) minutes. Rental time for Construction Equipment moved by its own power shall include time required to move such Construction
General Conditions Page 48 GENERAL CONDITIONS
Equipment to the site of the Work from the nearest available rental source of the same. If Construction Equipment is not moved to the Site by its own power, Contractor will be compensated for the loading and transportation costs in lieu of rental time. The foregoing notwithstanding, neither moving time or loading and transportation time shall be allowed if the Construction Equipment is used for performance of any portion of the Work other than Changes to the Work. Unless prior approval in writing is obtained by the Contractor from the Architect, the City Inspector and the City, no costs or compensation shall be allowed for time while Construction Equipment is inoperative, idle or on standby, for any reason. The Contractor shall not be entitled to an allowance or any other compensation for Construction Equipment or tools used in the performance of Changes to the Work where such Construction Equipment or tools have a replacement value of $500.00 or less. Construction Equipment costs claimed by the Contractor in connection with the performance of any Change to the Work shall not exceed rental rates established by distributors or construction equipment rental agencies in the locality of the Site; any costs asserted which exceed such rental rates shall not be allowed or paid. Unless otherwise specifically approved in writing by the Architect, the City Inspector and the City, the allowable rate for the use of Construction Equipment in connection with Changes to the Work shall constitute full compensation to the Contractor for the cost of rental, fuel, power, oil, lubrication, supplies, necessary attachments, repairs or maintenance of any kind, depreciation, storage, insurance, labor (exclusive of labor costs of the Construction Equipment operator), and any all other costs incurred by the Contractor incidental to the use of such Construction Equipment. 9.4.1.3.4 Mark‐up on Costs of Changes to the Work. In determining the cost to the City and the extent of increase to the Contract Price resulting from a Change adding to the Work, the allowance for mark‐ups on the costs of the Change for all overhead (including home office and field overhead), general conditions costs and profit associated with the Change shall not exceed the percentage set forth in the Special Conditions, regardless of the number of Subcontractors, of any tier, performing any portion of any Change to the Work. If a Change to the Work reduces the Contract Price, no profit, general conditions or overhead costs shall be paid by the City to the Contractor for the reduced or deleted Work. In such event, the adjustment to the Contract Price shall be the actual cost reduction realized by the reduced or deleted Work multiplied by the percentage set forth in the Special Conditions for mark‐ups on the cost of a Change adding to the scope of the Work. 9.4.1.4 Contractor Maintenance of Records. In the event that Contractor shall be directed to perform any Changes to the Work pursuant to Article 9.1 or 9.2, or should the Contractor encounter conditions which the Contractor, pursuant to Article 9.6, believes would obligate the City to adjust the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time, Contractor shall maintain detailed records on a daily basis. Such records shall include without limitation hourly records for labor and
General Conditions Page 49 GENERAL CONDITIONS
Construction Equipment and itemized records of materials and equipment used that day in connection with the performance of any Change to the Work. In the event that more than one Change to the Work is performed by the Contractor in a calendar day, Contractor shall maintain separate records of labor, Construction Equipment, materials and equipment for each such Change. In the event that any Subcontractor, of any tier, shall provide or perform any portion of any Change to the Work, Contractor shall require that each such Subcontractor maintain records in accordance with this Article. Each daily record maintained hereunder shall be signed by Contractor’s Superintendent or Contractor’s authorized representative; such signature shall be deemed Contractor’s representation and warranty that all information contained therein is true, accurate, complete and relate only to the Change referenced therein. All records maintained by a Subcontractor, of any tier, relating to the costs of a Change to the Work shall be signed by such Subcontractor’s authorized representative or Superintendent. All records maintained hereunder shall be subject to inspection, review and/or reproduction by the City, the Architect or the City Inspector upon request. In the event that Contractor shall fail or refuse, for any reason, to maintain or make available for inspection, review and/or reproduction such records and the adjustment to the Contract Price on account of any Change to the Work is determined pursuant to this Article, the City’s reasonable good faith determination of the extent of adjustment to the Contract Price on account of such Change shall be final, conclusive, dispositive and binding upon Contractor. Contractor’s obligation to maintain records hereunder is in addition to, and not in lieu of, any other Contractor obligation under the Contract Documents with respect to Changes to the Work. 9.4.2 Adjustment to Contract Time. In the event of any Change(s) to the Work pursuant to this Article 9, the Contract Time shall be extended or reduced by Change Order for a period of time commensurate with the time reasonably necessary to perform such Change. In the event that any Change shall require an extension of the Contract Time, the Contractor shall not be subject to Liquidated Damages for such period of time. If completion of the Work is delayed by causes for which the City is responsible and the delay is unreasonable under the circumstances involved, and not within the contemplation of the Contractor and the City at the time of execution of the Agreement, the Contractor shall not be precluded from the recovery of damages arising therefrom. 9.4.3 Addition or Deletion of Alternate Bid Item(s). If the Bid for the Work includes proposal(s) for Alternate Bid Item(s), during Contractor’s performance of the Work, the City may elect, pursuant to this Article to add any such Alternate Bid Item(s) if the same did not form a basis for award of the Contract or delete any such Alternate Bid Item(s) if the same formed a basis for award of the Contract. If the City elects to add or delete any such Alternate Bid Item(s) pursuant to the foregoing, the cost or credit for such Alternate Bid Item(s) shall be as set forth in the Contractor’s Bid.
9.5 Change Orders. If the City approves of a Change, a written Change Order prepared by the Architect on behalf of the City shall be forwarded to the Contractor describing the Change and setting forth the adjustment to the Contract Time and the Contract Price, if any, on account of such Change. All Change Orders shall be in full payment and final settlement of all claims for direct, indirect and consequential costs, including without limitation, costs of delays or impacts related to, or arising out of, items covered and affected by the Change Order, as well as any adjustments to the Contract Time. Any claim or item relating to any Change incorporated into a Change Order not presented by the Contractor for inclusion in the Change Order shall be deemed waived. The Contractor shall execute the Change Order prepared pursuant to the foregoing; once the Change Order has been prepared and forwarded to the Contractor for execution, without the
General Conditions Page 50 GENERAL CONDITIONS
prior approval of the City which may be granted or withheld in the sole and exclusive discretion of the City, the Contractor shall not modify or amend the form or content of such Change Order, or any portion thereof. The Contractor’s attempted or purported modification or amendment of any such Change Order, without the prior approval of the City, shall not be binding upon the City; any such unapproved modification or amendment to such Change Order shall be null, void and unenforceable. Unless otherwise expressly provided for in the Contract Documents or in the Change Order, any Change Order issued hereunder shall be binding upon the City only upon action of the City’s Board of Trustees approving and ratifying such Change Order. In the event of any amendment or modification made by the Contractor to a Change Order for which there is no prior approval by the City, in accordance with the provisions of this Article 9.5, unless otherwise expressly stated in its approval and ratification of such Change Order, any action of the Board of Trustees to approve and ratify such Change Order shall be deemed to be limited to the Change Order as prepared by the Architect; such approval and ratification of such Change Order shall not be deemed the City’s approval and ratification of any unapproved amendment or modification by the Contractor to such Change Order.
9.6 Contractor Notice of Changes. If the Contractor should claim that any instruction, request, the Drawings, the Specifications, action, condition, omission, default, or other situation obligates the City to increase the Contract Price or to extend the Contract Time, the Contractor shall notify the City Inspector and the Architect, in writing, of such claim within ten (10) days from the date of its actual or constructive notice of the factual basis supporting the same. The City shall consider any such claim of the Contractor only if sufficient supporting documentation is submitted with the Contractor’s notice to the City Inspector and the Architect. Time is of the essence in Contractor’s written notice pursuant to the preceding sentence so that the City can promptly investigate and consider alternative measures to the address such instruction, request, Drawings, Specifications, action, condition, omission, default or other situation. Accordingly, Contractor acknowledges that its failure, for any reason, to give written notice (with sufficient supporting documentation to permit the City’s review and evaluation) within ten (10) days of its actual or constructive knowledge of any instruction, request, Drawings, Specifications, action, condition, omission, default or other situation for which the Contractor believes there should an adjustment of the Contract Time or the Contract Price shall be deemed Contractor’s waiver, release, discharge and relinquishment of any right to assert or claim any entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Time or the Contract Price on account of any such instruction, request, Drawings, Specifications, action, condition, omission, default or other situation. In the event that the City determines that the Contract Price or the Contract Time are subject to adjustment based upon the events, circumstances and supporting documentation submitted with the Contractor’s written notice under this Article 9.6, any such adjustment shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of Articles 9.4.1 and 9.4.2.
9.7 Disputed Changes. In the event of any dispute or disagreement between the Contractor and the City or the Architect regarding the characterization of any item as a Change to the Work or as to the appropriate adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Time on account thereof, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the performance of such item of the Work, subject to a subsequent resolution of such dispute or disagreement in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents. The Contractor’s failure or refusal to so proceed with such Work may be deemed to be Contractor’s default of a material obligation of the Contractor under the Contract Documents.
9.8 Emergencies. In an emergency affecting the safety of life, or of the Work, or of property, the Contractor, without special instruction or prior authorization from the City or the Architect, is permitted to act at its discretion to prevent such threatened loss or injury. Any compensation claimed by the Contractor on account of such emergency work shall be submitted and determined in accordance with this Article 9.
General Conditions Page 51 GENERAL CONDITIONS
9.9 Minor Changes in the Work. The Architect may order minor Changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such Changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the City and the Contractor. The Project Manager or the City Inspector may direct the Contractor to perform Changes provided that each such Change does not result in an increase of more than $500.00 to the Contract Price and no adjustment of the Contract Time. The Contractor shall carry out such orders promptly.
9.10 Unauthorized Changes. Any Work beyond the lines and grades shown on the Contract Documents, or any extra Work performed or provided by the Contractor without notice to the Architect and the City Inspector in the manner and within the time set forth in Articles 9.2 or 9.6 shall be considered unauthorized and at the sole expense of the Contractor. Work so done will not be measured or paid for, no extension to the Contract Time will be granted on account thereof and any such Work may be ordered removed at the Contractor’s sole cost and expense. The failure of the City to direct or order removal of such Work shall not constitute acceptance or approval of such Work nor relieve the Contractor from any liability on account thereof.
10. SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 10.1 City’s Right to Award Separate Contracts. The City reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the City’s own forces or to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations at or about the Site. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the City, the Contractor shall seek an adjustment to the Contract Price or the Contract Time as provided for in the Contract Documents. Failure of the Contractor to request such an adjustment of the Contract Time or the Contract Price in strict conformity with the provisions of the Contract Documents applicable thereto shall be deemed a waiver of the same.
10.2 City’s Coordination of Separate Contractors. The City shall provide for coordination of the activities of the City’s own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the City in reviewing their respective Construction Schedules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the Approved Construction Schedule for the Work hereunder deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The Construction Schedules shall then constitute the Construction Schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the City until subsequently revised. 10.3 Mutual Responsibility. The Contractor shall afford the City and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities at the Site and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor’s Work, construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.
10.4 Discrepancies or Defects. If part of the Contractor’s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the City or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect and the City Inspector any apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor to so report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the City’s or separate contractors’ completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor’s Work, except as to defects not then discoverable by the Contractor’s reasonable diligence.
11. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 11.1 Tests; Inspections; Observations. 11.1.1 Contractor’s Notice. If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances or any public authority with jurisdiction over the Work requires the Work, or any portion thereof, to be
General Conditions Page 52 GENERAL CONDITIONS
specially tested, inspected or approved, the Contractor shall give the Architect, the Project Manger and the City Inspector written notice of the readiness of such Work for observation, testing or inspection at least two (2) working days prior to the time for the conducting of such test, inspection or observation. If inspection, testing or observation is by authority other than the City, the Contractor shall inform the City Inspector and the Project Manager not less than two (2) working days prior to the date fixed for such inspection, test or observation. The Contractor shall not cover up any portion of the Work subject to tests, inspections or observations prior to the completion and satisfaction of the requirements of such test, inspection or observation. In the event that any portion of the Work subject to tests, inspection or approval shall be covered up by Contractor prior to completion and satisfaction of the requirements of such tests, inspection or approval, Contractor shall be responsible for the uncovering of such portion of the Work as is necessary for performing such tests, inspection or approval without adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Time on account thereof. 11.1.2 Cost of Tests and Inspections. Except as set forth below, the City will pay for fees, costs and expenses to complete the initial tests/inspections of portions of the Work as required by law, code or regulation, provided that such tests/inspections are conducted and completed at a location within a one hundred (100) mile radius of the Site. The foregoing notwithstanding, if the portion(s) of the Work subject to tests/inspections is/are not ready for such test/inspection at the time indicated in the Contractor’s notice under Article 11.1.1 or if upon completion of such test/inspection, the portion(s) of the Work subject to such test/inspection do not meet or exceed the minimum requirements of such test/inspection, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the payment of all fees, costs or expenses arising out of or related in any manner to subsequent tests/inspections of such portion(s) of the Work. Notwithstanding the City’s payment of fees, costs or expenses for conducting initial tests/inspections, if any actions or failures to act of the Contractor or person or entity providing or performing Work under the direction or control of the Contractor require tests/inspections to be conducted over a period of more than eight (8) hours per day by any single person or on weekends/holidays, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the payment of fees, costs or expenses which result from test/inspection services which exceed eight (8) hours per day by any single person or on weekends/holidays. If any tests/inspections are conducted outside a one hundred (100) mile radius of the Site, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for all costs, fees or expenses to conduct and complete such tests/inspections conducted at such location, including without limitation, costs to complete such tests/inspections and travel, meal and related expenses. 11.1.3 Testing/Inspection Laboratory. The City shall select duly qualified person(s) or testing laboratory(ies) to conduct the tests and inspections to be paid for by the City and required by the Contract Documents. All such tests and inspections shall be in conformity with Title 24 of the California Code of Regulations. Where inspection or testing is to be conducted by an independent laboratory or testing agency, materials or samples thereof shall be selected by the laboratory, testing agency, the City Inspector , the Project Manager or the Architect and not by the Contractor. 11.1.4 Additional Tests, Inspections and Approvals. If the Architect, the Project Manager, the City Inspector or public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the City, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the City, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect, the Project Manager and the City Inspector of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the City Inspector and the Architect may observe such procedures. The City shall bear the costs of such additional tests, inspections or approvals, except to the extent that such additional tests, inspections or approvals reveal any failure of the Work
General Conditions Page 53 GENERAL CONDITIONS
to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, in which case the Contractor shall bear all costs made necessary by such failures, including without limitation, the costs of corrections, repeat tests, inspections or approvals and the costs of the Architect’s services or its consultants in connection therewith.
11.2 Delivery of Certificates. Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect.
11.3 Timeliness of Tests, Inspections and Approvals. Tests or inspections required and conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made or arranged by Contractor to avoid delay in the progress of the Work. The Contract Time shall not be subject to adjustment on account of delays by the Contractor in arranging for tests/inspections required by the Contract Documents.
12. UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.1 Inspection of the Work. 12.1.1 Access to the Work. All Work and all materials and equipment forming a part of the Work or incorporated into the Work are subject to inspection by the City, the Project Manager, the Architect and the City Inspector for conformity with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall, at its cost and without adjustment to the Contract Price or the Contract Time, furnish any facilities necessary for sufficient and safe access to the Work for purposes of inspection by the City, the Project Manager, the Architect, the City Inspector, DSA or any other public or quasi‐public authority with jurisdiction over the Work or any portion thereof. 12.1.2 Limitations Upon Inspections. Inspections, tests, measurements or other acts of the Architect and the City Inspector hereunder are for the sole purpose of assisting them in determining that the Work, materials, equipment, progress of the Work, and quantities generally comply and conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. These acts or functions shall not relieve the Contractor from performing the Work in full compliance with the Contract Documents. No inspection by the Architect or the City Inspector shall constitute or imply acceptance of Work inspected. Inspection of the Work hereunder is in addition to, and not in lieu of, any other testing, inspections or approvals of the Work required under the Contract Documents.
12.2 Uncovering of Work. If any portion of the Work is covered contrary to the request of the Architect, the City Inspector or the requirements of the Contract Documents, it must, if required by the Architect or the City Inspector, be uncovered for observation by the Architect and the City Inspector and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without adjustment of the Contract Time or the Contract Price.
12.3 Rejection of Work. Prior to the City’s Final Acceptance of the Work, any Work or materials or equipment forming a part of the Work or incorporated into the Work which is defective or not in conformity with the Contract Documents may be rejected by the City, the Project Manager the Architect or the City Inspector and the Contractor shall correct such rejected Work without any adjustment to the Contract Price or the Contract Time, even if the Work, materials or equipment have been previously inspected by the Architect or the City Inspector or even if they failed to observe the defective or non‐conforming Work, materials or equipment.
12.4 Correction of Work. The Contractor shall promptly correct any portion of the Work rejected by the City, the Project Manager, the Architect or the City Inspector for failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, or which is determined by them to be defective, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected Work,
General Conditions Page 54 GENERAL CONDITIONS
including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby. The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the City or separate contractors, caused by the Contractor’s correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, or which is defective.
12.5 Removal of Non‐Conforming or Defective Work. The Contractor shall, at its sole cost and expense, remove from the Site all portions of the Work that are defective or are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents that are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the City.
12.6 Failure of Contractor to Correct Work. If the Contractor fails to commence to correct defective or non‐conforming Work within 3 days of notice of such condition and promptly thereafter complete the same within a reasonable time, the City may correct it in accordance with the Contract Documents. If the Contractor does not proceed with correction of such defective or non‐conforming Work within the time fixed herein, the City may remove it and store the salvable materials or equipment at the Contractor’s expense. If the Contractor does not pay costs of such removal and storage after written notice, the City may sell such materials or equipment at auction or at private sale and shall account for the proceeds thereof, after deducting costs and damages that should have been borne by the Contractor, including without limitation compensation for the Architect’s services, attorneys fees and other expenses made necessary thereby. If such proceeds of sale do not cover costs which the Contractor should have borne, the Contract Price shall be reduced by the deficiency. If payments of the Contract Price then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor and the Surety shall promptly pay the difference to the City.
12.7 Acceptance of Defective or Non‐Conforming Work. The City may, in its sole and exclusive discretion, elect to accept Work which is defective or which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Price shall be reduced as appropriate and equitable.
13. WARRANTIES 13.1 Workmanship and Materials. The Contractor warrants to the City that all materials and equipment furnished under the Contract Documents shall be new, of good quality and of the most suitable grade and quality for the purpose intended, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. All Work shall be of good quality, free from faults and defects and in conformity with the requirements of the Contract Documents. If required by the Architect or the City, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment incorporated into the Work. Any Work, or portion thereof not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions or alternatives not properly approved in accordance with the Contract Documents may be deemed defective. Where there is an approved substitution of, or alternative to, material or equipment specified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor warrants to the City that such installation, construction, material, or equipment will equally perform the function and have the quality of the originally specified material or equipment. The Contractor expressly warrants the merchantability, the fitness for use, and quality of all substitute or alternative items in addition to any warranty given by the manufacturer or supplier of such item.
13.2 Warranty Work. If, within one year after the date of Final Acceptance, or such other time frame set forth elsewhere in the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, or otherwise contrary to the warranties contained in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall commence all necessary corrective action not more than seven (7) days after receipt of a written notice from the City to
General Conditions Page 55 GENERAL CONDITIONS
do so, and to thereafter diligently complete the same. In the event that Contractor shall fail or refuse to commence correction of any such item within said seven (7) day period or to diligently prosecute such corrective actions to completion, the City may, without further notice to Contractor, cause such corrective Work to be performed and completed. In such event, Contractor and Contractor’s Performance Bond Surety shall be responsible for all costs in connection with such corrective Work, including without limitation, general administrative overhead costs of the City in securing and overseeing such corrective Work. Nothing contained herein shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to any obligation of the Contractor under the Contract Documents. The obligations of the Contractor hereunder shall be in addition to, and not in lieu of, any other obligations imposed by any special guarantee or warranty required by the Contract Documents, guarantees or warranties provided by any manufacturer of any item or equipment forming a part of, or incorporated into the Work, or otherwise recognized, prescribed or imposed by law. Neither the City’s Final Acceptance, the making of Final Payment, any provision in Contract Documents, nor the use or occupancy of the Work, in whole or in part, by City shall constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents nor relieve the Contractor or the Contractor’s Performance Bond Surety from liability with respect to any warranties or responsibility for faulty or defective Work or materials, equipment and workmanship incorporated therein.
13.3 Guarantee. Upon completion of the Work, Contractor shall execute and deliver to the City the form of Guarantee included within the Contract Documents. The Contractor’s execution and delivery of the form of Guarantee is an express condition precedent to any obligation of the City to disburse the Final Payment to the Contractor.
13.4 Survival of Warranties. The provisions of this Article 13 shall survive the Contractor’s completion of Work under the Contract Documents, the City’s Final Acceptance or the termination of the Contract.
14. SUSPENSION OF WORK 14.1 City’s Right to Suspend Work. The City may, without cause, and without invalidating or terminating the Contract, order the Contractor, in writing, to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the City may determine. The Contractor shall resume and complete the Work suspended by the City in accordance with the City’s directive, whether issued at the time of the directive suspending the Work or subsequent thereto.
14.2 Adjustments to Contract Price and Contract Time. In the event the City shall order suspension of the Work, an adjustment shall be made to the Contract Price for increases in the direct cost of performance of the Work of the Contract Documents, actually caused by suspension, delay or interruption ordered by the City; provided however that no adjustment of the Contract Price shall be made to the extent: (i) that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible under the Contract Documents; or (ii) that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract Documents. The foregoing notwithstanding, any such adjustment of the Contract Price shall not include any adjustment to increase the Contractor’s overhead, general administrative costs or profit, all of which will remain as reflected in the Cost Breakdown submitted by the Contractor pursuant to the Contract Documents. In the event of the City’s suspension of the Work, the Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted.
15. TERMINATION 15.1 Termination for Cause. 15.1.1 City’s Right to Terminate. The City may terminate the Contract upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events of the Contractor’s default:((i) if the Contractor refuses or fails to prosecute the Work with diligence as will insure Substantial
General Conditions Page 56 GENERAL CONDITIONS
Completion of the Work within the Contract Time, or if the Contractor fails to substantially Complete the Work within the Contract Time; (ii) if the Contractor becomes bankrupt or insolvent, or makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, or if the Contractor or a third party files a petition to reorganize or for protection under any bankruptcy or similar laws, or if a trustee or receiver is appointed for the Contractor or for any of the Contractor’s property on account of the Contractor’s insolvency, and the Contractor or its successor in interest does not provide adequate assurance of future performance in accordance with the Contract Documents within 10 days of receipt of a request for such assurance from the City; (iii) if the Contractor repeatedly fails to supply sufficient skilled workmen or suitable materials or equipment; (iv) if the Contractor repeatedly fails to make prompt payments to any Subcontractor, of any tier, or Material Suppliers or others for labor, materials or equipment; (v) if the Contractor disregards laws, ordinances, rules, codes, regulations, orders applicable to the Work or similar requirements of any public entity having jurisdiction over the Work; (iv) if the Contractor disregards proper directives of the Architect, the City Inspector or City under the Contract Documents; (vii) if the Contractor performs Work which deviates from the Contract Documents and neglects or refuses to correct such Work; or (viii) if the Contractor otherwise violates in any material way any provisions or requirements of the Contract Documents. Once the City determines that sufficient cause exists to justify the action, the City may terminate the Contract without prejudice to any other right or remedy the City may have, after giving the Contractor and the Surety at least seven (7) days advance written notice of the effective date of termination. The City shall have the sole discretion to permit the Contractor to remedy the cause for the termination without waiving the City’s right to terminate the Contract, or otherwise waiving, restricting or limiting any other right or remedy of the City under the Contract Documents or at law. 15.1.2 City’s Rights Upon Termination. In the event that the Contract is terminated pursuant to this Article 15.1, the City may take over the Work and prosecute it to completion, by contract or otherwise, and may exclude the Contractor from the site. The City may take possession of the Work and of all of the Contractor’s tools, appliances, construction equipment, machinery, materials, and plant which may be on the site of the Work, and use the same to the full extent they could be used by the Contractor without liability to the Contractor. In exercising the City’s right to prosecute the completion of the Work, the City may also take possession of all materials and equipment stored at the site of the Work or for which the City has paid the Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the City deems expedient. In exercising the City’s right to prosecute the completion of the Work, the City shall have the right to exercise its sole discretion as to the manner, methods, and reasonableness of the costs of completing the Work and the City shall not be required to obtain the lowest figure for completion of the Work. In the event that the City takes bids for remedial Work or completion of the Work, the Contractor shall not be eligible for the award of such contract(s). 15.1.3 Completion by the Surety. In the event that the Contract is terminated pursuant to this Article 15.1, the City may demand that the Surety take over and complete the Work. The City may require that in so doing, the Surety not utilize the Contractor in performing and completing the Work. Upon the failure or refusal of the Surety to take over and begin completion of the Work within twenty (20) days after demand therefore, the City may take over the Work and prosecute it to completion as provided for above. 15.1.4 Assignment and Assumption of Subcontracts. The City shall, in its sole and exclusive discretion, have the option of requiring any Subcontractor or Material Supplier to perform in accordance with its Subcontract or Purchase Order with the Contractor and assign the Subcontract or Purchase Order to the City or such other person or entity selected by the City to complete the Work.
General Conditions Page 57 GENERAL CONDITIONS
15.1.5 Costs of Completion. In the event of termination under this Article 15.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment of the Contract Price until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price as of the date of termination exceeds the City’s direct and indirect costs and expenses for completing the Work, including without limitation, attorneys’ fees and compensation for additional professional and consultant services, such excess shall be used to pay the Contractor for the cost of the Work performed prior to the effective date of termination with a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit. If the City’s costs and expenses to complete the Work exceed the unpaid Contract Price, the Contractor and/or the Surety shall pay the difference to the City. 15.1.6 Contractor Responsibility for Damages. The Contractor and the Surety shall be liable for all damage sustained by the City resulting from, in any manner, the termination of Contract under this Article 15.1, including without limitation, attorneys’ fees, and for all costs necessary for repair and completion of the Work over and beyond the Contract Price. 15.1.7 Conversion to Termination for Convenience. In the event the Contract is terminated under this Article 15.1, and it is determined, for any reason, that the Contractor was not in default under the provisions hereof, the termination shall be deemed a Termination for Convenience of the City and thereupon, the rights and obligations of the City and the Contractor shall be determined in accordance with Article 15.2 hereof. 15.1.8 City’s Rights Cumulative. In the event the Contract is terminated pursuant to this Article 15.1, the termination shall not affect or limit any rights or remedies of the City against the Contractor or the Surety. The rights and remedies of the City under this Article 15.1 are in addition to, and not in lieu of, any other rights and remedies provided by law or otherwise under the Contract Documents. Any retention or payment of monies to the Contractor by the City shall not be deemed to release the Contractor or the Surety from any liability hereunder.
15.2 Termination for Convenience of the City. The City may at any time, in its sole and exclusive discretion, by written notice to the Contractor, terminate the Contract in whole or in part when it is in the interest of, or for the convenience of, the City. In such case, the Contractor shall be entitled to payment for: (i) Work actually performed and in place as of the effective date of such termination for convenience of the City, with a reasonable allowance for profit and overhead on such Work, and (ii) reasonable termination expenses for reasonable protection of Work in place and suitable storage and protection of materials and equipment delivered to the site of the Work but not yet incorporated into the Work, provided that such payments exclusive of termination expenses shall not exceed the total Contract Price as reduced by payments previously made to the Contractor and as further reduced by the value of the Work as not yet completed. The Contractor shall not be entitled to profit and overhead on Work which was not performed as of the effective date of the termination for convenience of the City. The City may, in its sole discretion, elect to have subcontracts assigned pursuant to Article 15.1.4 above after exercising the right hereunder to terminate for the City’s convenience.
16. MISCELLANEOUS 16.1 Governing Law. This Contract shall be governed by and interpreted in accordance with the laws of the State of California.
16.2 Marginal Headings; Interpretation. The titles of the various Articles of these General Conditions and elsewhere in the Contract Documents are used for convenience of reference only and are not intended to, and shall in no way, enlarge or diminish the rights or obligations of the City or the Contractor and shall have no effect upon the construction or interpretation of the Contract Documents. The Contract Documents shall be construed as a whole in accordance with their fair meaning and not strictly for or against the City or the Contractor.
General Conditions Page 58 GENERAL CONDITIONS
16.3 Successors and Assigns. Except as otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, all terms, conditions and covenants of the Contract Documents shall be binding upon, and shall inure to the benefit of the City and the Contractor and their respective heirs, representatives, successors‐in‐interest and assigns.
16.4 Cumulative Rights and Remedies; No Waiver. Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not in lieu of or otherwise a limitation or restriction of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. No action or failure to act by the City shall constitute a waiver of a right or remedy afforded it under the Contract Documents or at law nor shall such an action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach hereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing.
16.5 Severability. In the event any provision of the Contract Documents shall be deemed illegal, invalid, unenforceable and/or void, by a court or any other governmental agency of competent jurisdiction, such provision shall be deemed to be severed and deleted from the Contract Documents, but all remaining provisions hereof, shall in all other respects, continue in full force and effect.
16.6 No Assignment by Contractor. The Contractor shall not sublet or assign the Contract, or any portion thereof, or any monies due thereunder, without the express prior written consent and approval of the City, which approval may be withheld in the sole and exclusive discretion of the City. The City’s approval to such assignment shall be upon such terms and conditions as determined by the City in its sole and exclusive discretion.
16.7 Gender and Number. Whenever the context of the Contract Documents so require, the neuter gender shall include the feminine and masculine, the masculine gender shall include the feminine and neuter, the singular number shall include the plural and the plural number shall include the singular.
16.8 Independent Contractor Status. In performing its obligations under the Contract Documents, the Contractor is an independent contractor to the City and not an agent or employee of the City.
16.9 Notices. Except as otherwise expressly provided for in the Contract Documents, all notices which the City or the Contractor may be required, or may desire, to serve on the other, shall be effective only if delivered by personal delivery or by postage prepaid, First Class Certified Return Receipt Requested United States Mail, addressed to the City or the Contractor at their respective address set forth in the Contract Documents, or such other address(es) as either the City or the Contractor may designate from time to time by written notice to the other in conformity with the provisions hereof. In the event of personal delivery, such notices shall be deemed effective upon delivery, provided that such personal delivery requires a signed receipt by the recipient acknowledging delivery of the same. In the event of mailed notices, such notice shall be deemed effective on the third working day after deposit in the mail.
16.10 Disputes; Continuation of Work. Notwithstanding any claim, dispute or other disagreement between the City and the Contractor regarding performance under the Contract Documents, the scope of Work thereunder, or any other matter arising out of or related to, in any manner, the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Work in accordance with the City’s written direction, pending any final determination or decision regarding any such claim, dispute or disagreement.
General Conditions Page 59 GENERAL CONDITIONS
16.11 Dispute Resolution; Arbitration. 16.11.1 Claims Under $375,000.00. Claims between the City and the Contractor of $375,000.00 or less shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures established in Part 3, Chapter 1, Article 1.5 of the California Public Contract Code, §§20104 et seq.; provided however that California Public Contract Code §20104.2(a) shall not supersede the requirements of the Contract Documents with respect to the Contractor’s notification to the City of such claim or extend the time for the giving of such notice as provided in the Contract Documents. The term “claims” as used herein shall be as defined in California Public Contract Code §20104(b)(2). 16.11.2 Arbitration. Except as provided in Article 16.11.1, any other claims, disputes, disagreements or other matters in controversy between the City and the Contractor arising out of, or related, in any manner, to the Contract Documents, or the interpretation, clarification or enforcement thereof shall be resolved by arbitration conducted under the auspices of Judicial Arbitration and Mediation Services (“JAMS”) and its rules and procedures in effect as of the date that a Demand for Arbitration is filed, except as expressly modified herein. The locale for any arbitration commenced hereunder shall be the JAMS regional office closest to the Site. A Demand for Arbitration shall be filed and served within a reasonable time after the occurrence of the claim, dispute or other disagreement giving rise to the Demand for Arbitration, but in no event shall a Demand for Arbitration be filed or served after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based upon such claim, dispute or other disagreement would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. In the event more than one Demand for Arbitration is made by either the City or the Contractor, all such controversies shall be consolidated into a single arbitration proceeding, unless otherwise agreed to by the City and the Contractor. The Contractor’s Surety, a Subcontractor or Material Supplier to the Contractor and other third parties may be permitted to join in and be bound by an arbitration commenced hereunder if required by the terms of their respective agreements with the Contractor, except to the extent that such joinder would unduly delay or complicate the expeditious resolution of the claim, dispute or other disagreement between the City and the Contractor, in which case an appropriate severance order shall be issued by the Arbitrator(s). The expenses and fees of the Arbitrator(s) shall be divided equally among the parties to the arbitration. Each party to any arbitration commenced hereunder shall be responsible for and shall bear its own attorneys’ fees, witness fees and other cost and expense incurred in connection with such arbitration. The foregoing notwithstanding, the Arbitrator(s) may award arbitration costs, including Arbitrators’ fees but excluding attorneys’ fees, to the prevailing party. The award rendered by the Arbitrator(s) (“Arbitration Award”) shall be final and binding upon the City and the Contractor only if: (i) the Arbitration Award is supported by substantial evidence pursuant to California Code of Civil Procedure §1296; (ii) the Arbitration Award is in conformity with California substantive law and substantive legal principles in effect at the time that an Arbitration Award is issued; and (iii) the Arbitration Award is accompanied by written findings of fact and conclusions of law. In connection with any arbitration proceeding commenced hereunder, the discovery rights and procedures provided for in California Code of Civil Procedure §1283.05 shall be applicable, and the same shall be deemed incorporated herein by this reference. The confirmation, enforcement, vacation or correction of an arbitration award rendered hereunder shall be the Superior Court of the State of California for the county in which the Site is situated. The substantive and procedural rules for such post‐ award proceedings shall be as set forth in California Code of Civil Procedure §1285 et seq.
General Conditions Page 60 GENERAL CONDITIONS
16.12 Capitalized Terms. Except as otherwise expressly provided, capitalized terms used in the Contract Documents shall have the meaning and definition for such term as set forth in the Contract Documents.
16.13 Attorneys Fees. Except as expressly provided for in the Contract Documents, or authorized by law, neither the City nor the Contractor shall recover from the other any attorneys fees or other costs associated with or arising out of any legal, administrative or other proceedings filed or instituted in connection with or arising out of the Contract Documents or the performance of either the City or the Contractor thereunder.
16.14 Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in the Contract Documents is deemed to be inserted herein and the Contract Documents shall be read and enforced as though such provision or clause are included herein, and if through mistake, or otherwise, any such provision or clause is not inserted or if not correctly inserted, then upon application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction.
16.15 Days. Unless otherwise expressly stated, references to “days” in the Contract Documents shall be deemed to be calendar days.
16.16 Entire Agreement. The Contract Documents contain the entire agreement and understanding between the City and the Contractor concerning the subject matter hereof, and supersedes and replaces all prior negotiations, proposed agreements or amendments, whether written or oral. No amendment or modification to any provision of the Contract Documents shall be effective or enforceable except by an agreement in writing executed by the City and the Contractor.
-- END OF GENERAL CONDITIONS --
General Conditions Page 61
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions form a part of the Contract Documents for the work generally described as COUNCIL CHAMBERS ACCESSIBILITY IMPROVEMENT AND AUDIO, VIDEO AND SOUND SYSTEM PROJECT, PW 2015‐14.
1. Standard Specifications and Engineering Standards. When used, refers to the City of Arroyo Grande Standard Specifications and Engineering Standards, April 2016.
2. Mark‐Up On Changes. In the event of changes to the work, pursuant to Article 9.4.1.3.4 of the General Conditions, the mark‐up or allowance for all overhead (including home office and field overhead) and profit, shall not exceed twelve percent (12%) of the actual cost of performing the change, regardless of the number of subcontractors, of any tier, performing any portion of such change to the work.
3. Commencement of Work. The Contractor shall commence the Work on the date set forth in the Notice to Proceed issued by or on behalf of the City; the Contract Time shall commence on the date set forth in the Notice to Proceed for commencement of the Work.
4. Work in Occupied/Existing Improvements. If any portion of the Work is situated in, on or about existing improvements or areas which are occupied or otherwise used by the City for City operations or activities, the Contractor shall not perform or permit any Work to be performed in such areas without prior notice to the City and approval of the City to proceed with Work in such areas. The Contractor’s notice shall include without limitation, indicate the nature of the Work to be performed in such areas, the anticipated duration of such Work and the nature/extent of anticipated disruption or interference with City activities or operations in such areas. In the sole and exclusive discretion of the City, the City’s approval of the Contractor’s Work in such areas may be denied, granted or conditioned. At no time during performance of the Work shall the Contractor engage in activities or permit others to engage in activities which impair or limit: (i) any vehicular access to the job site; (ii) any vehicular travel on designated roadways/paths within the job site; or (iii) any existing vehicular parking, loading, unloading areas. In the event of such impairment or limitation, the Contractor shall immediately vacate such areas and/or make alternatives available, as directed or authorized by the City. Any such action by the Contractor shall be without adjustment of the Contract Time or the Contract Price.
5. Utility Services Disruption. If any portion of the Work requires the cessation, limitation or other disruption to utility services (including without limitation, electrical power, voice/data services, water, sewer, storm drain, or gas) serving any portion of the City, the Contractor shall not commence such Work without prior notice to the City of the extent and nature of utility service cessation, limitation or disruption and approval by the City to proceed with such Work. The City’s approval of any cessation, limitation or disruption of utility services may be denied, granted or conditioned in the sole and exclusive discretion of the City. The foregoing may include, without limitation, approval conditioned on the Contractor providing temporary utility services and distribution thereof during the cessation, limitation or disruption of utility services during; any such temporary utility services and distributions thereof shall be at the cost and expense of the Contractor without adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Time.
6. Existing Improvements/Conditions. 6.1 Verification of Existing Improvements/Conditions. Prior to commencement of any portion of the Work, the Contractor shall review the Contract Documents and the existing improvements/conditions in, on or about the area(s) for such portion of the Work to confirm that the actual existing improvements/conditions are consistent with the existing improvements/conditions depicted in the Contract Documents. If any discrepancies exist between actual existing improvements/conditions and those depicted in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, prior to commencement of Work in such area notify the City Representative and the Architect, in writing of such variation; as necessary or appropriate, the
Supplemental Conditions Page 1 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS
Contractor shall obtain clarification or direction from the City Representative and/or the Architect to address such variations.
6.2 Damage or Destruction to Existing Improvements/Conditions. If any portion of the Work results in damage or destruction to any existing improvements or conditions in, on or about the Site, the Contractor shall: (i) notify the City Representative and the Architect in writing within four (4) hours of the occurrence of an event of damage or destruction and (ii) repair, replace or otherwise correct such damage/destruction and restore the existing improvements/conditions to the condition existing immediately prior to such damage or destruction at the sole cost and expense of the Contractor without adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Time. The foregoing notwithstanding, the Contractor shall not, and shall not permit others to, backfill or cover‐up any damage or destruction to existing improvements/conditions without prior notice by the Contractor to the City of backfilling or covering‐up of damage/destruction and the City’s authorization to proceed with backfilling or covering‐up.
6.3 No Use of Existing Facilities. The personnel of the Contractor, Subcontractors and other performing Work at the Site shall not use any existing facilities, improvements in, on or about the job site, including without limitation, trash/rubbish bins/dumpsters, restrooms, loading/storage areas and other similar areas.
7. Demolition Materials. 7.1 Disposal of Demolition Materials. All materials removed during the demolition process shall be separated into three (3) categories and disposed of as follows: (i) Concrete and concrete type materials; (ii) steel, and other metal products; and (iii) general trash. 7.2 Recycled Demolished Materials. All demolished concrete and concrete type materials and all demolished metal products shall be recycled at an appropriate recycling center and/or location. 7.3 Recycled Demolished Materials Record Keeping. Each Subcontractor shall submit a written report to the Contractor upon the Subcontractor’s completion of its portion of the Work and as of December 31 of the year in which the demolition takes place. The Contractor shall compile these reports into one (1) report to be submitted to the City on or before February 1 of the year following the demolition or upon the completion of the demolition. The report information shall include: (i) Contractor’s name, address, phone number; (ii) date(s) of demolition materials removal; (iii) estimated total weight of demolition materials removed (iv) type(s) of demolition materials removed and (v) the disposal site(s) of demolition materials.
8. Scaling Dimensions From Drawings. In no case shall working dimensions be scaled from plans, sections, or details from the Drawings. If no dimension is shown in the Drawings, the Contractor shall request in writing that the Architect provide clarification or the specific dimension.
9. Similar Conditions. The intent of the Contract Documents is to provide a fully functional finished product, complete in every respect. Where a specific detail is not shown, the construction shall be similar to that indicated or noted for similar conditions and cases of construction on this project. References of notes and details to specific conditions and locations shall not limit their applicability. Materials for similar use shall be of the same type and manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated or specifically specified to be different in the Contract Documents. Any deviation must be approved in writing, by the Architect prior to incorporation into the Work.
10. Applicable Codes. All work shall conform with the most recent edition of the California Building Code as adopted and amended DSA and the Laws. All Work shall conform to all applicable requirements set forth in Titles 21 and 24 of the California Code of Regulations. No part of the Contract Documents shall be construed as requiring or permitting Work contrary to the requirements of the Laws. 11. Handicap Access Regulations. The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall comply with Title 24 of the California Code of Regulations relating to Disabled Access Regulations and ADA, Americans with
Supplemental Conditions Page 2 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS
Disabilities Act Regulations whether or not specifically indicated on the Contract Documents. Where existing paths of travel are interrupted due to construction, barrier‐free the Contractor, without adjustment to Contract Price or Contract Time, shall maintain paths of travel.
12. Conflicts in Drawings and Specifications. In addition to the provisions of Article 1.12.3 of the General Conditions the following shall apply:
Inclusion of conflicting Items: Where an item or portion of the Work is described in conflicting or different terms, the Contractor shall provide without adjustment of the Contract Price, the highest cost alternative that can be reasonably inferred from the Contract Documents, as determined by the Architect.
-- END OF SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS --
Supplemental Conditions Page 3
APPENDICES
APPENDIX A - FORM OF AGREEMENT
CONTRACT
for the Construction of: CITY COUNCIL CHAMBERS ACCESSIBILITY IMPROVEMENT AND AUDIO, VIDEO AND SOUND SYSTEM PROJECT, PW 2015-14
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this ______day of ______, 2016, by and between the CITY OF ARROYO GRANDE, a municipal corporation of the State of California, hereinafter designated City, party of the first part, and
WITNESSETH: That the parties hereto do mutually agree as follows:
ARTICLE I. Scope of Work. For and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned to be made and performed by City, Contractor agrees with City to furnish all materials, equipment and labor and construct facilities for City, and to perform and complete in a good and workmanlike manner all the work pertaining thereto shown on the plans and described in the specifications hereto attached, and to furnish at his own proper cost and expense all tools, equipment, labor, and materials necessary therefore, except such materials as in the said specifications are stipulated to be furnished by City, and to do everything required by this Contract and the said specifications and plans, and the requirements of the Engineer under them, to wit:
BID ITEM LIST FOR CITY COUNCIL CHAMBERS ACCESSIBILITY IMPROVEMENT AND AUDIO, VIDEO AND SOUND SYSTEM PROJECT SPECIFICATION NO. PW 2015-14
Item Item Unit of Estimated Item Price Total No. Description Measure Quantity (in figures) (in figures) Construction of Council 1 SG(1) Chambers Accessibility 1 LS Improvements Construction of Council 2 APP(2) Chambers Audio, Video 1 LS and Sound Improvements Bid Total (or Base Bid) $ Company Name:
(1) See “Accessibility Specifications Group” for additional information. (2) See “Line Item Detail – Base Bid” in Appendices for additional information.
1
APPENDICES
Item Item Unit of Estimated Item Price Total No. Description Measure Quantity (in figures) (in figures) Additive - AV Operator 1 APP 1 LS (3) Console Total Unit Price No. 1 $
2 APP(3) Additive - AV PA System 1 LS Total Unit Price No. 2 $ Additive - AV Chambers 3 APP 1 LS (3) Alternate Displays Total Unit Price No. 3 $
4 APP(3) Additive - AV Lighting 1 LS Total Unit Price No. 4 $ Additive - AV Production 5 APP 1 LS (3) Control Surface Total Unit Price No. 5 $ Company Name:
(3) See “Line Item Detail – Bid Additives” in Appendices for additional information.
ARTICLE II. Compensation. For furnishing all said equipment, materials and labor, performing demolition as required, and doing all the work contemplated and embraced in this Contract; and for all loss and damage arising out of the nature of the work aforesaid, or from the action of the elements or from any unforeseen difficulties which may arise or be encountered in the prosecution of the work until its acceptance by City, and for all risks of every description connected with the work; also for all expenses incurred by or in consequence of the suspension or discontinuance of work, except such as in the said specifications are expressly stipulated to be borne by City; and for well and faithfully completing the work and the whole thereof, in the manner shown and described in the said plans and specifications and in accordance with the requirements of the City Engineer under them, City will pay and Contractor shall receive as full compensation therefore the amounts for such work as installed for the unit prices bid therefore in accordance with the proposal of Contractor.
ARTICLE III. Full Performance. City hereby promises and agrees with said Contractor to employ, and does hereby employ, said Contractor to provide the materials and to do the work according to the terms and conditions herein contained and referred to, for the prices aforesaid, and hereby contracts to pay the same at the time, in the manner and upon the conditions set forth in the specifications; and the said parties for themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, do hereby agree to full performance of the covenants herein contained.
2
APPENDICES
ARTICLE IV. Contract Documents. Contract Documents shall consist of The Notice to Contractors, the Statement of Prevailing Wages, the Bid Requirements, the Contract Bid, the Bond for Faithful Performance, the Bond for Materials and Laborers, the Contract Agreement, the General Conditions, the Supplemental Conditions and the Project Plans mentioned therein and titled “City Council Chambers Accessibility Improvement and Audio, Video and Sound System Project” all of which are hereto attached and are hereby incorporated in and made a part of this Contract.
ARTICLE V. Bonds. Contractor shall forthwith furnish in triplicate, a faithful performance bond in an amount equal to 100% of the contract price and a labor and materials bond in an amount equal to 100% of the contract price, both bonds to be written by a surety company acceptable to City and in the form prescribed by law.
ARTICLE VI. Time for Completion. Contract time is established as 56 working days.
ARTICLE VII. Liquidated Damages. City and Contractor recognize that time is of the essence in this Contract and that the City will suffer financial loss if the work is not completed within the time specified in Article VI of this Contract and the attached exhibits. They also recognize the delays, expense and difficulties involved in proving the actual loss suffered by City if the work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, City and Contractor agree that the fixed liquidated damages amount for delay (but not as a penalty) is established as $500 per day for failure to complete the work within the Contract time.
ARTICLE VIII. Indemnification. Contractor shall indemnify the City as set forth in Section 7-1.05 of the Standard Specifications and Engineering Standards.
ARTICLE IX. Insurance. Contractor shall provide insurance as set forth in Section 7- 1.06 of the Standard Specifications and Engineering Standards. Maintenance of required insurance coverage is a material element of this Contract and failure to maintain or renew coverage or to provide evidence of renewal shall be a material breach of this Contract.
ARTICLE X. Governing Documents. It is further expressly agreed by and between the parties hereto that should there be any conflict between the terms of this instrument and the bid or proposal therefore, then this instrument shall control and nothing herein shall be considered as an acceptance of the said terms of said bid or proposal conflicting herewith.
ARTICLE XI. Compliance with Statutes and Regulations. Contractor will be knowledgeable of and will comply with all applicable federal, state, county and city statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances and orders.
ARTICLE XII. Notice. All notices or other official correspondence relating to contractual matters between the parties hereto shall be made by personal service or by first class mail, postage prepaid, addressed to the parties as follows:
3
APPENDICES
City: City Clerk 300 E. Branch Street Arroyo Grande, California 93420
Contractor: ______
ARTICLE XIII. Severability. If any part of this Contract is held invalid by a court of competent jurisdiction, the balance shall retain its full force and effect.
ARTICLE XIV. Governing Law; Jurisdiction. This Contract will be administered and interpreted under the laws of the State of California. Jurisdiction of any litigation arising from the Contract will be in San Luis Obispo County, California.
ARTICLE XV. Authorization. All officers and individuals executing this and other documents on behalf of the respective parties hereby certify and warrant that they have the capacity and have been duly authorized to execute said documents on behalf of the entities indicated.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF: The parties hereto have caused this Contract to be executed the day and year first above written.
CITY OF ARROYO GRANDE CONTRACTOR
By: By: Mayor
Title ATTEST:
Director of Legislative & Information Services / City Clerk
-- END OF CONTRACT --
4
APPENDICES
PAYMENT BOND (FOR LABOR AND MATERIAL)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we, , as Principal, and ______as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of in the sum of Arroyo Grande, Dollars ( ) lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
The condition of the above obligation is such that whereas said Principal has been awarded and is about to enter into a written contract with the City of Arroyo Grande for the work described in CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF, “City Council Chambers Accessibility Improvement and Audio, Video and Sound System Project” which is attached hereto, made a part hereof, and to which reference is hereby made for all particulars, and is required by said City to give this bond in connection with the execution of said contract;
NOW THEREFORE, if said Principal, as Contractor in said contract, or Principal's Subcontractor, fail to pay any of the persons referred to in Section 3181 of the Civil Code of the State of California for labor performed, skills or other necessary services bestowed, site improvement made, equipment leased, or appliances, equipment implements, machinery, materials, power, provender, provisions, teams, or trucks furnished or used in, upon, for, or about the performance of the work contracted to be done, or for amounts due under the employment Insurance Act with respect to work or labor performed by any such claimant, said Surety shall pay for the same. In an amount not exceeding the sum specified above; and if suit is brought upon this bond, a reasonable attorney's fee to be fixed by the court. This bond is pursuant to the provisions of Ch 7 Div 3, Pt 4, Tit 15, of the Civil Code of the State of California, and shall insure to the benefit of any of the persons referred to in said Civil Code Section 3181, as it now exists or may hereafter be amended, so as to give a fight of action to such persons or their assigns in any suit brought upon this bond. No premature payment by said City to said Principal shall exonerate any Surety unless the City Council of said City shall have actual notice that such payment is premature at the time and it is ordered by said Council, and then only to the extent that such payment shall result in loss to such Surety, but in no event more than the amount of such premature payment.
It is agreed, that any alterations in the work to be done, or increase or decrease of the material to be furnished, which may be made pursuant to the terms of said contract shall not in any way release either the Principal or Surety hereunder, nor shall any extension of time granted under the provisions of said contract release either the Principal or Surety, and notice of such alterations or extensions of the contract is hereby waived by the surety.
5
APPENDICES
WITNESS our hands this day of , 2016.
Surety Principal
ALL SIGNATURES MUST BE WITNESSED BY NOTARY (Attach appropriate jurats)
-- END OF PAYMENT BOND --
6
APPENDICES
FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we, , as Principal, and ______as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Arroyo Grande, in the sum Dollars of ($ ) lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, has been awarded and is about to enter into a written contract with the City of Arroyo Grande for the work described in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE “City Council Chambers Accessibility Improvement and Audio, Video and Sound System Project” which is attached hereto, made a part hereof, and to which reference is hereby made for all particulars, and is required by said City to give this bond in connection with the execution of said contract;
NOW, THEREFORE, if said Principal shall well and truly do and perform all of the covenants and obligations of said contract on Principal's part to be done and performed at the times and in the manner specified therein, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect. No premature payment by said City to said Principal shall exonerate any Surety unless the City Council of said City shall have actual notice that such payment is premature at the time it is ordered by said Council, and then only to the extent that such payment shall result in loss to such Surety, but in no event more than the amount of such premature payment.
It is agreed, that any alterations in the work to be done, or increase or decrease of the material to be furnished, which may be made pursuant to the terms of said contract shall not in any way release either the Principal or Surety hereunder, nor shall any extensions of time granted under the provisions of said contract release either the principal or surety, and notice of such alterations or extensions of the contract is hereby waived by the Surety.
WITNESS our hands this day of , 2016.
Surety Principal
ALL SIGNATURES MUST BE WITNESSED BY NOTARY (Attach appropriate jurats)
-- END OF FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND --
7
APPENDICES
GENERAL LIABILITY ENDORSEMENT
CITY OF ARROYO GRANDE 300 East Branch Street Arroyo Grande, CA 93420-2706
ATTN:______
POLICY INFORMATION
1. Insurance Company: Policy Number: 2. Policy Term – From: To: Endorsement Effective Date: ______3. 4. Name Insured: 5. Address of Named Insured: 6. Deductible or Self-Insured Retention (Nil unless otherwise specified): $ 7. Coverage is equivalent to: Commercial General Liability “occurrence” form CG0001. 8. Bodily Injury and Property Damage Coverage is:
POLICY AMENDMENTS This endorsement is issued in consideration of the policy premium. Notwithstanding any inconsistent statement in the policy to which this endorsement is attached or any other endorsement attached thereto, it is agreed as follows:
1) INSURED. The City, its elected or appointed officials, employees, agents and volunteers, are included as insured with regard to damages and defense of claims arising from: (a) activities performed by or on behalf of the Named Insured, (b) products and completed operations of the Named Insured, or (c) premises owned, leased or used by the Named Insured or (d) automobiles owned, leased, hired or borrowed by the named insured. 2) CONTRIBUTION NOT REQUIRED. As respects: (a) work performed by the Named Insured for or on behalf of the City; or (b) products sold by the Named Insured to the City; or (c) premises leased by the Named Insured from the City, the insurance afforded by this policy shall be primary insurance as respects the City, its elected or appointed officials, employees, or volunteers; or stand in an unbroken chain of coverage excess of the Named Insured's scheduled underlying primary coverage. In either event, any other insurance maintained by: the City, its elected or appointed officials, employees, agents and volunteers, shall be in excess of this insurance and shall not contribute to it.
8
APPENDICES
SCOPE OF COVERAGE. The policy, if primary, affords coverage at least as broad as:
1) Insurance Services Office Commercial General Liability Coverage, "occurrence" form CG0001 or; 2) If excess, affords coverage, which is at least as broad as the primary insurance forms referenced in the proceeding sections (1); 3) Insurance Services Office Commercial General Liability Endorsement Form (ISO CG 20 10 11 85). Other additional insured endorsement forms will be considered providing coverages under the products and completed operations hazard is extended to the additional insured.
SEVERABILITY OF INTEREST. The insurance afforded by this policy applies separately to each insured who is seeking coverage or against whom a claim is made or a suit is brought, except with respects to the Company's limit of liability. The inclusion of any person or organization as an insured shall not affect any right which such person or organization would have as a claimant if not so included.
PROVISIONS REGARDING THE INSURED'S DUTIES AFTER ACCIDENT OR LOSS. Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policy shall not affect coverage provided to the City, its elected or appointed officials, employees, agents or volunteers.
CANCELLATION NOTICE. The insurance afforded by this policy shall not be suspended, voided, canceled, reduced in coverage or in limits except after thirty (30) days' prior written notice by certified mail return receipt requested has been given to the City. Such notice shall be addressed as shown in the heading of this endorsement.
INCIDENT AND CLAIM REPORTING PROCEDURE Incidents and claims are to be reported to the insurer at:
ATTN: Title: Department: Company: Street Address: Telephone Number:
9
APPENDICES
SIGNATURE OF INSURER OR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF THE INSURER
I, (print/type name), warrant that I have authority to bind the below listed insurance company and by my signature hereon does so bind this company.
SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE (original signature required on endorsement furnished to the City)
ORGANIZATION: TITLE: ADDRESS: TELEPHONE: FAX:
-- END OF GENERAL LIABILITY ENDORSEMENT --
10
APPENDICES
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ENDORSEMENT
ATTN: ______
POLICY INFORMATION
1. Insurance Company: Policy Number: 2. Policy Term – From: To: Endorsement Effective Date: ______3. Name Insured: 4. Address of Named Insured:
5. Limit Liability Any One Occurrence/Aggregate: $ 6. Deductible or Self-Insured Retention (Nil unless otherwise specified): $
POLICY AMENDMENTS This endorsement is issued in consideration of the policy premium. Notwithstanding any inconsistent statement in the policy to which this endorsement is attached or any other endorsement attached thereto, it is agreed as follows:
INSURED. The City, its elected or appointed officials, employees, agents and volunteers, are included as insured with regard to damages and defense of claims arising from: (a) activities performed by or on behalf of the Named Insured, (b) products and completed operations of the Named Insured, or (c) premises owned, leased or used by the Named Insured, or (d) automobiles owned, leased, hired, or borrowed by the Named Insured.
CONTRIBUTION NOT REQUIRED. As respects: (a) work performed by the Named Insured for or on behalf of the City; or (b) products sold by the Named Insured to the City; or (c) premises leased by the Named Insured from the City, the insurance afforded by this policy shall be primary insurance as respects the City, its elected or appointed officials, employees, or volunteers; or stand in an unbroken chain of coverage excess of the Named Insured's scheduled underlying primary coverage. In either event, any other insurance maintained by the City, its elected or appointed officials, employees, agents or volunteers, shall be in excess of this insurance and shall not contribute to it.
SCOPE OF COVERAGE. The policy, if primary, affords coverage at least as broad as: 1) Insurance Services Office form number CA 0001 (ed. 1/78), Code 1 (any auto) and endorsement CA 0025. 2) If excess, affords coverage, which is at least as broad as the primary insurance forms referenced in the preceding section (1).
11
APPENDICES
SEVERABILITY OF INTEREST. The insurance afforded by this policy applies separately to each insured who is seeking coverage or against whom a claim is made or a suit is brought, except with respects to the Company's limit of liability. The inclusion of any person or organization as an insured shall not affect any right which such person or organization would have as a claimant if not so included.
PROVISIONS REGARDING THE INSURED'S DUTIES AFTER ACCIDENT OR LOSS. Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policy or breaches or violations of warranties shall not affect coverage provided to the City, its elected or appointed officials, employees, agents or volunteers.
CANCELLATION NOTICE. The insurance afforded by this policy shall not be suspended, voided, canceled, reduced in coverage or in limits except after thirty (30) days' prior written notice by certified mail return receipt requested has been given to the City. Such notice shall be addressed as shown in the heading of this endorsement.
INCIDENT AND CLAIM REPORTING PROCEDURE
Incidents and claims are to be reported to the insurer at:
ATTN: Title: Department: Company: Street Address: Telephone Number:
SIGNATURE OF INSURER OR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF THE INSURER.
I, (print/type name), warrant that I have authority to bind the below listed insurance company and by my signature hereon does so bind this company.
SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE (original signature required on endorsement furnished to the City)
ORGANIZATION: TITLE: ADDRESS: TELEPHONE: FAX:
-- END OF AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY --
12
APPENDICES
WORKER'S COMPENSATION/EMPLOYMENT LIABILITY ENDORSEMENT
ATTN: ______
POLICY INFORMATION
1. Insurance Company: Policy Number: 2. Policy Term – From: To: Endorsement Effective Date: ______3. Name Insured: 4. Address of Named Insured: 5. Limit Liability Any One Occurrence/Aggregate: $ 6. Deductible or Self-Insured Retention (Nil unless otherwise specified): $
POLICY AMENDMENTS In consideration of the policy premium and notwithstanding any inconsistent statement in the policy to which this endorsement is attached or any other endorsement attached thereto, it is agreed as follows:
Cancellation Notice. The insurance afforded by this policy shall not be suspended, voided, canceled, reduced in coverage or in limits except after thirty (30) days' prior written notice by certified mail return receipt requested has been given to the City. Such notice shall be addressed as shown in the heading of this endorsement. Waiver of Subrogation. The Insurance Company agrees to waive all rights of subrogation against the City, its elected or appointed officials, agents and employees for losses paid under the terms of this policy which arise from work performed by the Named Insured for the City.
SIGNATURE OF INSURER OR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF THE INSURER
I, (print/type name), warrant that I have authority to bind the below listed insurance company and by my signature hereon does so bind this company.
SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE (original signature required on endorsement furnished to the City)
ORGANIZATION: TITLE: ADDRESS: TELEPHONE: FAX:
13
APPENDICES
CITY OF ARROYO GRANDE ("the City") A Municipal Corporation
ATTN: ______
This certifies to the City that the following described policies have been issued to the Insured named below and are in force at this time.
Insured: Address:
Description of operations/locations/products insured (show contract name and /or number, if any):
POLICIES LIMITS BODILY POLICY EXPIRATION AND INSURERS INJURY PROPERTY DAMAGE NUMBER DATE Worker’s Compensation ______Employer’s Liability $ ______(Name of Insurer) Best's Rating______Check Policy Type: Claims-made__ Occurrence____ Comprehensive Each Occurrence Each Occurrence General Liability $ ______$ ______ Commercial General or Liability Combined Single Limit $______Aggregate $ ______(Name of Insurer) Best's Rating: _____ Business Auto Policy Each Person Each Liability Coverage $ ______Accident Symbol Each Accident $ (Name of Insurer) $ ______Best's Rating: ______Combined Single Limit $______Umbrella Liability ______Claims-Made _____ Occurrence_____ (Name of Insurer) Occurrence/Aggregate $ ______Best's Rating: ______Self Insured Retention $ ______
14
APPENDICES
The following coverage or conditions are in effect YES NO The City, its officials, and employees, agents and volunteers, are named on all liability policies described above as insureds as respects: (a) activities performed for the City by or on behalf of the named insured, (b) products and completed operations on the Named Insured, and (c) premises owned, leased or used by the Named Insured. Products and Completed Operations. The undersigned will mail to the City 30 days' written notice by receipted delivery of cancellation or deduction of coverage or limits. Cross Liability Clause (or equivalent wording). Personal Injury, Perils A, B, and C. Broad form Property Damage X, C, U hazards included. Contractual Liability Coverage applying to this Contract. Liquor Liability. Coverage afforded the City, its officials, employees, agents and volunteers, as insureds applies as primary and not excess or contributing to any insurance issued in the name of the City. Waiver of subrogation from Workers' Compensation insurer.
This certificate is issued as a matter of information. This certificate is not an insurance policy and does not amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed herein. Notwithstanding any requirement, term or condition of any contract or other document with respect to which this certificate of insurance may be issued or may pertain, the insurance afforded by the policies described herein is subject to all the terms, exclusions and conditions of such policies.
Agency of Brokerage Insurance Company
Address Home Office
Name of Person to be Contacted Authorized Signature
Telephone Number Date
Note: Authorized signatures may be the agent's if agent has placed insurance through an agency agreement with the insurer. If insurance is brokered, authorized signature must be of official of insurer.
This information must include all construction work undertaken in the State of California by the bidder and any partnership, joint venture or corporation that any principal of the bidder participated in as a principal or owner for the last five calendar years and the current calendar year prior to the date of bid submittal. Separate information shall be submitted for each particular partnership, joint venture, corporate or individual bidder. The bidder may attach any additional information or explanation of data which he would
15
APPENDICES like taken into consideration in evaluating the safety record. An explanation must be attached of the circumstances surrounding any and all fatalities.
-- END OF WORKER'S COMPENSATION/ EMPLOYMENT LIABILITY ENDORSEMENT –
16
City of Arroyo Grande
Council Chambers Broadcast Upgrade
Program Report
Executive Summary The City of Arroyo Grande is in process of remodeling their City Council Chambers building for better ADA compliance and various architectural and system improvements for a more streamlined facility and better television broadcasts. During the remodel process, restrooms will be added to the downstairs area for better access for the handicapped, a meeting space will be added to the downstairs area behind the lobby, and the broadcasting system inside the chambers will be upgraded to modern equipment. The system is very dated and some must be brought in by the contracted television operator.
After multiple on-site meetings with the steak holders of the project and list of objectives for the broadcasting system and meeting space equipment. Below is a list of client objectives for the new system for the first round design and budget review.
Objectives:
• Required: New HD Cameras; the current camera system is brought in each meeting by the contracted video operators and are not owned by the City. • Required: New Microphones; the new microphones shall have LED halo rings, mute buttons, and quality goosenecks for ease of use and the highest audio quality for speech. • Required: Upgraded Operator workstation; Currently the existing operator position is also brought in by the contracted video operator and is not aesthetically pleasing inside the Chambers. Since the entire system will be upgraded and owned by the City, the operator position will be relocated to a table on the second floor with the ability to operate the system from within the Chambers for ADA compliance when needed. • Required: Upgraded Main Display; the current projector is too dim and not of sufficient resolution. A full HD 7000 lumen projector and high contrast fixed frame screen will be installed. • Required: New Document Camera and computer inputs. Along with the upgraded HD projector, new video inputs will be added to the staff PC, lectern, and aux inputs to support digital video from newer laptops and mobile devices. A new document camera will support HD video for the best viewing experience. • Required: New broadcasting and video distribution equipment. All new HD production switcher, recorders, monitors, streaming devices, and distribution hardware will allow the City to record in both standard definition and high definition and be future proofed to broadcast in HD as well if the cable company elects to support the format for their station. • Required: A new assisted listening hearing loop system for the hearing impaired will be installed for ADA compliance. • Required: Replace the speakers and amplifier in the chambers with new equipment and provide a new speaker in the lobby.
Page 1 of 19
City of Arroyo Grande
Council Chambers Broadcast Upgrade
Optional bid additives:
• Bid additive: New speakers for the outside overflow area. • Bid additive: Upgraded LED video lighting in the Chambers for the City Council, City Staff, and Podium. • Bid additive: Video Operator Console. To clean up the upstairs operator position a new modular console furniture would replace the operator table. • Bid additive: ATEM 1 M/E Control surface for the video operator.
Page 2 of 19
City of Arroyo Grande
Council Chambers Broadcast Upgrade
System Descriptions This section is broken down into individual sections of the project based on the objectives provided by the client. Each section will describe the system and/or features required for this project. Some sections are noted as optional and can be removed for budgetary purposes.
Required: Downstairs Council Meeting Room
This remodeled space will include a new simple presentation system. A new 55” flat panel display will be hung on the wall with a tilt mount and operated by the television remote control. Two inputs will be available to the users for viewing video inputs: HDMI input at the conference table and HDMI video feed from the Chambers production system.
A small digital video extender will be mounted below the conference table that will accept HDMI and transmit it to a receiver at the display. A 12 Ft. HDMI cable will be included for connecting portable devices to the extender. The display shall be either Sharp, Samsung, or LG. The extender shall be Extron DTP series.
Page 3 of 19
City of Arroyo Grande
Council Chambers Broadcast Upgrade
Required: Video Production and Distribution System
This section is the core of the new system that includes the production switcher and the distribution matrix. The items in this section are required and equivalents will not be allowed without the expressed approval from the AV designer and the City. The objectives for this section are as follows:
• Upgrade to HD backbone. • Create a new operator workstation on the second floor with the capability to relocate to the Chambers for ADA compliance. • Put the City in possession of all the production equipment. • Ability to record a primary and backup recording in SD or HD. • Facilitate a professional workflow for the operator. • New equipment rack.
Optional
• New operator furniture console
Upstairs in the existing equipment rack area, all the existing equipment will be removed during the upgrade process. The existing space for the new production system is approximately 12’ 6” by 6 ft. The goal is to have the ability for two operators to work comfortably side-by-side in the existing space. A new table will be provided by the City for this workspace.
The left side will be configured for the audio operator and the right side will be configured for the video operator. On top of the work surface will be a 10” tabletop touch screen for the audio operator to adjust audio levels and for microphone muting, 2-powered speakers for audio monitoring, a camera joystick for the video operator and keyboard and mouse for the software based production switching system.
The video operator shall have two mounted 21” computer monitors. One for the production system Multiview screen and one for operating the accompanying PC to operate the system.
(Example of possible layout)
Page 4 of 19
City of Arroyo Grande
Council Chambers Broadcast Upgrade
The audio operator shall have a single 21” mounted monitor for also viewing the Multiview output of the production system.
The production system will be based on a switcher from Black Magic Design that features 6 video inputs with both broadcast SDI and consumer HDMI inputs for cameras and computers. You get software control panel, chroma keyer, two media player frame-stores, downstream keyers, transitions and more. Also available is a control surface for greater ease of use. The control surface shall be an optional item.
Drawings of the proposed layout of the operator console are included in the provided PDF drawings. All operator equipment connects to the main rack via cat5 and thus can be relocated as needed to alternate positions.
Page 5 of 19
City of Arroyo Grande
Council Chambers Broadcast Upgrade
A custom panel was designed to be installed at the existing downstairs operator position so the monitors, control surface, and touch screen could be relocated if needed.
A new equipment 41-space rack will be installed to replace the existing equipment rack. A second wall mounted 10U data equipment rack will be mounted adjacent to the main AV rack. The new AV rack will feature side panels, rear door, and no front door for viewing rack mounted video monitors shown below.
Page 6 of 19
City of Arroyo Grande
Council Chambers Broadcast Upgrade
Installed into the equipment rack shall be several devices for video recording, standards conversion, and video distribution. The City television station will be run by a DVR from Leightronix called Ultra Nexus- SDI. This DVR features a two input and two output switch with built-in DVR capabilities and programmable playback and live recording schedule to run continuous programming 24/7 while also recording live events.
Accompanying the Ultra Nexus, a secondary capture recorder will be installed from Crestron that can be controlled via the Crestron control and automation system. This DVR has the capability to record at will in both HD and SD formats for archival purposes and automatically upload the recorded video to a central storage facility for future use. Meetings that occur in the Chambers that are not intended for live production will be recorded on this device and will not require an operator to be present to activate the recording.
A small 8x8 video matrix will be responsible for distributing the various video sources to the appropriate locations for video displays and recording devices. Two rack mounted video monitors will be installed for viewing the output of the nexus, the production switcher, and the community calendar PC to ensure all critical sources are outputting properly. The video switching and distribution system maintains all video in digital format up until it is transmitted to Charter for the zero loss production and stable video.
Also included in the rack are simple composite video and audio outputs for AGP purposes.
At the City staff table, the document camera will be replaced with a new HD document camera, and new connections for connecting a staff PC and other aux inputs for connecting other portable devices. The new document camera features an on-board video display for easy positioning of documents. This document camera can be remotely controlled via the control and automation system should the city staff or the production team need to zoom or focus the camera for the user during their presentation.
Page 7 of 19
City of Arroyo Grande
Council Chambers Broadcast Upgrade
The document camera can also be used as a zoom able HD camera for adding a quick 5th camera to the system for special production needs in a pinch.
Page 8 of 19
City of Arroyo Grande
Council Chambers Broadcast Upgrade
Required: Camera System Upgrade
This project includes four new Sony HD pan/tilt/zoom cameras that will be mounted on each of the four walls. The cameras we chosen for their superior quality and feature rich operation. The cameras are IP controlled allowing their operation from either a joystick or web browser. The cameras are capable of outputting both HD-SDI video for live video production and an IP stream for internet streaming or CCTV purposes. The cameras are available in black or white. A single cat5e and an SDI video cable will be run from the upstairs equipment rack to each camera. The camera locations were chosen for the ability to capture each of the important areas of the Chambers. A wide shot from the rear of the room, a shot of the speaker at the podium, a camera for the council members and a camera for the City staff. No equivalents for the cameras will be allowed.
Page 9 of 19
City of Arroyo Grande
Council Chambers Broadcast Upgrade
Required: Microphone System Upgrade
All microphones in the chambers will be replaced with new microphones that feature an LED halo to indicate when the mic is live and when it is muted. Each of the five council members and the six staff members will receive a new microphone of this style. The podium will have a similar microphone that does not have a mute button or halo and will be controlled by the City staff or video operator when needed.
In addition to the new gooseneck microphones a dual channel wireless microphone system will also be installed that will include both a handheld and a lavalier microphone making the room more multipurpose for training and other events non-council related.
All microphones and audio sources will be routed through a new digital audio processor (DSP) for mixing, EQ, routing, compression and auto leveling. The new DSP will also allow the Clerk or the video operators to remotely control each microphone mute and level as needed. This will give maximum control when needed and automation when desired. This combination of equipment will provide clear audio and a robust system. The equipment in this section is preferred however equivalents in this section are allowed as long as the microphones and their LED halos are remotely controllable, goosenecks are a minimum of 18” long, and the DSP is controllable via the Crestron automation system. The DSP shall have the following features at a minimum: automixing, compression, limiting, parametric EQ, matrixing, auto-leveling, and gating.
Page 10 of 19
City of Arroyo Grande
Council Chambers Broadcast Upgrade
Required: Assisted Listening System
As part of the ADA requirement of this project an induction loop assisted listening system will be installed under the carpet. The will allow people with hearing disabilities in the Chambers with t-coil equipped hearing aids to hear the meeting.
A hearing loop driver will be installed upstairs in the equipment rack and 12AWG wire will be run from the equipment rack to downstairs in the chambers where it will transition to a flat copper tape-like wire that will be run under the carpet.
Once the flat wire is laid down around the perimeter, a special protective warning tape is used to secure the flat copper wire and warn others not to damage the loop wire.
Page 11 of 19
City of Arroyo Grande
Council Chambers Broadcast Upgrade
Per ADA requirements for the amount of seating in the Chambers, three hearing loop receivers with earphones will be included for people who do not have t-coil equipped hearing aids. Equivalents are allowed in this section as long as they meet ADA requirements, include a minimum of three loop receivers with earphones, and the AV integrator provides a loop design proving the proposed alternative will meet ADA requirements for even coverage and field strength.
Page 12 of 19
City of Arroyo Grande
Council Chambers Broadcast Upgrade
Required: Control and Automation System
Assisting the operators and staff shall be a Crestron control and automation system. A central processor connects all of the new equipment together so a simple, intuitive user interface can be created for the users of the new system. New table top touch screen controllers will be installed at the Clerk’s desk and the production console.
Each touch panel will feature a custom user interface (UI) specific to the tasks that will be performed at each station. At the Clerk’s station; switching the content on the main display, adjusting the document camera, Chambers audio volume and microphone mute control will be available.
At the production console; the operators will also have control of individual microphone volume and muting, however all audio adjustments made on the operator’s panel will only affect the broadcast audio and video, control of the Chambers audio is specific to the Clerk’s panel so they never compete for control allowing the Clerk and video operators to focus on their tasks and not the audiovisual systems. The Clerk panel shall be a minimum of 7” diagonal and the operators touch screen shall be minimum of 15” diagonal. Alternates in this section are not allowed.
Page 13 of 19
City of Arroyo Grande
Council Chambers Broadcast Upgrade
Required: Chambers Main Display
The main display in the chambers will be replaced with a new, significantly brighter (7,000 lumen) HD projector by Sony. This new projector is not a standard LCD projector, but rather a laser based projector. The internal light engine is rated for 20,000 hours of continuous brightness before losing brightness saving the City in maintenance costs of replacing multiple projector lamps every 1500 hours. This projector also features built-in HDBaseT technology that allows the video, control, and Ethernet features to be transmitted to the projector over simple cat5e/6 cable. The new production system is already an HDBaseT based system making this projector the perfect complement to the system.
The projector will project onto a new 16:10 format projection screen that will be mounted to the wall replacing the existing projection screen. This fixed frame screen has an ultra-narrow bezel surrounding the screen surface and utilizes Dalite’s HD progressive material for greater image contrast.
Alternates in this section are allowed as long as they meet the following requirements: The projector shall be no less than 7,000 lumens and display 1920x1200 natively. It shall accept HDBaseT video and be controllable via the Crestron system via the HDBaseT connector. The projector shall be a bulb-free
Page 14 of 19
City of Arroyo Grande
Council Chambers Broadcast Upgrade
technology. The fixed frame screen shall meet or exceed the specification listed in the included spec sheet in terms of gain, size, and bezel width.
Required: PA System Upgrade
The City would like replace the ceiling speakers in the Chambers and add a speaker in the lobby area for overflow. Speakers from Bose were chosen for this application for their wide coverage pattern and excellent efficiency to produce warm clean audio however alternatives are allowed. Four new white ceiling speakers will be installed to replace the existing speakers, one new surface mount speaker in the loby, and a new amplifier will be added to the AV rack.
Page 15 of 19
City of Arroyo Grande
Council Chambers Broadcast Upgrade
The following sections are optional bid additives. These sections are not required however highly desirable if the budget will allow.
Bid additive: Chambers Alternate Displays
During the last design meeting, the City expressed interest in also adding displays at the front of the room and side of the left side of the Chambers room. These are optional (alternate items) that are not necessary but ‘nice to haves’. Two 90” displays would be hung from the wall and mirror the input to the projector providing an easier viewing experience for the meeting attendees.
Page 16 of 19
City of Arroyo Grande
Council Chambers Broadcast Upgrade
Bid additive: PA System Upgrade
The City would like to add speakers outside in front of the Chambers for overflow purposes. Speakers from Bose were chosen for this application for their wide coverage pattern and excellent efficiency to produce warm clean audio however alternatives are allowed. Two surface mounted speakers will be installed outside in front of the chambers.
Page 17 of 19
City of Arroyo Grande
Council Chambers Broadcast Upgrade
Bid additive: Lighting System
Finally, a new lighting system for the broadcasting system will be installed to illuminate the City Council, City Staff, and the speaker at the podium with warm even lighting so all persons on camera have a warm look to their skin tones and no harsh shadows on their faces making every look as good as they can to the viewers at home. A lighting design was produced by Brightline at the request of Jensen Audio Visual for choosing the best fixtures and the right locations. Brightline chose dimmable LED Stealth-T fixtures. These fixtures come in three different types of illumination patterns and install directly into the existing ceiling grid. Below are pictures of the fixtures and the locations they will be installed as well as estimated limens at each subject to demonstrate the even lighting levels.
Alternatives in this section are allowed provided the AV integrator can provide a lighting design that meets or exceeds the AV plan.
Page 18 of 19
City of Arroyo Grande
Council Chambers Broadcast Upgrade
Project Considerations
Below is a list of considerations for the City to evaluate while options and features are chosen that could impact the final project estimate or the operation of the system.
• The City will be required to provide all 120V AC power to all locations that require it. Electrical work is not included in the estimated totals. • The City will provide all cable pathways and conduit as part of their ADA construction plan. Refer to architect’s drawings for detail. • The production switcher requires a PC to accompany the system which the City will provide and maintain. This can be a PC or MAC desktop or laptop. Specifications for this computer will accompany the final design. • The City will provide a managed gigabit network switch for the equipment rack. • The City will provide the table(s) for the operator position. • All speakers shall be white paintable. • Lighting must be installed by a certified electrician and the installation of these fixtures is not included in this estimate. • Additional items provided by the City for the City’s surveillance system and other networking components will be installed in the AV equipment rack. Refer to the rack elevation drawing in the AV plans. • AV bids must be all inclusive and must include any and all items to ensure 100% operation at the completion of the project. It shall be the AV integrators responsibility to review and verify the provided AV plans, item list, and specification material and include any missing or incorrect items. This also includes all miscellaneous items such as cables, interconnects, connectors, and any other hardware required for the proper installation of all equipment. The AV designer shall not be responsible for any design flaws during the integration process.
Page 19 of 19
LINE ITEM DETAIL
QTY Council Chambers: Meeting Room 4 EXTRON 101-005-02 SHIELDED RJ-45 PLUG 85 EXTRON 22-236-03 BULK - SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR CABLE 3 EXTRON 26-663-06 6 FT. HDMI TO SAME - ULTRA FLEXIBLE 2 EXTRON 60-1271-12 HDMI TWISTED PAIR EXTENDER - TX 2 EXTRON 60-1271-13 HDMI TWISTED PAIR EXTENDER - RX 1 SAMSUNG UN55J6200 55" 1080P LED FLAT PANEL DISPLAY
Council Chambers: Video Production and Distribution System 1 BLACKMAGIC ATEM TELEVISION STUDIO ATEM TELEVISION STUDIO 1 BLACKMAGIC HDMI TO SDI CONVERTER HDMI TO SDI STANDARD CONVERTER 1 BLACKMAGIC SDI TO ANALOG SDI TO ANALOG VIDEO CONVERTER 1 BLACKMAGIC SDI TO HDMI MINI CONVERTER SDI TO HDMI STANDARDS CONVERTER 1 BLACKMAGIC SMARTVIEW DUO DUAL 8" 3 RU SDI/HD-SDI/3G-SDI/6G-SDI MONITORING WITH BUILT IN SCOPES FOR TECHNICAL WAVEFORM MONITORING. 1 BLACKMAGIC SMARTVIEW HD LARGE 17 INCH FULL HD 6RU SDI/HD-SDI/3G-SDI MONITORING WITH CENTRAL SOFTWARE CONTROL. 1 BURST ELECTRONICS HDLG HD/SD SDI COLOR LOGO GENERATOR 15 CABLES TO GO 03983 6 FT. STANDARD SNAGLESS CAT6 PATCH CABLE - BLACK 2 CABLES TO GO 29652 USB 2.0 A TO MINI-B CABLE (9.8FT) 1 CRESTRON CAPTURE-HD HIGH-DEFINITION CAPTURE RECORDER 12 EXTRON 101-005-02 SHIELDED RJ-45 PLUG 300 EXTRON 22-236-03 BULK - SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR CABLE 1 EXTRON 26-566-03 12 FT. STANDARD VGA WITH AUDIO CABLE 12 EXTRON 26-663-06 6 FT. HDMI TO SAME - ULTRA FLEXIBLE 5 EXTRON 26-663-12 12 FT. HDMI TO SAME - ULTRA FLEXIBLE 2 EXTRON 60-1022-01 8-OUTPUT 4.0 AMP 12V DC POWER SUPPLY 1 EXTRON 60-1238-51 EIGHT INPUT HDCP-COMPLIANT SCALING PRESENTATION SWITCHER WITH DTP EXTENSION 2 EXTRON 60-1271-12 HDMI TWISTED PAIR EXTENDER - TX 1 EXTRON 60-1271-13 HDMI TWISTED PAIR EXTENDER - RX 1 EXTRON 60-1366-13 TWO INPUT DTP TRANSMITTER FOR HDMI AND VGA - DECORA® WALLPLATE 1 EXTRON 60-1495-01 8X8 4K HDMI MATRIX SWITCHER WITH AUDIO DE-EMBEDDING 2 EXTRON 60-1531-13 DTP RECEIVER FOR HDMI - DECORA WALLPLATE - WHITE 6 EXTRON 60-190-10 1U 6-IN. DEEP UNIVERSAL RACK SHELF KIT 1 EXTRON 60-692-21 DA 6AV EQ - SIX OUTPUT COMPOSITE VIDEO AND STEREO AUDIO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER WITH GAIN AND EQ CONTROLS 1 EXTRON 60-954-02 FOUR INPUT USB WITH EMULATION 8 FURMAN M-8LX POWER CONDITIONER, 9 OUTLET, PULL-OUT LIGHTS, 120V/15A 2 JBL LSR305 5" TWO-WAY POWERED STUDIO MONITOR 50 JENSEN AV WIRE MISC. WIRE - NO CHARGE 3 KRAMER ELECTRONICS C-HM/HM/PRO-15 15 FT. HDMI, HIGH SPEED W/ PULL-RESISTANT CONNECTOR 1 KRAMER ELECTRONICS VM-4HC 1:4 HDMI DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER 1 LEIGHTRONIX ULTRANEXUS-SDI INTEGRATED, MULTI-CHANNEL DIGITAL VIDEO SERVER - TWO MPEG PLAYBACK (DECODE) CHANNELS - ONE BROADCAST MPEG RECORD (ENCODE) CHANNEL - SD-SDI VIDEO INPUTS/OUTPUTS - EMBEDDED, AES, AND ANALOG AUDIO SUPPORT - EXTENDED LENGTH DIGITAL RECORDING—RECORD CONTINUOUSLY AT HIGH-QUALITY MPEG-2 VIDEO/AUDIO BI 30 LIBERTY CABLE 18-2C-P-BLK P1 - BULK PLENUM 18 AWG. 2-CONDUCTOR FOR LOW VOLTAGE POWER - BLACK 66 LIBERTY CABLE 23-MINI-SD-BLK 23 AWG RG59 DUAL SHEILD FOR SDI AND COMPOSITE VIDEO - BLACK 1144 LIBERTY CABLE 24-4P-L6-EN-BLK BULK CAT6 CABLE - BLACK 22 LIBERTY CABLE CM-RGB23-BNC MALE BNC COMPRESSION CONNECTOR FOR SOLID MINI RG59 25 AWG 1 LIBERTY CABLE JAV-WQ477798 SINGLE GANG ALUMINUM PLATE WHITE POWDERCOAT WITH 1-HDMI AND 1- VGA W/AUDIO 1 LIBERTY CABLE JAV-WQ477800 CUSTOM 1U RACK PANEL WITH COMPOSITE VIDEO AND AUDIO OUTPUTS 2 LIBERTY CABLE JAV-WQ477802 1-GANG DECORA STYLE PLATE WITH DUAL RJ45 CAT6 CONNECTORS 1 LIBERTY CABLE JAV-WQ477803 1-GANG DECORA STYLE PLATE WITH DUAL 1/4 IN. TRS CONNECTORS - WHITE 1 MIDDLE ATLANTIC BGR-4127LRD Middle Atlantic - BGR-4127LRD - 41 SPACE (71-3/4"), 27" DEEP MULTIBAY BGR RACK WITHOUT REAR DOOR, BLACK FINISH 1 MIDDLE ATLANTIC BGR-552FT-FC Middle Atlantic - BGR-552FT-FC - INTEGRATED 552 CFM DC FAN TOP, INCLUDES 8 FANS AND PROPORTIONAL SPEED FAN CONTROL, FITS ANY BGR, BLACK FINISH 1 MIDDLE ATLANTIC BSPN-41-27 Middle Atlantic - BSPN-41-27 - PAIR OF SIDE PANELS, FITS BGR-4127, BLACK FINISH 1 MIDDLE ATLANTIC EWR-10-17SD 10 SPACE (17 1/2) ECONO SECTIONAL WALL RACK WITH SOLID FRONT DOOR, FITS 15 DEEP EQUIPMENT, BLACK FINISH 1 MIDDLE ATLANTIC PFD-41A Middle Atlantic - PFD-41A - CURVED PLEXI FRONT DOOR, FITS 41 SPACE BGR RACKS, BLACK FINISH 1 MIDDLE ATLANTIC UPS-2200R-8IP RACKMOUNT UPS 2200VA/1650W INDIVIDUAL OUTLET CONTROL WITH IP CONTROL 3 SAMSUNG SMT-2232 21.5 INCH LED MONITOR - 1920X1080 - 16:9 Jensen Audio Visual 2016 City Council Broadcasting Upgrade 44 STEREN 301-178 CAT5E MODULAR PLUG - SOLID 1 WOLFVISION VZ-8PLUS DESKTOP VISUALIZER
Council Chambers: Cameras 400 LIBERTY CABLE 23-MINI-SD-BLK 23 AWG RG59 DUAL SHEILD FOR SDI AND COMPOSITE VIDEO - BLACK 400 LIBERTY CABLE 24-4P-L6-EN-BLK BULK CAT6 CABLE - BLACK 8 LIBERTY CABLE CM-RGB23-BNC MALE BNC COMPRESSION CONNECTOR FOR SOLID MINI RG59 25 AWG 1 SONY RMIP10 IP REMOTE CONTROLLER FOR PTZ CAMERAS 4 SONY SRG300SE/W 1080/60P 3-G-SDI AND LIVE IP STREAMING PTZ CAMERA 8 STEREN 301-178 CAT5E MODULAR PLUG - SOLID
Council Chambers: Dais Microphone System 1 BSS BLU-120 I/O EXPANDER WITH DIGITAL AUDIO BUS 1 BSS BLU-160 SIGNAL PROCESSOR STANDALONE PROCESSOR 4 BSS BLUCARD-IN 4 ANALOG INPUT MIC/LINE CARD FOR SOUNDWEB LONDON CHASSIS 3 BSS BLUCARD-OUT 4 ANALOG OUTPUT CARD FOR SOUNDWEB LONDON CHASSIS 1 BSS BLUDIGITAL-OUT 4 DIGITAL OUTPUT CARD 1 CABLES TO GO 00530 6 FT. STANDARD CAT5E PATCH CABLE 29 HOSA NC3FXX-BAG FEMALE XLR CONNECTOR 1302 LIBERTY CABLE 22-2C-PSH-BLK BULK PLENUM 22 AWG 2-CONDUCTOR WITH DRAIN WIRE FOR ANALOG AUDIO 1 SENNHEISER MAT-133 MICROPHONE BASE 11 SENNHEISER MAT-133-S MICROPHONE BASE WITH LED MUTE SWITCH 11 SENNHEISER MEG 14-40-L-II B 18" GOOSENECK MICROPHONE WITH LED LIGHT RING 1 SENNHEISER MZH 3042 16" GOOSENECK MICROPHONE
Council Chambers: Wireless Microphone System 1 SHURE BLX1288/CVL DUAL CHANNEL COMBO WIRELESS MICROPHONE SYSTEM
Council Chambers: Assisted Listening 2 LISTEN TECHNOLOGY FB1.8 BULK FLAT FOIL CABLE FOR HEARING LOOP INSTALLATIONS 1 LISTEN TECHNOLOGY ILD122 PROFESSIONAL LOOP DRIVER 1 LISTEN TECHNOLOGY LA-326 UNIVERSAL RACK MOUNTING KIT 50 LISTEN TECHNOLOGY LA-396-14-G BULK 14G HEARING LOOP CABLE GREEN 50 LISTEN TECHNOLOGY LA-396-14-R BULK 14G HEARING LOOP CABLE RED 3 LISTEN TECHNOLOGY LP-IL-1 HEARING LOOP RECEIVER WITH EARPHONES 2 LISTEN TECHNOLOGY PWT ADHESIVE INSTALLATION/WARNING TAPE
Council Chambers: Control and Automation System 12 CABLES TO GO 03983 6 FT. STANDARD SNAGLESS CAT6 PATCH CABLE - BLACK 1 CRESTRON CP3N 3-SERIES CONTROL SYSTEM PROCESSOR 1 CRESTRON TS-1542-TILT-B-S 15.6” HD TOUCH SCREEN, TABLETOP TILT, BLACK SMOOTH 1 CRESTRON TSW-752-B-S 7” TOUCH SCREEN, BLACK SMOOTH 30 LIBERTY CABLE 22-2C-PSH-BLK (CONTROL) C1 - BULK PLENUM 22 AWG 2-CONDUCTOR WITH DRAIN WIRE 100 LIBERTY CABLE 24-4P-L6-EN-BLK BULK CAT6 CABLE - BLACK 2 ORTRONICS OR-SP6U24 CAT6E PATCH PANEL 24 PORT 2 STEREN 301-178 CAT5E MODULAR PLUG - SOLID
Council Chambers: Chambers Main Display 1 DA-LITE 24469 72" X 116" 16:10 FORMAT FIXED PROJECTIONS SCREEN WITH 0.9 HD PRO MATERIAL - BLACK FRAME 1 EXTRON 70-563-03 LOW PROFILE POLE MOUNT KIT FOR MULTIPLE PRODUCTS 1 PREMIER MOUNTS APP-0912W 9IN. - 12IN. ADJUSTABLE COLUMN. 1 PREMIER MOUNTS PDS-PLUS-W LOW-PROFILE UNIVERSAL PROJECTOR MOUNT - WHITE 1 PREMIER MOUNTS PP-FCTA-QL HIDDEN T-BAR FRAME ADAPTER QUICKLINK 1 SONY VPL-FHZ700L 7,000 LUMENS 3LCD LASER LIGHT SOURCE PROJECTOR - DESIGNED FOR LARGE VENUE COMMERCIAL SPACES IN EDUCATION, CORPORATE, HOUSE OF WORSHIPS, THEME PARK AND MUSEUM APPLICATIONS. THE MODEL FEATURES UP TO 20,000 HOURS OF MAINTENANCE-FREE OPERATION 1 SONY VPLLZ4015 SHORT FOCUS ZOOM LENS FOR 2.02 -2.67
Council Chambers: Speaker System 4 BOSE 321278-0230 4.5" IN-CEILING LOUDSPEAKER, 40W - WHITE 1 BOSE 321279-0210 4.5" WALL MOUNTED OUTDOOR SPEAKER, 40W - WHITE 45 LIBERTY CABLE 16-2C-P-WHT S1 - BULK PLENUM 16 AWG SPEAKER WIRE - WHITE 1 QSC SPA4-60 4 CHANNEL ENERGY STAR AMPLIFIER
LINE ITEM DETAIL - BID ADDITIVES
QTY Bid Additives: Operator Console 1 MIDDLE ATLANTIC LD-4830HM 1-BAY MONITORING / COMMAND DESK HONEY MAPLE 1 MIDDLE ATLANTIC LD-4830HM-RA 48" LCD MONITORING DESK, ADD-A-BAY, HONEY MAPLE 1 MIDDLE ATLANTIC LD-SP30-HM Middle Atlantic - LD-SP30-HM - SIDE PANELS FOR LCD MONITORING DESK, HONEY MAPLE FINISH, PAIR 2 MIDDLE ATLANTIC MMB-2X1C DUAL MONITOR MOUNT
Bid Additives: PA System 2 BOSE 321279-0210 4.5" WALL MOUNTED OUTDOOR SPEAKER, 40W - WHITE 225 LIBERTY CABLE 16-2C-P-WHT S1 - BULK PLENUM 16 AWG SPEAKER WIRE - WHITE
Bid Additives: Chambers Alternate Displays 2 EASY ADAPTERS FDB9-TB5+ FEMALE DB-9 TO 5-POSITION TERMINAL BLOCK ADAPTER. 4 EXTRON 101-005-02 SHIELDED RJ-45 PLUG 100 EXTRON 22-236-03 BULK - SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR CABLE 2 EXTRON 26-663-06 6 FT. HDMI TO SAME - ULTRA FLEXIBLE 2 EXTRON 60-1271-13 HDMI TWISTED PAIR EXTENDER - RX 1 EXTRON 60-1437-01 1X4 DTP DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER 12 LIBERTY CABLE 22-2C-PSH-BLK (CONTROL) C1 - BULK PLENUM 22 AWG 2-CONDUCTOR WITH DRAIN WIRE 2 PREMIER MOUNTS P5080T REDUCED DEPTH UNIVERSAL TILT MOUNT FOR 50 - 80-IN. 2 SHARP LC-90LE657U 90" FLAT PANEL DISPLAY 1080P
Bid Additives: Lighting 1 BRIGHTLINE BUSMASTER-1 RS-232 TO DALI INTERFACE KIT 1 BRIGHTLINE DCS-8-DALI DALI CONTROLLER, FLUSH MOUNT 8 PRESETS, 4 GROUPS, WHITE 2 BRIGHTLINE LST4X1-CA-IG-35 LED STEALTH 4 BOARD DALI-DIM, 120V, 24"X24", CORNER ANGLE, INCH GRID, 3500K, 90CRI 4 BRIGHTLINE LST6X1-CA-IG-35 LED STEALTH 6 BOARD DALI-DIM, 120V, 24"X24", CORNER THROW, INCH GRID, 3500K, 90CRI 1 BRIGHTLINE LST6X1-FW-IG-35 LED STEALTH 6 BOARD DALI-DIM, 120V, 24"X24", FORWARD THROW, INCH GRID, 3500K, 90CRI 6 BRIGHTLINE LST8X1-CA-IG-35 LED STEALTH 8 BOARD DALI-DIM, 120V, 24"X24", CORNER THROW, INCH GRID, 3500K, 90CRI 1 CRESTRON CNX-B4-A-T Designer Keypad, 4-Buttons, Almond, Matte; includes 1-gang faceplate 75 LIBERTY CABLE LLINX-U BULK AXLINK OR CRESTNET
Bid Additives: Production System Control Surface 1 BLACKMAGIC ATEM 1 M/E BROADCAST PANEL 1 M/E PRODUCTION SWITCHER CONTROL SURFACE
ACCESSIBLITY SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Work by Owner. 4. Work under separate contracts. 5. Purchase contracts. 6. Owner-furnished products. 7. Contractor-furnished, Owner-installed products. 8. Access to site. 9. Coordination with occupants. 10. Work restrictions. 11. Specification and drawing conventions. 12. Miscellaneous provisions.
1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION
A. Project Identification: City of Arroyo Grande Council Chambers Building
1. Project Location: 215 East Branch Street, Arroyo Grande, CA 93420
B. Owner: City of Arroyo Grande
1. Owner's Representative: Jill McPeek, phone number (805) 473-5444
C. Architect: Ravatt Albrecht & Associates, Inc.
D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents: 1. Electrical Engineer: Ravatt Albrecht & Associates, Inc. 2. Mechanical Engineer: Ravatt Albrecht & Associates, Inc.
E. Contractor: To be selected by bid
SUMMARY 011000 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:
1. Building: a. Renovation and ADA improvements of existing building.
B. Type of Contract:
1. Project will be constructed under a single-prime contract arrangement.
1.5 WORK BY OWNER
A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner.
B. Preceding Work: Owner will perform the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work under this Contract begins.
1. Owner will remove all furniture and unfixed items from building/rooms that will be included in the scope of work.
1.6 ACCESS TO SITE
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
1. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.
B. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.
1.7 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS
A. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to
SUMMARY 011000 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work. 2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited Owner occupancy. 3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of Work. 4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of Work.
1.8 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Worker contact with site occupants: construction workers and supervision shall have no contact with students at any time per Atascadero Unified School District Policy. Coordination of activities shall be by the project superintendent with the school principal.
C. On-Site Work Hours: Working hours shall comply with the City of Arroyo Grande Noise Standards Municipal Code, Section 9.16.030: 7:00 a.m. to 10:00 p.m. (Monday - Friday) 8:00 am – 5:00pm (Saturday – Sunday).
D. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than four days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.
E. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.
1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.
F. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 20 feet of the building.
G. Controlled Substances: Use of other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted.
SUMMARY 011000 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1.9 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:
1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.
B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.
C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:
1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011000
SUMMARY 011000 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from 2013 California Building Code. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
1.6 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed unless otherwise indicated.
C. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided. e. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
f. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. g. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. h. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. j. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. k. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012500
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's and Construction Manager's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's and Construction Manager's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."
C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.
D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and Construction Manager and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.
a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.
4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's and Construction Manager's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number.
1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings, providing the Contractor fulfills the following conditions:
a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCad 2010. c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the format of AIA Document C106, Digital Data Licensing Agreement. d. The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline:
1) Floor plans. 2) Reflected ceiling plans. 3) Other files as requested and agreed upon by the Architect.
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect or Construction Manager will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Construction Manager, through Architect, before being returned to Contractor.
D. Paper Submittals where emails are not practical: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect and Construction Manager. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).
j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Other necessary identification.
4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect or Construction Manager observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.
a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect and Construction Manager.
5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect and Construction Manager will return without review or discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.
a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Use AIA Document G810 or similar format as approved by the Architect. b. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following information:
1) Project name. 2) Date. 3) Destination (To:). 4) Source (From:). 5) Name and address of Architect. 6) Name of Construction Manager. 7) Name of Contractor. 8) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 9) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 10) Category and type of submittal. 11) Submittal purpose and description. 12) Specification Section number and title. 13) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. 14) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 15) Indication of full or partial submittal. 16) Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. 17) Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 18) Remarks. 19) Signature of transmitter.
E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).
3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect and Construction Manager. 4. Electronic submittals shall be in PDF format. PDF’s shall be oriented to read without rotating. PDF’s shall be obtained by scanning original documents. Scans of Faxes are not acceptable. PDF’s shall be combined into one document. 5. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use same form as paper submittal. 6. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata:
a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name.
F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect and Construction Manager on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.
H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's and Construction Manager's action stamp.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.
1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.
a. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.
2. Action Submittals: Submit five paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return two copies. 3. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect and Construction Manager will not return copies. 4. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.
1. As indicated in the General Conditions of the contract. 2. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.
1. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches . 2. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file if no larger than 11”x17”. b. Five opaque copies of each submittal larger than 11”x17”. Architect and Construction Manager will retain two copies; remainder will be returned.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.
5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a. Number of Samples: Submit four full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect, through Construction Manager, will return submittal with options selected.
6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit five sets of Samples. Architect and Construction Manager will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned.
1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation."
H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in General Conditions.
I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."
J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."
L. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
M. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
N. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.
O. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
P. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
R. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
S. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:
1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.
T. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
U. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
V. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
W. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect and Construction Manager.
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 9 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S ACTION
A. Action Submittals: Architect and Construction Manager will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect and Construction Mgr. will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.
B. Informational Submittals: Architect and Construction Manager will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect and Construction Manager will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect and Construction Manager.
D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned without action.
END OF SECTION 013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 10 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.
B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.
B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Construction Manager. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Construction Manager's signature for receipt of submittals.
5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use form similar to CSI Form 14.1A.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Page number.
4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:
a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.
1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.
B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.
D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.
1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written report on completion of cleaning.
p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK
A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.
B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.
3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.
END OF SECTION 017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. Footings and foundation walls. 2. Interior Slabs-on-grade. 3. Exterior slabs-on-grade.
B. Special Coordination Requirements: Coordinate with the work of the following sections to identify the finish flooring manufacturer’s concrete slab requirements. Such requirements may be over and above the requirements of the Contract Documents and may require additional materials, means, or methods, which shall be included as part of the Work.
1. Section 096543 “Linoleum Flooring”. 2. Section 096816 “Carpeting”.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast- furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.
B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.
D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.
E. Samples: For vapor retarder.
F. Certificates: Weighmaster’s Certificates.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Waterstops. 4. Curing compounds. 5. Floor and slab treatments. 6. Bonding agents. 7. Adhesives. 8. Vapor retarders. 9. Semirigid joint filler. 10. Joint-filler strips. 11. Repair materials.
B. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements:
1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.
C. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
1. California Building Code, 2013 Edition. 2. CCR Title 24, Part 2
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
C. Source Quality Control: Furnish Weighmaster’s Certificates for all concrete.
D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."
E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:
1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 3. ACI 305R, “Hot Weather Concreting”. 4. ACI 306R, “Cold Weather Concreting”. 5. ACI 308, “Standard Practice for Curing Concrete”.
F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency approved by DSA to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows:
a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed. c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.
D. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 40 for #3 bars and smaller, Grade 60 for #4 bars and larger, using deformed bars for #3 and larger.
B. Welded Reinforcing Bars: Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars, ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
C. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as- drawn steel wire into flat sheets.
D. Do not use reinforcement having any of the following defects: 1. Bar lengths, depths, or bends exceeding the specified fabricating tolerances. 2. Bends or kinks not indicated on the Drawings or required for this Work. 3. Bars with cross-section reduced due to excessive rust or other causes.
2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II. Supplement with the following:
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
D. Water: ASTM C 94 and potable.
2.5 ADMIXTURES
A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable products:
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Blackline 400. b. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop Ultra 15. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Florprufe 120. d. Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper VaporCheck 16. e. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Perminator 15 mil. f. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15. g. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn 15 mil Green h. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15 mil Class A.
B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.
2.7 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309.
1. Shall not discolor concrete or other materials, shall not leave an oily residue upon evaporation of solvent. 2. Shall afford moisture loss not greater than 0.055 grams/cm2 at minimum average of 300 square feet. 3. Meet State of California Air Regulation Board Solvent Emission Standards.
2.8 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Non-shrink Grout:
1. Factory premixed grout; ASTM C1107. 2. Compressive strength: 5,000 psi at 28 days.
B. Exterior Concrete Walks: Provide a capillary break consisting of 2” of clean dry sand, ASTM C33, evenly spread on top of the compacted subgrade.
2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. 2. All concrete mix designs shall be prepared and stamped by a California registered Civil Engineer.
B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:
1. Fly Ash: 15 to 25 percent.
C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
D. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
A. Interior Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 5.5 sacks of cement per cubic yard. 4. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
B. Exterior Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.55. 3. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 5.0 sacks of cement per cubic yard. 4. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.12 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
D. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
E. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 7 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. In no case shall any bolt or anchor be stabbed in place while or after the concrete is poured.
1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.
1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength. 2. Do not strip vertical concrete in less than 7 days. 3. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.
B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.
C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.
3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES
A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.
1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.
B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 8 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 2. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer’s tape. 3. No penetration of the vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing and permanent utilities. 4. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all four sides with tape. 5. Do not saturate the sand cushion. 6. If sand is saturated prior to placement of concrete, remove the sand and replace. 7. Protect all installed moisture barrier construction from precipitation and water penetration by covering and providing positive drainage away from the moisture barrier. 8. Cover slab openings and block-outs around columns to prevent water penetration of moisture barrier.
3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. 2. Clean reinforcement and remove loose dust and mill scale, earth, oil, and other materials which reduce bond or destroy bond with concrete. 3. Position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by forms, construction, and the concrete placement operations. Provide metal chairs, dobies, or other aids manufactured for this purpose. 4. Place reinforcement to obtain the required concrete coverages for concrete protection.
3.7 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one- inch as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 9 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
random contraction cracks. Saw cut slab as soon as surface has hardened to where it can support the equipment and operator, normally within 2 hours after finishing. Use saw which is specially designed for cutting fresh concrete, such as “Soff-Cut” or equal.
D. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.
C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 10 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated:
1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. 2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one- half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours. 3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 11 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Except as may be shown otherwise on the drawings, provide the following finishes at the indicated locations.
B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull- floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch in one direction.
1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces that are to receive concrete floor toppings or mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.
C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.
D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film- finish coating system. 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft. long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch. 3. The contractor shall anticipate that grinding will be required as a result of curling or other slab defects. Grinding required to bring the slab surface into acceptable tolerances for finished flooring installation shall be included as part of the Work.
E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.
F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 12 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
G. Finish at Pool Pit Area: Finish slabs below pools per pool manufacture requirements.
1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances as required by pool manufacture.
3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in- place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
C. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces.
3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot- weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 13 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect and DSA. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.
C. Inspections:
1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs.
D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof.
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 14 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.
a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.
a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory- cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. 11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 15 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.
E. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 24 hours of finishing.
END OF SECTION 033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 16 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 4. Wood sleepers. 5. Plywood backing panels.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.
B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Engineered wood products. 4. Shear panels. 5. Power-driven fasteners. 6. Powder-actuated fasteners. 7. Expansion anchors. 8. Metal framing anchors.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.
C. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project.
1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas. 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade.
1. Species:
a. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. b. Northern species; NLGA. c. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA. d. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.
B. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade.
1. Species:
a. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. b. Southern pine; SPIB. c. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA. d. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. e. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. f. Douglas fir-south; WWPA. g. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. h. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA. i. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
C. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Any species and grade with a modulus of elasticity of at least 1,500,000 psi and an extreme fiber stress in bending of at least 1000 psi for 2-inch nominal thickness and 12-inch nominal width for single-member use.
D. Exposed Framing: Provide material hand-selected for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot-holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and wane.
1. Species and Grade: As indicated above for load-bearing construction of same type.
2.4 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Engineered Wood Products, General: Products shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
B. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Per notes on the Drawings
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
C. Wood I-Joists: Per notes on the Drawings.
D. Rim Boards: Per notes on the Drawings.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Furring. 5. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and of the following species and grades:
1. Mixed southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods; No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA. 3. Northern species; No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. 4. Western woods; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness.
1. Plywood shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
C. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 2. KC Metals Products, Inc. 3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc. 4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 5. USP Structural Connectors.
B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of basis-of-design products. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.
1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.
D. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high- strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick.
1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
D. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.
E. Shear Wall Panels: Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.
G. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
H. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.
I. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
J. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in California Building Code.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes sufficiently wet that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION 061000
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior trim, including non-fire-rated interior door and sidelight frames. 2. Fire-rated interior door and sidelight frames. 3. Shelving and clothes rods.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view. 2. Section 099113 "Painting" for priming and backpriming of interior finish carpentry.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.
B. MDO: Plywood with a medium-density overlay on the face.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include chemical- treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced before shipment to Project site to levels specified. 4. Include copies of warranties from chemical-treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product involving selection of colors, profiles, or textures.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with non-factory-applied finish, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels. 2. For foam plastic moldings, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished; 50 sq. in. 3. For each finish system and color of lumber and panel products with factory-applied finish, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8 by 10 inches for panels.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For fire-retardant-treated wood, from ICC-ES.
B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty for Columns: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace columns that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Warranty Period for Columns: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.
B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
C. Melamine-Faced Particleboard: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, finished on both faces with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2.
1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 18 percent respectively. 2. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. 3. For exposed items indicated to receive transparent finish, do not use chemical formulations that contain colorants or that bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. 4. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. 5. Mark lumber with treatment-quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standard Committee's Board of Review.
a. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece.
6. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a. For exposed plywood indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark back of each piece.
7. Application: All interior lumber and plywood.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: For applications indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and comply with testing requirements; testing by a qualified testing agency.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.
1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent respectively.
C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not contain colorants, and provide materials that do not have marks from spacer sticks on exposed face.
D. Do not use material that does not comply with requirements for untreated material or is warped or discolored.
E. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. 2. For exposed plywood indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark back of each piece.
F. Application: Where indicated.
2.4 INTERIOR TRIM
A. Hardwood Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish):
1. Species and Grade: Red oak Clear A Finish; NHLA. 2. Maximum Moisture Content: 9 percent. 3. Finger Jointing: Not allowed. 4. Gluing for Width: Use for lumber trim wider than 6 inches. 5. Veneered Material: Not allowed. 6. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth). 7. Matching: Selected for compatible grain and color.
B. Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted Finish):
1. Species and Grade: Eastern white pine, Finish or 1 Common; NeLMA or NLGA. 2. Species and Grade: Western Douglas Fir; 1 Common (Colonial) NLGA or WWPA.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3. Species and Grade: Alder, aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, soft maple, sycamore, tupelo, or yellow poplar; B Finish; NHLA. 4. Maximum Moisture Content: 10 percent. 5. Finger Jointing: Allowed. 6. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth). 7. Optional Material: Primed MDF of same actual dimensions as lumber indicated may be used in lieu of lumber.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible.
B. Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
C. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use.
1. Wood glue shall have a VOC content of 30 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D. Installation Adhesive for Foam Plastic Moldings: Product recommended for indicated use by foam plastic molding manufacturer.
1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
E. Paneling Adhesive: Comply with paneling manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives.
1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
F. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer.
1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Back out or kerf backs of the following members except those with ends exposed in finished work:
1. Interior standing and running trim except shoe and crown molds.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2. Wood-board paneling.
B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inchin nominal thickness to 1/16-inchradius and edges of lumber 1 inchor more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inchradius.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements, or with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand unless otherwise indicated. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inchesfor level and plumb. Install adjoining interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inchmaximum offset for flush installation and 1/16- inchmaximum offset for reveal installation. 4. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish carpentry.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 incheslong, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns, miter at outside corners, and cope at inside corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints where necessary for alignment.
1. Install trim after gypsum-board joint finishing operations are completed. 2. Install without splitting; drill pilot holes before fastening where necessary to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
3.5 PANELING INSTALLATION
A. Plywood Paneling: Select and arrange panels on each wall to minimize noticeable variations in grain character and color between adjacent panels. Leave 1/4-inchgap to be covered with trim at top, bottom, and openings. Install with uniform tight joints between panels.
1. Attach panels to supports with manufacturer's recommended panel adhesive and fasteners. Space fasteners and adhesive as recommended by panel manufacturer. 2. Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent. 3. Arrange panels with grooves and joints over supports. Fasten to supports with nails of type and at spacing recommended by panel manufacturer. Use fasteners with prefinished heads matching groove color.
B. Hardboard Paneling: Install according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Leave 1/4- inchgap to be covered with trim at top, bottom, and openings. Butt adjacent panels with moderate contact. Use fasteners with prefinished heads matching paneling color.
1. Wood Stud or Furring Substrate: Install with 1-inchannular-ring shank hardboard nails. 2. Plaster or Gypsum-Board Substrate: Install with 1-5/8-inchannular-ring shank hardboard nails. 3. Nailing: Space nails 4 inches o.c. at panel perimeter and 8 inches o.c. at intermediate supports unless otherwise required by manufacturer.
C. Board Paneling: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions. Arrange in random- width pattern suggested by manufacturer unless boards or planks are of uniform width.
1. Install in full lengths without end joints. 2. Stagger end joints in random pattern to uniformly distribute joints on each wall. 3. Install with uniform end joints with only end-matched (tongue-and-groove) joints within each field of paneling. 4. Install with uniform end joints. Locate end joints only over furring or blocking. 5. Select and arrange boards on each wall to minimize noticeable variations in grain character and color between adjacent boards. Install with uniform tight joints between boards. 6. Fasten paneling by face nailing, setting nails, and filling over nail heads.
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 7 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
7. Fasten paneling with trim screws, set below face and filled. 8. Fasten paneling by blind nailing through tongues. 9. Fasten paneling with paneling system manufacturer's concealed clips. 10. Fasten paneling to gypsum wallboard with panel adhesive.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if completed work shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage during construction.
B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 062023
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 8 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Glass-fiber blanket 2. Glass-fiber blanket with vapor seal and strap support system for support between exposed joists, purlins, or trusses. 3. Glass-fiber board.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sound attenuation blanket used as acoustic insulation.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Low-emitting product certification.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
B. Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment.
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site until just before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET
A. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows:
1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no formaldehyde. 2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than 0.05-ppm formaldehyde. 3. Low Emitting: Complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
B. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. R value as shown on drawings.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. c. Owens Corning.
2.2 INSULATION FASTENERS
A. Provide fasteners as recommended by the Manufacturer for the product application.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:
1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84. 2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
C. Asphalt Coating for Cellular-Glass Block Insulation: Cutback asphalt or asphalt emulsion of type recommended by manufacturer of cellular-glass block insulation.
D. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION WITH SUSPENSION STRAPS BETWEEN RAFTERS AND JOISTS
A. Straps: 1. Cut straps to length and install in the pattern and spacings indicated on shop drawings. 2. Tension straps to required value.
B. Vapor Barrier Fabric:
1. Install vapor barrier fabric in large one-piece custom fabricated pieces to substantially fit defined building areas with minimum practicable job site sealing. 2. Position pre-folded fabric on the strap platform along one eave purlin. 3. Clamp the two bottom corners at the eave and also centered on the bay.
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
4. Pull the other end of the pleat-folded fabric across the building width on the strap platform, pausing only at the ridge to fasten the straps and fabric in position where plane of roof changes and to release temporary fasteners on the opposite ridge purlins. 5. Once positioned, install fasteners from the bottom side at each strap/purlin ntersection. 6. Trim edges and seal along the rafters. 7. All seams must be completely sealed and stapled seams not acceptable.
C. Insulation:
1. Unpack, and shake to a thickness exceeding the specified thickness. 2. Ensure that cavities are filled completely with insulation. 3. Place on the vapor barrier liner fabric without voids or gaps. 4. Place top layer of insulation over and perpendicular to the purlins without voids or gaps, as roof sheathing is applied. 5. Place thermal block on top of purlins or bottom of purlins for retrofit work, if no other thermal break exists. 6. Place new insulation between purlins at the required thickness for the R-value specified.
D. Seal vapor barrier fabric to the wall fabric and elsewhere as required to provide a continuous vapor barrier.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION
A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 incheso.c. both ways on inside face and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates.
1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."
B. Cellular-Glass Board Insulation: Install with closely fitting joints using adhesive pad or serrated trowel attachment method according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inchclearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. Attics: Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves.
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 6. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows:
a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it.
7. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.
a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward interior of construction. b. Interior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward areas of high humidity.
B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.
3.7 SCHEDULE
A. Install insulation in areas indicated here and also as shown on the plans.
B. R-11 unfaced batt on Interior new walls (except next to areas of high humidty such as restrooms) except at new furred wall next to existing walls.
C. R-17 faced batt at exterior walls.
D. Ceilings: R-30 Strap supported batt with continuous sheet beneath, where indicated on plans (Simple Saver System as Basis of Design) in Buildings 400, 500, 700, and 800.
E. Other Ceilings: R-30 Batt insulation installed as indicated on plans.
F. R-19 faced batt on exterior walls where indicated.
END OF SECTION 072100
THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 5
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Standard and custom hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Steel sidelight, borrowed lite and transom frames. 3. Louvers installed in hollow metal doors. 4. Light frames and glazing installed in hollow metal doors.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into masonry construction. 2. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”. 3. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in hollow metal doors. 4. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". 5. Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames.
C. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
1. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 2. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames, Frames Anchors and Hardware Reinforcing. 3. ANSI/SDI A250.6 - Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 4. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. 5. ANSI/SDI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. 6. ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. 7. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 8. ASTM A924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic- Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 9. ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus. 10. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Frames.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
11. ANSI/SDI 122 - Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 12. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association. 13. ANSI/NFPA 105: Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 14. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association. 15. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 16. UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, hardware reinforcements, profiles, anchors, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.
B. Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items.
C. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 6. Details of accessories. 7. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 8. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Samples are only required by request of the architect and for manufacturers that are not current members of the Steel Door Institute.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer wherever possible.
B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, latest edition, "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames".
C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to UL10C (neutral pressure at 40” above sill) or UL 10C.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies Construction: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, attach construction label certifying doors are built to standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire rated door assemblies except for size. 2. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. 3. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105.
a. Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear “S” label, and include smoke and draft control gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors.
D. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. Provide labeled glazing material.
E. Energy Efficient Exterior Openings: Comply with minimum thermal ratings, based on ASTM C1363. Openings to be fabricated and tested as fully operable, thermal insulating door and frame assemblies.
1. Thermal Performance (Exterior Openings): Independent testing laboratory certification for exterior door assemblies being tested in accordance with ASTM C1363 and meet or exceed the following requirements:
a. Door Assembly Operable U-Factor and R-Value Ratings: U-Factor 0.29, R-Value 3.4, including insulated door, thermal-break frame and threshold.
2. Air Infiltration (Exterior Openings): Independent testing laboratory certification for exterior door assemblies being tested in accordance with ASTM E283 to meet or exceed the following requirements:
a. Rate of leakage of the door assembly shall not exceed 0.25 cfm per square foot of static differential air pressure of 1.567 psf (equivalent to 25 mph wind velocity).
F. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and Contractor to review proper methods and procedures for installing hollow metal doors and frames and to verify installation of electrical knockout boxes and conduit at frames with electrified or access control hardware.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.
1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. Door and frames to be stacked in a vertical upright position.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. CECO Door Products (C). 2. Curries Company (CU). 3. Security Metal Products (SMP).
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Provide 1-3/4 inch doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 867.
B. Exterior Doors (Energy Efficient): Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A924 A60. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model, ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level, and HMMA 867 for door construction.
1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Foamed in place polyurethane and steel stiffened laminated core with no stiffener face welds, in compliance with HMMA 867 “Laminated Core”.
a. Provide 22 gauge steel stiffeners at 6 inches on-center internally welded at 5" on- center to integral core assembly, foamed in place polyurethane core chemically bonded to all interior surfaces. No stiffener face welding is permitted. b. Thermal properties to rate at a fully operable minimum U-Factor 0.29 and R-Value 3.4, including insulated door, thermal-break frame and threshold. c. Kerf Type Frames: Thermal properties to rate at a fully operable minimum U- Factor 0.36 and R-Value 2.7, including insulated door, kerf type frame, and threshold.
3. Level/Model: Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Minimum 16 gauge (0.053 inch - 1.3-mm) thick steel, Model 2. 4. Vertical Edges: Vertical edges to be mechanically interlocked with hairline seam. Beveled Lock Edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm). 5. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw attached, with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or composite channel fillers are not acceptable. 6. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9". 7. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.
C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality cold rolled steel that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:
1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, or one-piece polystyrene core, securely bonded to both faces.
a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated.
3. Level/Model: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Minimum 18 gauge (0.042-inch - 1.0-mm) thick steel, Model 2.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
4. Vertical Edges: Vertical edges to have the face sheets joined by a continuous weld extending the full height of the door. Welds are to be ground, filled and dressed smooth. Beveled Lock Edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm). 5. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw attached, with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or composite channel fillers are not acceptable. 6. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" or minimum 14 gauge continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped. 7. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.
D. Manufacturers Basis of Design:
1. Curries Company (CU) - Polystyrene Core - 707 Series.
2.4 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.
B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated of hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Profile as indicated on drawings. 2. Frames: Minimum 14 gauge (0.067-inch -1.7-mm) thick steel sheet. 3. Manufacturers Basis of Design:
a. Curries Company (CU) – M Series.
C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Profile as indicated on drawings. 2. Frames: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch -1.3-mm) thick steel sheet. 3. Manufacturers Basis of Design:
a. Curries Company (CU) - CM Series.
D. Fire rated frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with NFPA 80, listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated.
E. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 Table 4 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames.
2.5 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Stud Wall Type: Designed to engage stud and not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on (Knock-Down) Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
B. Floor Anchors: Floor anchors to be provided at each jamb, formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inches thick.
C. Mortar Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick.
2.6 HOLLOW METAL PANELS
A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for adjoining hollow metal components.
2.7 LOUVERS
A. Metal Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard metal louvers unless otherwise indicated.
1. Blade Type: Vision proof inverted V or inverted Y. 2. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish with baked enamel or powder coated finish. Match pre-finished door paint color where applicable.
B. Louvers for Fire Rated Doors: Metal louvers with fusible link and closing device, listed and labeled for use in doors with fire protection rating of 1-1/2 hours and less.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide door manufacturers standard louver to meet rating indicated. 2. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish with baked enamel or powder coated finish. Match pre-finished door paint color where applicable.
2.8 LIGHT OPENINGS AND GLAZING
A. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints at fabricator’s shop. Fixed and removable stops to allow multiple glazed lites each to be removed independently. Coordinate frame rabbet widths between fixed and removable stops with the type of glazing and installation indicated.
B. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors and Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 20 gauge thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.
C. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated. Provide fixed frame moldings and stops on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 7 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
D. Preformed Metal Frames for Light Openings: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048- inch-thick, cold rolled steel sheet; with baked enamel or powder coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire protection rating indicated. Match pre-finished door paint color where applicable.
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick.
2.10 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings are to be fabricated in sections for splicing or splining in the field by others.
B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/SDI A250.8.
C. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide optional weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape where specified. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors with applied trim or kits to fit. Factory install glazing where indicated. 3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragals as noted in door hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire- performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted. 4. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge strap for continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
D. Hollow Metal Frames:
1. Shipping Limitations: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 2. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.
a. Welded frames are to be provided with two steel spreaders temporarily attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not to be used to size the frame opening.
3. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 8 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
4. High Frequency Hinge Reinforcement: Provide high frequency hinge reinforcements at door openings 48-inches and wider with mortise butt type hinges at top hinge locations. 5. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge straps for continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". 6. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated for removable stops, provide security screws at exterior locations. 7. Mortar Guards: Provide guard boxes at back of hardware mortises in frames at all hinges and strike preps regardless of grouting requirements. 8. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 9. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
b. Stud Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal stud partitions. 10. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped or gasketed doors, drill stops to receive door silencers. Silencers to be supplied by frame manufacturer regardless if specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive template mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised and surface mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 9 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.11 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finishes: Doors and frames to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. Surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view to receive a factory applied coat of rust inhibiting shop primer.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead and chromate free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; and compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. General Contractor to verify the accuracy of dimensions given to the steel door and frame manufacturer for existing openings or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back set, etc.).
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for square, level, twist, and plumb condition.
C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
D. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11 and NFPA 80 at fire rated openings.
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, leveled, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete and frames properly set and
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 10 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
secured, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors. 3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with mortar. 4. Grout Requirements: Do not grout head of frames unless reinforcing has been installed in head of frame. Do not grout vertical or horizontal closed mullion members.
C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch.
2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
D. Field Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.
C. Prime-Coat and Painted Finish Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat, or painted finishes, and apply touchup of compatible air drying, rust-inhibitive primer, zinc rich primer (exterior and galvanized openings) or finish paint.
END OF SECTION 081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 11
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid core doors with wood veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing wood doors. 3. Factory fitting wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. 4. Louvers installed in flush wood doors. 5. Light frames and glazing installed in wood doors.
B. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section “Door Schedule”. 2. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames". 3. Division 08 Section "Glazing". 4. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
C. Standards and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ANSI A208.1 – Wood Particleboard. 3. Intertek Testing Service (ITS Warnock Hersey) - Certification Listings for Fire Doors. 4. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association. 5. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association. 6. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies. 7. United States Green Building Council (USGBC). 8. Window and Door Manufacturers Association - WDMA I.S.1-A Architectural Wood Flush Doors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction, louvers, trim for openings, and WDMA I.S.1-A classifications. Include factory finishing specifications.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Shop Drawings shall include:
1. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 5. Indicate location and extent of hardware blocking. 6. Indicate construction details not covered in Product Data. 7. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 8. Indicate fire protection ratings for fire rated doors.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory finished doors.
1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work.
2. Corner sections of doors, 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges representing actual materials to be used.
a. Provide samples for each species of veneer and core material. b. Finish veneer faced door samples with same materials proposed for factory finished doors.
3. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.
D. Warranty: Provide sample of manufacturer’s warranty.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer wherever possible.
B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, latest edition, "Industry Standard for Architectural Wood Flush Doors’.
C. Fire Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 (neutral pressure at 40” above sill) or UL10C.
1. Oversize Fire Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies provide manufacturer’s construction label, indicating compliance to independent 3rd party certification agency’s procedure, except for size.
2. Temperature Rise Limit: Where required and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire test exposure.
3. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105.
1) Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear “S” label, and include smoke and draft control gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors.
D. Sound Rating Test Reports: Submit manufacturer’s test results of STC ratings from testing performed by independent testing agency for sound resistant doors.
E. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and Contractor to review proper methods and procedures for receiving, handling, and installing flush wood doors.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Package pre-finished doors individually in plastic bags and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting.
C. Mark each door on top rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weather tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in wood face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3- inch span.
2. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.
3. Warranty Period for Solid Core Interior Doors:
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DOOR CONSTRUCTION – GENERAL
A. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty; Aesthetic Grade: Premium.
B. Fire Rated Doors: Provide construction and core as needed to provide fire ratings indicated.
1. Category A Edge Construction: Provide fire rated door edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile (Category A) at 45, 60, and 90 minute rated doors. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
2. Category B Edge Construction: Provide 20 minute fire rated doors as Category B, with smoke and fire seals (supplied by seal manufacturer) applied to frame for 20 minute openings.
3. Pairs: Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
a. Provide fire retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed steel edges and astragals.
b. Where required for concealed hardware, provide formed steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals. Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel.
2.2 CORE CONSTRUCTION
A. Sound Resistant Doors:
1. Provide 1-3/4" thick sound resistant doors complying with the Sound Transmission Class (STC) ratings as prescribed in the latest version of ASTM Standard E-90. Doors are to be furnished complete with gaskets and other acoustical accessories required for specified STC rating. Consult manufacturer details for gasketing, automatic door seals, thresholds, and other hardware or special frames which may be required.
2. Blocking: As indicated under article “Blocking”.
3. Provide sound resistant doors with minimum STC sound rating as indicated.
2.3 BLOCKING
A. Non-Fire-Rated Doors:
1. Provide blocking as indicated below:
a. HB1: 5 inch in doors indicated to have closers and overhead stops.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.4 VENEERED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Graham (GR): GPD Series.
B. Interior Solid Core Doors:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
3. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces:
a. Running Match.
4. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions.
5. Transom Match: Continuous match.
6. Vertical Edges: Matching same species as faces. Wood or composite material, one piece, laminated, or veneered. Minimum requirements per WDMA section P-1, Performance Standards for Architectural Wood Flush Doors.
7. Horizontal Edges: Solid wood or structural composite material meeting the minimum requirements per WDMA section P-1, Performance Standards for Architectural Wood Flush Doors
8. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit sanded before applying face veneers.
9. At doors over 40% of the face cut-out for lights and or louvers, furnish engineered composite lumber core.
2.5 LOUVERS
A. Metal Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard metal louvers unless otherwise indicated.
1. Blade Type: Vision proof inverted V or inverted Y. 2. Metal and Finish: Galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish with baked enamel or powder coated finish.
2.6 LIGHT FRAMES AND GLAZING
A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors up to and including 20-minute rating:
1. Wood Species: Same species as door faces.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2. Profile: a. M1 Flush Bead. b. At wood core doors with 20-minute fire protection ratings, provide wood beads and metal glazing clips approved for such use.
B. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire Rated Doors over 20-minute Rating: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch-thick, cold rolled steel sheet; with baked enamel or powder coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire protection rating indicated.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Air Louver (LV). b. All Metal Stamping (AP). c. Anemostat (AN). d. Pemko (PE).
C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with the flush wood door manufacturer's written instructions.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame opening sizes indicated. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire rated doors. 2. Undercut: As required per manufacturer’s templates and sill condition.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire rated doors.
C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing." 3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
D. Electrical Raceways: Provide flush wood doors receiving electrified hardware with concealed wiring harness and standardized Molex™ plug connectors on both ends to accommodate up to twelve wires. Coordinate connectors on end of the wiring harness to plug directly into the electrified hardware and the through wire transfer hardware or wiring harness specified in hardware sets in Division 08 "Door Hardware". Wire nut connections are not acceptable.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.8 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.
1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B. Transparent Finish: Provide a clear protective coating over the wood veneer allowing the natural color and grain of the selected wood species to provide the appearance specified. Stain is applied to the wood surface underneath the transparent finish to add color and design flexibility.
1. Finish: Meet or exceed WDMA I.S. 1A TR8 UV Cured Acrylated Polyester finish performance requirements. 2. Staining: a. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. b. Custom stain to match architect’s sample. 3. Sheen: Satin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors and frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire rated doors in corresponding fire rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Factory Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
D. Factory Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.
E. Field modifications to doors shall not be permitted, except those specifically allowed by manufacturer or fire rating requirements.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 7 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 081416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 8 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:
1. Swinging doors. 2. Other doors to the extent indicated.
B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware Schedule”. 2. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 3. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”.
D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.
E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:
1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes.
B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule."
2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.
3. Content: Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product.
4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.
C. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores.
D. Informational Submittals:
1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated.
E. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards.
F. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document:
1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.
G. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware.
1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. 2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures
H. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
B. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.
C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Special Warranty Periods: 1. Five years for standard duty cylindrical (bored) locks and latches. 2. Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.
B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:
C. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.
D. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants.
2.2 HANGING DEVICES
A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in the Door Hardware Sets.
1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated:
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.
2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required:
a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.
3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.
4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on Drawings:
a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors.
5. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. McKinney Products (MK).
2.3 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:
1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Match Facility Restricted Keyway.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following:
1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other manufacturers' cylinders.
E. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed.
1. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. 2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. 3. Existing System: Key locks to Owner's existing system.
F. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:
1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).
G. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders.
H. Key Registration List (Bitting List):
1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software. 2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner.
2.4 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES
A. Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 2 (Standard Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 2 certified.
1. Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Schlage (SC) - AL Series.
2.5 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:
1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for rescue hardware applications.
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.
2.6 DOOR CLOSERS
A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover.
2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors.
3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL.
4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.
5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets.
6. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics.
7. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates, and through-bolt and security type fasteners as required for proper installation.
B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Large Body Cast Iron): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
a. LCN Closers (LC) - 4040XP Series.
2.7 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM
A. Door Protective Trim
1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.
2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.
3. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following:
a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick.
4. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.
5. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
2.8 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.
B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO).
C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Rixson Door Controls (RF).
2.9 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS
A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.
B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.
1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.
C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.
1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated.
E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
F. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Pemko Manufacturing (PE).
2.10 FABRICATION
A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.
2.11 FINISHES
A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.
C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.
1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals.
B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." 3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 11 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware.
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 12 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS
A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality.
B. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations:
1. MK - McKinney 2. SC - Schlage 3. RF - Rixson 4. LC - LCN Closers 5. RO - Rockwood 6. PE - Pemko
Hardware Schedule
Set: 1.0 Doors: 101, 103
3 Hinge TA2714 (NRP) US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock AL10S SAT 626 SC 1 Concealed Overhead Stop 1-X36 630 RF 1 Door Closer 4040XP REG AL LC 1 Mop Plate K1050 6" high 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D PE
Set: 2.0 Doors: 102
3 Hinge TA2714 (NRP) US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock AL80 T SAT 626 SC 1 Perm Core FSIC Primus Level 3 626 SC 1 Wall Stop 403 US26D RO 3 Silencer 608 RO
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 13 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
Set: 3.0 Doors: 104
3 Hinge TA2714 (NRP) US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock AL70 T SAT 626 SC 1 Perm Core FSIC Primus Level 3 626 SC 1 Door Closer 4040XP EDA AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Wall Stop 403 US26D RO
Notes: STC Rated 46 - Seals by Acoustic Door Mfr
Set: 4.0 Doors: 105
3 Hinge TA2714 (NRP) US26D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock AL70 T SAT 626 SC 1 Perm Core FSIC Primus Level 3 626 SC 1 Surface Overhead Stop 9-X36 630 RF 1 Door Closer 4040XP EDA AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO
Notes: STC Rated 46 - Seals by Acoustical Door Mfr
Set: 5.0 Doors: 106 – NOT IN CONTRACT
3 Hinge TA2314 NRP US32D MK 1 Cylindrical Lock AL80 T SAT 626 SC 1 Perm Core FSIC Primus Level 3 626 SC 1 Concealed Overhead Stop 1-X36 630 RF 1 Door Closer 4040XP EDA AL LC 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" 4BE CSK US32D RO 1 Threshold 171A or per sill detail PE 1 Gasketing 2891APK PE 1 Rain Guard 346C (omit @ overhang) PE 1 Door Bottom 420ASL PE
Set: 6.0 Doors: 107
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 14 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1 Door Closer 4040XP EDA AL LC
Notes: Door, Frame and balance of hardware, Existing to Remain
Set: 7.0 Doors: 108
1 Surface Overhead Holder 9-X26 630 RF 1 Sweep 18062CNB PE
Notes: Door, Frame and Balance of Hardware - Existing to Remain
END OF SECTION 087100
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 15
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 092400 - CEMENT PLASTERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior vertical plasterwork (stucco).
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat and for each color and texture specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.6 REFERENCES
A. CBC 2013 Section 2507.3 for lath attachment to horizontal wood supports.
B. CBC 2013 Section 2510 for installation of lathing and and furring for cement plaster.
C. CBC 2013 Section 2512 for exterior plaster.
D. CBC 2013 Table 2511.1.1 Installation of Plaster Construction;
CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. ASTM C 926 Cement Plaster 2. ASTM C1063 Lathing and Furring for Cement Plaster 3. ASTM C754, C1001 Steel Framing
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover, and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements.
B. Exterior Plasterwork:
1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings, and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind. 2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F. 3. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has occurred.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide cement plaster assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance according to ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency.
2.2 METAL LATH
A. Installation of these materials shall be in compliance with ASTM C 926 and C 1063..
B. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847, cold-rolled carbon-steel sheet with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized-zinc coating.
1. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring,.
C. Wire-Fabric Lath:
1. Welded-Wire Lath: ASTM C 933; self-furring,.
D. Backing: Grade D, 60 minute vapor-retardant paper, ASTM E-96-03, D-779-03, and D-828.
CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063, and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
B. Metal Accessories:
1. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 zinc coating. 2. External- (Outside-) Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized-zinc coating. 3. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel.
a. Smallnose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated. b. Smallnose cornerbead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening rib; use on columns and for finishing unit masonry corners.
4. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style; with expanded flanges. 5. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 6. Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with expanded flanges. 7. Two-Piece Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; formed to produce slip-joint and square-edged reveal that is adjustable from 1/4 to 5/8 inch wide; with perforated flanges.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.
B. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932.
C. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: ASTM C 1063.
D. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch diameter unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 PLASTER MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I.
1. Color for Finish Coats: White.
B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type N.
1. Color for Finish Coats: White.
CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
C. Plastic Cement: ASTM C 1328.
D. Colorants for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: Colorfast mineral pigments that produce finish plaster color as indicated on Finish Schedule.
E. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S.
F. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.
1. Color for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: White.
G. Ready-Mixed Finish-Coat Plaster: Mill-mixed portland cement, aggregates, coloring agents, and proprietary ingredients.
1. Color: Per Finish Schedule.
2.6 PLASTER MIXES
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.
1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. of cementitious materials.
B. Use one of the following base-Coat Mixes for over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork as follows:
1. Portland Cement Mixes:
a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1- 1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1- 1/2 parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat.
C. Job-Mixed Finish-Coat Mixes:
1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. 2. Masonry Cement Mix: Use 1 part masonry cement and 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate. 3. Portland and Masonry Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
D. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For ready-mixed finish-coat plasters, comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering.
B. Prepare smooth, solid substrates for plaster according to ASTM C 926.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings.
3.4 INSTALLING METAL LATH
A. Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.
1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install woven-wire lath. 2. Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install flat-diamond-mesh lath. 3. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring, woven-wire lath.
3.5 INSTALLING WATER RESISTIVE BARRIERS
A. Install as required in CBC Section 1404.2 and apply water resistive barrier equivalent to 2 layers of Grade D paper.
3.6 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.
B. Reinforcement for External (Outside) Corners:
1. Install cornerbead at exterior locations.
C. Control Joints: Locate as approved by Architect for visual effect and as follows:
1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes:
CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft.. b. Horizontal and Other Nonvertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft..
2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet o.c. 3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of not greater than 2-1/2:1. 4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster. 5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas (panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension change.
3.7 PLASTER APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926.
1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces when measured by a 10-foot straightedge placed on surface. 2. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. 3. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated.
B. Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry and concrete substrates for direct application of plaster.
C. Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: For scratch and brown coats, for three-coat plasterwork with 3/4-inch total thickness, as follows:
1. Portland cement mixes.
D. Ceilings; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: For scratch and brown coats, for three-coat plasterwork and having 1/2-inch total thickness, as follows:
1. Portland cement mixes.
E. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide a shown on Finish Schedule and Elevation Drawings.
F. Concealed Exterior Plasterwork: Where plaster application is used as a base for adhered finishes, omit finish coat. 1. Where plaster application is used as a base for adhesive application of tile and similar finishes, omit finish coat.
3.8 PLASTER REPAIRS
A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed.
CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work after plastering is complete. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering.
END OF SECTION 092400
CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 7
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory indicated. 2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Install mockups for the following:
a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. b. Each texture finish indicated.
2. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.
B. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.
1. Core: As indicated. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish.
D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8 inch-wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2 inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Ceiling Type: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Abuse-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
C. Multilayer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance- rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.
D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.
3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect and as indicated on the drawings.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 4. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.6 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.
B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns.
C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 092900
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 7
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT TOPSET BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient topset base.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long.
E. Product Schedule: For topset resilient base and accessory products.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products. 2. Flexco. 3. Johnsonite, Inc. 4. Roppe Corporation. 5. For substitutions, see Division-1 section, Product Substitutions.
2.2 VULANCIZED THERMOSET RUBBER BASE (TOPSET)
A. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous).
1. Style B, Cove. 2. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 3. Height: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. Cut lengths 48 inches long are not acceptable. 5. Outside Corners: Preformed. 6. Inside Corners: Job formed.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Colors: As selected by Architect from full range of manufacturer’s colors.
2.3 RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY
A. Description: Rubber carpet edge for glue-down applications, nosing for carpet, nosing for resilient flooring, and reducer strip for resilient flooring.
B. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.
C. Locations: Provide rubber molding accessories in areas indicated.
D. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of manufacturer’s colors.
2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.
C. Stair-Tread Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient stair-tread manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
D. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of flooring, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.
E. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient stair- tread manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
C. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.
D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.
3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.
H. Job-Formed Corners:
1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 16 inches in length.
a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 12 inches in length.
a. Miter corners to minimize open joints.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish.
1. Apply two coat(s).
E. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096513
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 5
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 096543 - LINOLEUM FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes linoleum sheet flooring.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of linoleum flooring. Include flooring layouts, locations of seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
1. Show details of special patterns.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and pattern specified in manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections.
1. Heat-Welding Bead: Include manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches long, of each color required.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of linoleum flooring indicated.
E. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections of each different color and pattern of linoleum flooring required.
1. Heat-Welding Bead: Include manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 9 inches long, of each color required.
F. Heat-Welded Seam Samples: For each linoleum flooring product and welding bead color and pattern combination required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9-inch sample applied to rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this Project.
G. Product Schedule: For linoleum flooring. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
LINOLEUM FLOORING 096543 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of linoleum flooring to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Sheet Flooring: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each type, color, and pattern of sheet flooring installed.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for flooring installation.
1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by flooring manufacturer for installation techniques required.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups for flooring including integral-flash-cove-base and resilient base and accessories.
a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed by Architect.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 685 deg F90 deg F
1. Floor Tile: Store on flat surfaces. 2. Sheet Flooring: Store rolls upright.
LINOLEUM FLOORING 096543 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements/Conditions: In accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, areas to receive flooring should be clean, fully enclosed and weathertight. The permanent HVAC must be fully operational, controlled and set at a minimum of 68° F (20° C) for a minimum of seven days prior to, during, and seven days after the installation. The flooring materials should be conditioned in the same manner for at least 48 hours prior to the installation. Areas to receive flooring shall be adequately lighted to allow for proper inspection of the substrate, installation and seaming of the flooring, and for final inspection.
B. Temperature Requirements: Maintain air temperature in spaces where products will be installed for time period before, during, and after installation as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Temperature Conditions: 68° F (20° C) for a minimum of seven days prior to, during, and seven days after the installation.
C. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 72 hours after flooring installation.
E. Install flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For linoleum flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
B. FloorScore Compliance: Flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore certification.
C. Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
D. Coefficient of Sliding Friction: For flat surfaces, not greater them 0.6 when tested according to ASTM D 2047, Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction.
2.2 LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING
A. Basis of Design: Forbo Marmoleum Real (or equal).
B. Linoleum Sheet Flooring: ASTM F 2034, Type I, linoleum sheet with backing.
1. Roll Size: In manufacturer's standard length but not less than 78 inches wide.
LINOLEUM FLOORING 096543 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
C. Thickness: 0.010 inch.
D. Heat-Welding Bead: For seamless installation, solid-strand product of linoleum flooring manufacturer.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to match linoleum flooring
E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by linoleum flooring manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to suit products and substrate conditions indicated.
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. 2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
C. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by linoleum flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of flooring.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to linoleum flooring manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of flooring.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
LINOLEUM FLOORING 096543 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by linoleum flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by linoleum flooring manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by linoleum flooring manufacturer, but not less stringent than the following:
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install flooring until it is the same temperature as space where it is to be installed.
1. At least 72 hours in advance of installation, move flooring and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.
E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by flooring.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing flooring.
B. Scribe and cut flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.
C. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.
E. Install flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of flooring installed on covers and adjoining flooring. Tightly adhere flooring edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
F. Adhere flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
LINOLEUM FLOORING 096543 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
G. Heat-Welded Seams: For seamless installation, comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless flooring. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces.
3.4 LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION
A. Unroll linoleum sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
B. Lay out linoleum sheet flooring as follows:
1. Maintain uniformity of flooring direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates. 3. Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. 5. Eliminate deformations that result from hanging method used during drying process (stove bar marks).
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting linoleum flooring.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing linoleum flooring installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect linoleum flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from linoleum flooring before applying liquid floor polish.
1. Apply three coats. Apply Floor Polish at time and using method and materials recommended by the manufacturer.
E. After allowing drying room film (yellow film caused by linseed oil oxidation) to disappear, cover linoleum flooring until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096543
LINOLEUM FLOORING 096543 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 096816 – SHEET CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes installation of sheet carpet and carpet cushion.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet.
2. CA building Code 2013; a. 11B-302.1 General. Floor and ground surfaces shall be stable, firm, and slip resistant and shall comply with Section IIB-302. b. 11B-302.2 Carpet. Carpet or carpet tile shall be securely attached and shall have a firm backing. Carpet or carpet tile shall have a level loop, textured loop, level cut pile, level cut/uncut pile texture. Pile height shall be 1/2 inch maximum. Exposed edges of carpet shall be fastened to floor surfaces and shall have trim on the entire length of the exposed edge. c. 11B-303.2 Vertical. Changes in level of 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) high maximum shall be permitted to be vertical and without edge treatment. 3. 11B-303.3 Beveled. Changes in level between 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) high minimum and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) high maximum shall be beveled with a slope not steeper than 1 :2. 3. 11B- 303.3 Beveled. Changes in level between 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) high minimum and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) high maximum shall be beveled with a slope not steeper than 1 :2.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet installation including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures. b. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. c. Review subfloor preparation procedures.
SHEET CARPETING 096816 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate.
B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. 2. Type of subfloor. 3. Type of installation. 4. Pattern of installation. 5. Pattern type, location, and direction. 6. Pile direction. 7. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 8. Transition details to other flooring materials.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Sample Warranty: For installation.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet and carpet cushion.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II or Master II certification level.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
SHEET CARPETING 096816 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Build mockups at locations and in sizes shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with CRI 104.
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.
D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET
A. Contractor Provided; Basis of Design: Mohawk Group, Lee Take Note (or equal). 1. Flammability: Passes DOC-FF-1-70 Pill Test 2. Floor Radiant Panel: NFPA Class 1 (ASTM E-648) 3. Smoke Density: Less than 450 (ASTM E-662)
2.2 CARPET CUSHION
A. Traffic Classification: CCC Class II, heavy traffic.
SHEET CARPETING 096816 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended by carpet manufacturer for releasable installation.
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet installation.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks,
SHEET CARPETING 096816 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104 and with carpet and carpet cushion manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.
C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
D. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
E. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
A. Comply with carpet cushion manufacturer's written recommendations. Install carpet cushion seams at 90-degree angle with carpet seams.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations."
C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.
SHEET CARPETING 096816 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
END OF SECTION 096816
SHEET CARPETING 096816 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 099113 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior and exterior substrates:
1. Concrete. 2. Steel and iron. 3. Wood. 4. Fiberglass. 5. Plastic. 6. Gypsum board. 7. Plaster. 8. Spray-textured ceilings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MPI Gloss Level 1 (Flat): Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
B. MPI Gloss Level 2 (Velvet): Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
C. MPI Gloss Level 3 (Eggshell): 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
D. MPI Gloss Level 4 (Satin): 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E. MPI Gloss Level 5 (Semi-gloss): 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. MPI Gloss Level 6 (Gloss): 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
G. MPI Gloss Level 7 (High Gloss): More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
PAINTING 099113 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.
1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 2. Indicate that VOC content does not exceed maximums contained in the 2013 California Green Building Code, Table 5.504.4.3; See listing in Products Part of this Specification.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 by 10 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
D. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials from the same product run that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Paint: Not less than 1 gallon of each material and color applied.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.
PAINTING 099113 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product listed in the Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated, by one of the following manufacturers.
1. The Sherwin-Williams Company. 2. Frazee Paint. 3. ICI Paints.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction, but not to exceed those stated in The 2013 California Green Building Code Table 5.504.4.3:
1. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 100 g/L.
PAINTING 099113 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2. Dry-Fog Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L. 4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 5. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 6. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 7. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 8. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. 10. Stains: 250 g/L 11. Traffic Marking Coatings: 100 g/L.
D. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
E. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule:
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent.
PAINTING 099113 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 6. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.
E. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry.
F. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.
G. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer, but not less than the following:
1. SSPC-SP 3. 2. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4. 3. SSPC-SP 11.
PAINTING 099113 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
I. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
J. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Paint all door surfaces including top and bottom edges. 5. Paint entire exposed surface of door frames and trim elements. Painting of faces only is unacceptable. 6. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes. Painting of faces only is unacceptable. 7. Lightly sand wood surfaces between coats. Vacuum surfaces clean of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust just prior to applying next coat. 8. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 9. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
PAINTING 099113 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:
1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:
a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear, unless factory painted. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.
2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:
a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Hand rails. f. Hangers and brackets unless factory painted. g. Metal conduit. h. Plastic conduit. i. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. j. Other items as directed by Architect.
3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.
PAINTING 099113 - 7 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1. Latex System (smooth finish):
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based.
1) As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, satin (MPI Gloss Level 4).
1) Sherwin Williams; Super Acrylic Latex A89W1151 Series.
2. Latex over Latex Aggregate System (textured finish:
a. Prime Coat: Textured coating, latex, flat.
1) As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, satin (MPI Gloss Level 4).
1) Sherwin Williams; Super Acrylic Latex A89W1151 Series.
B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:
1. Latex Floor Paint System:
a. Prime Coat: Floor paint, latex, matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Floor paint, latex, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum MPI Gloss Level 3).
1) Sherwin Williams; as recommended in writing.
PAINTING 099113 - 8 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
C. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Doors, Windows and Frames:
1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, high performance architectural, rust inhibitive.
1) As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.
c. Topcoat: Latex, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
1) Sherwin Williams; Solo Interior/Exterior Acrylic A76W53.
D. Wood Substrates: Exposed framing, Wood trim, Architectural woodwork.
1. Epoxy System:
a. Prime Coat: Epoxy, matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Epoxy, gloss.
1) Sherwin Williams; as recommended in writing.
E. Fiberglass Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, solvent based.
1) As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
1) Sherwin Williams; Super Acrylic Latex A89W1151 Series.
F. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, water based.
1) As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
1) Sherwin Williams; Super Acrylic Latex A89W1151 Series.
G. CMU and Portland Cement Plaster Substrates:
1. Latex System:
PAINTING 099113 - 9 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based.
1) As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, satin (MPI Gloss Level 4).
1) Sherwin Williams; Super Acrylic Latex A89W1151 Series.
3.7 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:
1. Latex Floor Enamel System:
a. Prime Coat: Floor paint, latex, matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Floor paint, latex, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum MPI Gloss Level 3).
1) Sherwin Williams; as recommended in writing.
2. Concrete Stain System:
a. First Coat: Stain, interior, for concrete floors, matching topcoat. b. Topcoat: Stain, interior, for concrete floors.
1) Sherwin Williams; as recommended in writing.
3. Water-Based Concrete Floor Sealer System:
a. Topcoat: Clear Sealer, water based, for concrete floors.
1) Sherwin Williams; Siliconate (Thoroclear Special).
B. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Doors, Windows and Frames:
1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, high performance architectural, rust inhibitive.
1) As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.
c. Topcoat: Latex, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
1) Sherwin Williams; Solo Interior/Exterior Acrylic A76W53.
C. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 5.1S (Handrails) (Sherwin Williams products- District Standard):
a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust inhibitive, water based MPI #107.
PAINTING 099113 - 10 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #143.
D. Wood Substrates: Doors, Windows and Paneling.
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, for interior wood.
1) As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
1) Sherwin Williams; as recommended in writing.
2. High-Performance Architectural Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood.
1) As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
1) Sherwin Williams; as recommended in writing.
E. Gypsum Board and Interior Plaster Substrates:
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC.
1) As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, eggshell (MPI Gloss Level 3).
1) Sherwin Williams; Pro Mar Zero VOC B20W2651.
END OF SECTION 099113
PAINTING 099113 - 11
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 101423 - PANEL SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Panel signs. 2. Illuminated panel signs. 3. Room-identification signs. 4. Field-applied, vinyl-character signs. 5. Tactile exit signs. 6. Restroom door signs.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard noted in Regulatory Requirements.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Furnish templates for placement of sign-anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs.
1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille, and layout for each sign at least half size. 4. Show locations of electrical service connections. 5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish.
1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the required finishes, in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows:
1. Panel Signs: Full-size Sample. 2. Room-Identification Signs: Full-size Sample. 3. Field-Applied, Vinyl-Character Signs: Full-size Sample of characters on glass. 4. Variable Component Materials: Full-size Sample of each base material, character (letter, number, and graphic element) in each exposed color and finish not included in Samples above. 5. Exposed Accessories: Full-size Sample of each accessory type.
E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a sign schedule.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.
B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer of products shall have been in business for a minimum of 10 years.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of anchorage devices embedded in permanent construction by other installers by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
a. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image. c. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANEL SIGNS, GENERAL
A. Regional Materials: Panel signs shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Accessibility Standard:
1. Comply with CBC 2013 11B-703; including:
a. Tactile signs – room ID and exit signs Comply with 11B-703.2 Raised Characters, 11B-703.2.5 Character Height shall be between 5/8’’ and 2’’, 11B-703.3 Braille shall be contracted Grade 2, 11B-703.4 Installation height and location. b. Visual signs Comply with 11B-703.5 visual characters c. Restroom door signs Comply with 11B-703.7.2.6 toilet and bathing facilities geometric symbols
2. Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for signs.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.3 PLASTIC SIGNS
A. Room-Identification Signs, Directional Signs, Informational signs, Interior or Exterior: Provide Signs with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:
1. Laminated, Polycarbonate-Faced Sheet: 1/16” thick, polycarbonate face sheet laminated to each side of phenolic backing, or
2. Non-glare Acrylic Sheet: 1/16” thick.
3. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
a. Edge Condition: Square cut. b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Rounded to 1/4” radius.
4. Mounting: Surface mounted to wall with countersunk flathead through fasteners or other concealed mechanical anchors. 5. Text and Typeface: Accessible raised characters and Braille; Sans-Serif typeface as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range; not italic, oblique, script, highly decorative, or other unusual forms, and variable content as scheduled. Finish raised characters to contrast with background color, and finish Braille to match background color. 6. Signs shall be rigid and shall not deform with mounting.
B. Toilet Room Door signs, Interior or Exterior: Provide Signs with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:
1. Laminated, Polycarbonate-Faced Sheet: 1/4” thick, polycarbonate face sheet laminated to each side of phenolic backing, or
2. Non-glare Acrylic Sheet: 1/4” thick.
3. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.
a. Edge Condition: Square cut.
4. Signs shall be rigid and shall not deform with mounting.
C. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF (UV filtering).
D. Polycarbonate Sheet: ASTM C 1349, Appendix X1, Type II (coated, mar-resistant, UV- stabilized polycarbonate), with coating on both sides.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:
1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed. 2. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless-steel or hot-dip galvanized devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General:
a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise indicated. b. Fastener Heads: For nonstructural connections, use flathead or oval countersunk screws and bolts with tamper-resistant Allen-head slots unless otherwise indicated.
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
4. Sign Mounting Fasteners:
a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly, unless otherwise indicated. b. Projecting Studs: Threaded studs with sleeve spacer, welded or brazed to back of sign material or screwed into back of sign assembly, unless otherwise indicated. c. Through Fasteners: Exposed metal fasteners matching sign finish, with type of head indicated, installed in predrilled holes.
5. Inserts: Furnish inserts to be set by other trades into concrete or masonry work.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.
1. Preassemble signs and assemblies in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs and assemblies only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation; apply markings in locations concealed from view after final assembly. 2. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention. 3. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in welding and brazing. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces. 4. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 5. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners. 6. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.
B. Surface-Engraved Graphics: Machine engrave characters and other graphic devices into panel surface indicated to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth. 1. Engraved Opaque Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved graphics with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Engraved Plastic Laminate: Engrave through exposed face ply of plastic-laminate sheet to expose contrasting core ply.
C. Brackets: Fabricate brackets, fittings, and hardware for bracket-mounted signs to suit sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Modify manufacturer's standard brackets as required.
1. Aluminum Brackets: Factory finish brackets with baked-enamel or powder-coat finish to match sign-background color unless otherwise indicated. 2. Stainless-Steel Brackets: Factory finish brackets, satin finish unless otherwise indicated.
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
C. Directional Finishes: Run grain with long dimension of each piece and perpendicular to long dimension of finished trim or border surface unless otherwise indicated.
D. Organic, Anodic, and Chemically Produced Finishes: Apply to formed metal after fabrication but before applying contrasting polished finishes on raised features unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 METALLIC-COATED STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of oil and other contaminants. Use cleaning methods that do not leave residue. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating compatible with the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint, complying with SSPC-Paint 20, to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
B. Factory Prime Finish: After cleaning and pretreating, apply an air-dried primer compatible with the organic coating to be applied over it.
C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: After cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat to a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
2.8 STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, and prepare for coating according to coating manufacturer's written instructions.
1. For Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: After cleaning, apply a conversion coating compatible with the organic coating to be applied over it.
B. Factory Prime Finish: After surface preparation and pretreatment, apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer.
C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: After cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat to a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work.
B. Verify that sign-support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
C. Verify that anchor inserts are correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.
D. Verify that electrical service is correctly sized and located to accommodate signs.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. 4. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
B. Room-Identification Signs and Other Accessible Signage: Install in locations on walls as indicated and according to accessibility standard.
C. Mounting Methods:
1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.
a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface, embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets. b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.
2. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 7 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for displaced adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and push until spacers are pinched between sign and substrate, embedding the stud ends in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets. b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with spacers pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and nuts on stud ends projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.
3. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as template. Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install through fasteners and tighten. 4. Brackets: Remove loose debris from substrate surface and install backbar or bracket supports in position so that signage is correctly located and aligned. 5. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage adhesive. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets. 6. Shim-Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, concealed aluminum shim plates with predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other direct mounting methods are impractical. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate. Retain "Signs Mounted on Glass" Paragraph below if applicable. These can be field-applied, vinyl-characters or other thin signs.
D. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide opaque sheet matching sign material and finish onto opposite side of glass to conceal back of sign.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.
C. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner.
END OF SECTION 101423
PANEL SIGNAGE 101423 - 8 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 102113.19 - PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-plastic toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for blocking. 2. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories mounted on toilet compartments.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments.
B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment details. 2. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. 4. Show locations of floor drains.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of toilet compartment material indicated.
1. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving material and color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated:
1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for toilet compartments, prepared on 6- inch-square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. 2. Each type of hardware and accessory.
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10211319 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
E. Product Schedule: For toilet compartments, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing location and selected colors for toilet compartment material.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents and source.
1. Door Hinges: 6 hinge(s) with associated fasteners. 2. Latch and Keeper: 6 latch(es) and keeper(s) with associated fasteners. 3. Door Pull: 6 door pull(s) with associated fasteners. 4. Fasteners: Ten fasteners of each size and type.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 200 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.
2.2 SOLID-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
A. Basis of Design: Santana Solid Plastic Bathroom Partitions, floor to ceiling (or approved equal)
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10211319 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: floor to ceiling.
C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung floor to ceiling.
D. Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch thick, seamless, with eased edges, no-sightline system, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material.
1. Integral Hinges: Configure doors and pilasters to receive integral hinges. 2. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-plastic components to hinder malicious combustion. 3. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as indicated by manufacturer's designations.
E. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturer's standard design; polymer.
1. Polymer Color and Pattern: Matching pilaster.
F. Urinal-Screen Post: Manufacturer's standard post design of material matching the thickness and construction of pilasters or 1-3/4-inch-square, aluminum tube with satin finish; with shoe and sleeve (cap) matching that on the pilaster.
G. Brackets (Fittings):
1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; extruded aluminum.
2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories.
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's minimum 0.062-inch-thick stainless-steel continuous, cam type that swings to a closed or partially open position, allowing emergency access by lifting door. Mount with through-bolts. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty surface-mounted cast-stainless-steel latch unit designed to resist damage due to slamming, with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper, and with provision for emergency access. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through-bolts. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's heavy-duty combination cast-stainless-steel hook and rubber- tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. Mount with through-bolts. 4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty rubber-tipped cast-stainless-steel bumper at out-swinging doors. Mount with through-bolts. 5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's heavy-duty cast-stainless-steel pull at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through-bolts.
B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10211319 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel compatible with related materials.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221.
C. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 304.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories where required for attachment of toilet accessories.
B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
C. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.
D. Urinal-Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at tops and bottoms of posts. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at posts to conceal anchorage.
E. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-wide, in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch-wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10211319 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.
1. Maximum Clearances:
a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.
2. Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with full- height brackets.
a. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.
C. Floor-Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb, and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position.
D. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors and doors in entrance screens to return doors to fully closed position.
END OF SECTION 102113.19
PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10211319 - 5
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Warm-air dryers. 3. Underlavatory guards.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for backing in walls.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 2. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Include electrical characteristics.
B. Samples: Full size, for each exposed product and for each finish specified.
1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify accessories using designations indicated.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, visible silver spoilage defects.
2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCESSORIES: See schedule and listings below.
A. Contractor-Furnished Materials, Contractor Installed:
1. Sanitary Napkin Dispenser Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc B- 4353, surface mounted.
B. Owner-Furnished Materials, Owner Installed:
1. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser – Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc B-265, surface mounted. 2. Paper Towel (Roll) Dispenser Kimberly-Clark 09736 Professional* Lev-R-Matic* Roll Towel Dispenser surface-mounted. 3. Liquid-Soap Dispenser Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. B-211, surface-mounted. 4. Seat-Cover Dispenser Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. B- 4221surface-mounted.
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.3 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Source Limitations: Obtain public-use washroom accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Grab Bar:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. #B-6806 (Basis of Design). b. American Specialties, Inc. c. Bradley Corporation.
2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.
a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin).
4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches. 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Mirror Unit
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. B-290 (Basis of Design) b. American Specialties, Inc c. Bradley Corporation.
2. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch.
a. Corners: Manufacturer's standard.
3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below.
a. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove.
4. Size: 18” x 24”.
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
D. Coat Hook:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. American Specialties, Inc. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. c. Bradley Corporation.
2. Description: Double-prong unit. 3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
2.4 WARM-AIR DRYERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain warm-air dryers from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Warm-Air Dryer; See Schedule (Contractor Furnished and Installed):
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Excel Dryer Inc. XLERATOR XL Hand Dryer (District Standard) with Recess kit #40502 to set at not more than 4” protrusion from wall.
2. Description: Standard-speed, warm-air hand dryer.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Operation: Touch-button activated with timed power cut-off switch.
a. Operation Time: 10 to 15 seconds.
5. Cover Material and Finish: Steel, with white enamel finish. 6. Electrical Requirements: See electrical plans.
2.5 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
A. Underlavatory Guard:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. b. Rakks Vanity Shield by Rakks/Rangine Corp.www.rakks.com; 800-826 6006. c. Truebro by IPS Corporation.
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevents direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing coverings.
a. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.
3. Rakks Vanity Bracket; Install shielding panel to match counter finish where shown on plans, and allow required knee clearances per CBC Figure 11B-306.3.
2.6 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.
B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.
C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036- inch minimum nominal thickness.
D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.
E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and- theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).
H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 SCHEDULE OF ACCESSORIES
Finish/ Furnish/Install Responsibility Item Manufacturer Model No. Color
Toilet Tissue Bobrick B-265 Owner furnished and installed Dispenser
Seat Cover Bobrick B-4221 Owner furnished and installed Dispenser
Sanitary Napkin Women's RR Only, Contractor Bobrick B-4353 Dispenser furnished and installed
Liquid Soap Plastic, Surface Mount; Owner fur- Bobrick B-211 Dispenser nished and installed
18"x24"; Contractor furnished and Mirrors Bobrick B-290 installed
smooth Bobrick or ap- Snap flange; Contractor furnished Grab Bars B-6806 satin proved equal and installed finish
Recess kit; Contractor furnished Air Hand Dryer Xlerator XL-W and installed
Paper Towel Staff Room only, Surface Mount, Kimberly-Clark 09765 Dispenser Owner furnished and installed
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
END OF SECTION 102800
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 7
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 123216 - MANUFACTURED PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes plastic-laminate-faced cabinets of stock design.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 123661 "Solid Surface Countertops."
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions in the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" apply to the work of this Section.
B. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.
C. Hardwood Plywood: A panel product composed of layers or plies of veneer, or of veneers in combination with lumber core, hardboard core, MDF core, or particleboard core, joined with adhesive, and faced both front and back with hardwood veneers.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples: For cabinet finishes for selection by Architect.
1. Plastic laminates, As selected from manufacturer's full range for each color, pattern, and surface finish. 2. Edgebanding: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: WI Certified Compliance Program certificates.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those requited for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance.
MANUFACTURED PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK 123216 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with a record of successful in-service performance for cabinets similar to those required for this Project.
C. Single Source Manufacturing and Installation Responsibility: Engage a qualified wood working firm to assume undivided responsibility for casework specified in this Section, including fabrication, installation, and finishing if specified.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic-laminate-faced cabinets from single manufacturer.
2.2 CASEWORK, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of casework indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1. Grade: Premium. 2. Provide labels and certificates from WI certification program indicating that casework, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.
B. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes, configurations, and finish materials of manufactured plastic-laminate-faced cabinets by referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' casework of similar sizes and door and drawer configurations, of same finish materials, and complying with the Specifications may be considered. See Section 016000 "Product Requirements."
C. Product Designations: Drawings indicate configurations of manufactured plastic-laminate-faced cabinets by referencing designations of Casework Design Series numbering system in Appendix A of the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."
2.3 CASEWORK
A. Design:
1. Flush overlay.
B. Exposed Materials:
MANUFACTURED PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK 123216 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Plastic Laminate: Grade HGS.
a. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide specified edgebanding on all exposed edges.
C. Semiexposed Materials:
1. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Provide thermoset decorative panels for semiexposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
a. Provide plastic laminate of same grade as exposed surfaces for interior faces of doors and drawer fronts and other locations where opposite side of component is exposed.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate casework, including countertops, with adhesives and composite wood products containing no urea formaldehyde.
B. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, particleboard core except where veneer core is indicated; made without urea formaldehyde.
C. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
D. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2; made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
E. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130; made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
F. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3.
G. Edgebanding for Plastic Laminate: Rigid PVC extrusions, through color with satin finish, 3 mm thick at doors and drawer fronts, 1 mm thick elsewhere.
H. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for Test Methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.
I. Edgebanding for Thermoset Decorative Panels: PVC or polyester edgebanding matching thermoset decorative panels.
2.5 COLORS AND FINISHES
A. Thermoset Decorative Panel Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from thermoset decorative panel manufacturer's full range.
B. Plastic-Laminate Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated by manufacturer's designations in Finish Schedule.
C. PVC Edgebanding Color: As selected from casework manufacturer's full range.
MANUFACTURED PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK 123216 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.6 CASEWORK HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware, General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard nickel-finish, commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware.
1. Use threaded metal or plastic inserts with machine screws for fastening to particleboard except where hardware is through-bolted from back side.
B. Butt Hinges: Chrome-plated, semiconcealed, five-knuckle, complying with BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, with antifriction bearings and rounded hospital tips. Provide two hinges for doors less than 48 inches high, and provide three hinges for doors more than 48 inches high.
C. Pulls: Solid aluminum wire pulls, fastened from back with two screws. For sliding doors, provide recessed chrome-plated flush pulls. Provide two pulls for drawers more than 24 inches wide.
D. Door Catches: Zinc-plated, nylon-roller spring catch. Provide two catches on doors more than 48 inches high.
E. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, Type B05091, Grade 1, steel, side mounted, 3/4 extension standard, except full extension at file drawers, zinc plated, steel ball bearings: Blum Metabox or Accuride, 150 lb. rating.
F. Drawer and Hinged Door Locks: Mortise type, five-pin tumbler, brass with chrome-plated finish, and complying with BHMA A156.11, Grade 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CASEWORK INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Install casework level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims. Where casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical.
C. Base Cabinets: Set cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust subtops within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Align similar adjoining doors and drawers to a tolerance of 1/16 inch. Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform.
D. Wall Cabinets: Hang cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust fronts and bottoms within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in walls and partitions. Align similar adjoining doors to a tolerance of 1/16 inch.
E. Fasten cabinets to adjacent cabinets and to masonry, framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in walls and partitions to comply with the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."
MANUFACTURED PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK 123216 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
F. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.
END OF SECTION 123216
MANUFACTURED PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED CASEWORK 123216 - 5
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 123661 – SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes Solid Surface-Material:
1. Countertops, window sills, and backsplashes.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 224100 "Residential Plumbing Fixtures" for sinks and plumbing fittings.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For countertop materials.
B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge, and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material exposed to view.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. Countertop material, 6 inches square. 2. Wood trim, 8 inches long. 3. One full-size solid-surface-material countertop, with front edge and backsplash, 8 by 10 inches, of construction and in configuration specified.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.
SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOPS 123661 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:
1. Front: 3/4-inch bullnose. 2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner. 3. Endsplash, if indicated: Matching backsplash.
B. Countertops: 1/2-inch-thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material.
C. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch-thick.
D. Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surface-material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly.
2.2 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
B. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.
C. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI SS1.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Avonite Surfaces (Basis of Design). b. Wilsonart International Holdings, Inc. c. Formica Corporation.
2. Type: Provide Standard Type unless Special Purpose Type is indicated. 3. Integral Sink Bowls: Comply with ISSFA-2 and ANSI Z124.3, Type 5 or Type 6, without a precoated finish. 4. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOPS 123661 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install countertops, window sills, and guard wall caps level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Pre-drill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
1. Install backsplashes and endsplashes (if indicated) to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 2. Install window sills and guard wall caps to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 3. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish.
END OF SECTION 123661
SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOPS 123661 - 3
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:
1. Domestic hot-water piping. 2. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Equipment Insulation."
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.
B. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:
1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.
F. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. c. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. f.
2. Type I, 850 Deg F (454 Deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS
A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote.
2.3 ADHESIVES
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-127. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-60/85-70.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Use adhesive that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.
2.4 MASTICS
A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-80/30-90. b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C). 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.
2.5 TAPES
A. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape. b. Compac Corporation; 130. c. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.
2. Width: 2 inches (50 mm). 3. Thickness: 6 mils (0.15 mm). 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch (0.7 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch (3.3 N/mm) in width.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. c. Compac Corporation; 120. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.
2. Width: 2 inches (50 mm). 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils (0.093 mm). 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch (1.1 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch (6.2 N/mm) in width.
2.6 SECUREMENTS
A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, [1/2 inch (13 mm)] wide with [or] [closed seal].
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals. b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping and Seals.
B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel or Monel.
2.7 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS
A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers,P1.1 /P0.1:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. Engineered Brass Company. b. Insul-Tect Products Co.; a subsidiary of MVG Molded Products. c. McGuire Manufacturing. d. Plumberex. e. Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation. f. Zurn Industries, LLC; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.
2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture [hot- and cold- water supplies] and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.
B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures, P0.1/P1.1:
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation. b. Zurn Industries, LLC; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.
2. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
I. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
J. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
K. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.
L. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
3.3 PENETRATIONS
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
C. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
D. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. 1. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 2. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.5 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF POLYOLEFIN INSULATION
A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1. Seal split-tube longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered sections of polyolefin pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 7 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.9 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.10 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: Insulation shall be[ one of] the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: [1 inch (25 mm)]
B. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities: Insulation shall be[ one of] the following:
1. Flexible Elastomeric: [1/2 inch (13 mm)] thick. 2. Polyolefin: [1/2 inch (13 mm)] thick.
END OF SECTION 220719
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 8 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building. 2. Flexible connectors.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand effects of earthquake motions determined according to [ASCE/SEI 7]
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components.[ Include marking "NSF-pw" on piping.]
C. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Hard Copper Tube: [ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B)] [and] [ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type K] water tube, drawn temper.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings. 2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. 3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. 4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and- socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. 5. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
1) Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division. 2) NIBCO INC. 3) Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems. 4) .
b. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end. c. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.
6. Copper Push-on-Joint Fittings:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
1) NVent LLC. 2)
b. Description: Cast-copper fitting complying with ASME B16.18 or wrought- copper fitting complying with ASME B 16.22; with stainless-steel teeth and EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end instead of solder-joint ends.
B. Soft Copper Tube: [ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A)] [and] [ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B)] water tube, annealed temper.
1. Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. 2. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] or [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
1) Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division. 2) NIBCO INC. 3) Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems. 4) .
b. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
c. NPS 3 and NPS 4 (DN 80 and DN 100): Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.
2.3 CPVC PIPING
A. CPVC Tubing System: ASTM D 2846/D 2846M, SDR 11, tube and socket fittings.
2.4 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, [Schedule 40] [and] [Schedule 80].
1. PVC Socket Fittings: [ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40] [and] [ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80].
2.5 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.
D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general- duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Piping and Tubing: ASTM F 493.
1. CPVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 490 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
F. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
G. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty metal valves.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves, drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers.
C. PVC Butterfly Valves:
1. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: [125 psig (860 kPa)] [150 psig (1035 kPa)]
D. PVC Ball Check Valves:
1. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: [125 psig (860 kPa)] [150 psig (1035 kPa)]
E. PVC Gate Valves:
1. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: [125 psig (860 kPa)] [150 psig (1035 kPa)]
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
f. Seals: EPDM rubber. g. Handle: Wheel.
2.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
B. Dielectric Unions:
1. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: [150 psig (1035 kPa)] [250 psig (1725 kPa)] at 180 deg F (82 deg C). b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.
1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum [200 psig (1380 kPa)] [250 psig (1725 kPa)]. 2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper tube. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.
B. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.
1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum [200 psig (1380 kPa)] [250 psig (1725 kPa)]. 2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.
D. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
E. Install domestic water piping level [with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain] and plumb.
F. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.
G. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
H. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
I. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.
J. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
K. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
L. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
M. Install piping free of sags and bends.
N. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
O. Install PEX piping with loop at each change of direction of more than 90 degrees.
P. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.
Q. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
R. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
S. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.
C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.
D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.
E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
F. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.
G. Copper-Tubing, Push-on Joints: Clean end of tube. Measure insertion depth with manufacturer's depth gage. Join copper tube and push-on-joint fittings by inserting tube to measured depth.
H. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. Apply primer. 2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
I. PEX Piping Joints: Join according to ASTM F 1807.
3.3 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION
A. Install flexible connectors in suction and discharge piping connections to each domestic water pump[ and in suction and discharge manifold connections to each domestic water booster pump].
B. Install bronze-hose flexible connectors in copper domestic water tubing.
C. Install stainless-steel-hose flexible connectors in steel domestic water piping.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 7 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.
1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
3. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch (10 mm).
E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Smaller: 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4 (DN 25 and DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).
G. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
H. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PEX piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: 32 inches (815 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.
I. Install hangers for vertical PEX piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
J. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
K. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 8 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
L. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following: 1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes. 3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Piping Inspections:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:
a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 9 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Piping Tests:
1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. 2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm (50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 10 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.9 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Aboveground domestic water piping, [NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100)]
1. Hard copper tube, [ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B)] [ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C)]; [wrought-]copper solder-joint fittings; and [brazed] joints. 2. Hard copper tube, [ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B)] [or] [ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C)]; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure- sealed joints. 3. PVC, [Schedule 40 pipe; PVC, Schedule 40] [Schedule 80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80] socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
3.10 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
END OF SECTION 221116
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 11
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig (860 kPa), unless otherwise indicated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Field quality-control test reports.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NSF Compliance:
1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES
A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. MIFAB, Inc. b. PPP Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
3. Standard: ASSE 1018. 4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum. 5. Body: Bronze. 6. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded, union, or solder joint. 7. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded or solder joint. 8. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome finished.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
C. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.
D. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following: 1. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.
E. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 221119
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings.
B. Related Section:
1. Division 22 Section "Facility Sanitary Sewers" for sanitary sewerage piping and structures outside the building.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to [ASCE/SEI 7]
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Detailed description of piping anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
2.2 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Solid-Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40.
B. Cellular-Core ABS Pipe: ASTM F 628, Schedule 40.
C. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.
D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235.
1. ABS solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 325 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.
B. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40.
C. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.
D. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.
1. adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
E. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS a. Sleeve Materials:
1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTH MOVING
A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
E. Install piping at indicated slopes.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
H. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
I. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
J. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
K. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; [2 percent] downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: [2 percent] downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: [1 percent] down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
L. Install aboveground ABS piping according to ASTM D 2661.
M. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.
N. Install underground [ABS] [and] [PVC] piping according to ASTM D 2321.
O. Plumbing Specialties: 1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 2. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."
P. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
Q. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
R. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
S. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
B. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.
3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1. Install [carbon-steel] pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2. Install [stainless-steel] pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive environments. 3. Install [carbon-steel] pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 4. Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments. 5. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 6. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:
a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m) if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
7. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 8. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting[, valve,] and coupling.
D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum rods.
F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8 (DN 150 and DN 200): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod. 5. Spacing for 10-foot (3-m) lengths may be increased to 10 feet (3 m). Spacing for fittings is limited to 60 inches (1500 mm).
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).
H. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.
I. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).
J. Install hangers for [ABS] [and] [PVC] piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:
1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.
K. Install supports for vertical [ABS] [and] [PVC] piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).
L. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor. 5. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.
3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent- stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 7 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
D. Exposed [ABS] [and] [PVC] Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint.
3.9 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.
B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping [NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller]
C. Aboveground, vent piping [NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller] shall be[ any of] the following: 1. [Solid-wall] ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 2. [Solid-wall] PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: [Unshielded], nonpressure transition couplings.
D. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping [NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller] shall be[ any of] the following: 1. [Solid wall] ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 2. [Solid wall] PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
END OF SECTION 221316
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 8 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties: 1. Cleanouts. 2. Floor drains.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for grease interceptors.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEANOUTS
A. Exposed Cast-Iron Cleanouts:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product indicated on Drawings] or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
4. Standard: [ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron] for cleanout test tee. 5. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 6. Body Material: [Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee] as required to match connected piping.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
7. Closure: [Countersunk or raised-head] plug. 8. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
B. Cast-Iron Floor Cleanouts:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product indicated on Drawings] or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Oatey. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
4. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for [threaded, adjustable housing] cleanout. 5. Size: Same as connected branch. 6. Type: [Threaded, adjustable housing]. 7. Body or Ferrule: [Cast iron]. 8. Clamping Device: [Required]. 9. Outlet Connection: [Spigot] [Threaded]. 10. Closure: [Cast-iron plug]. 11. Adjustable Housing Material: [Cast iron]. 12. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: [Nickel-bronze, copper alloy]. 13. Frame and Cover Shape: [Round]. 14. Top Loading Classification: [Medium] Duty. 15. Riser: ASTM A 74, [Service] class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.
C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product indicated on Drawings] or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
g.
4. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 5. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 6. Body: [Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee] as required to match connected piping. 7. Closure: [cast-iron] plug. 8. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 9. Wall Access: Round, [deep, chrome-plated bronze] cover plate with screw. 10. Wall Access: [Round], [nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel] wall- installation frame and cover.
2.2 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains :
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product indicated on Drawings] or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Commercial Enameling Co. b. Josam Company; Josam Div. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. Prier Products, Inc. e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. g. Watts Drainage Products Inc. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
4. Standard: ASME A112.6.3. 5. Pattern: [Floor] drain. 6. Body Material: [Gray iron]. 7. Seepage Flange: [Not required]. 8. Anchor Flange: [Not required]. 9. Clamping Device: [Not required]. 10. Outlet: [Bottom]. 11. Backwater Valve: [Not required]. 12. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: [Not required]. 13. Sediment Bucket: [Not required]. 14. Top or Strainer Material: [Nickel bronze]. 15. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: [Nickel bronze]. 16. Top Shape: [Round]. 17. Dimensions of Top or Strainer:
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
20. Trap Material: [Bronze] [Cast iron] [Copper] [Not required]
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings
1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) side inlet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.
D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.
E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression. b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mm): Equivalent to 1 percent slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection.
1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.
G. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each grease interceptor.
B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 221319
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 5
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 223400 - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS (TANKLESS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Gas-fired, tank-less, domestic-water heaters.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Commercial domestic-water heaters shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that units comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 7, "Service Water Heating."
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of Gas-Fired, tank-less, residential, domestic-water heater, from manufacturer.
C. Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Source quality-control reports.
E. Field quality-control reports.
F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Fabricate and label fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
C. ASME Compliance:
1. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, domestic- water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. 2. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, finned- tube, domestic-water heaters to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV.
D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with potable water to comply with NSF 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects."
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of wall mount tank-less water heater with actual equipment provided.
FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports. b. Faulty operation of controls. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.
a. Gas-Fired, Tank-less, Domestic-Water Heaters:
1) Heat Exchanger: Five years. 2) Controls and Other Components: Three years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GAS-FIRED, TANKLESS, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
A. Standard: ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 for gas-fired, instantaneous, domestic-water heaters for indoor application.
B. Construction: Copper piping or tubing complying with NSF 61 Annex G barrier materials for potable water, without storage capacity.
1. Tapings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. 2. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 3. Heat Exchanger: Copper tubing. 4. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1or ASHRAE 90.2. 5. Jacket: Metal, with enameled finish, or plastic. 6. Burner: For use with tank-less, domestic-water heaters and natural-gas fuel. 7. Automatic Ignition: Manufacturer's proprietary system for automatic, gas ignition. 8. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.
C. Support: Bracket for wall mounting.
D. Capacity and Characteristics:
1. Flow Rate: 0.6 to 9.4 gpm at (35 deg F) temperature rise. 2. Temperature Setting: 120 degree at factory default, set temperature at 110 degree. 3. Fuel Gas Demand: 199 cfh. 4. Fuel Gas Input: 199,000 Btu/h. 5. Gas Pressure Regulator: 0.82
a. Capacity: 199 cfh. b. Inlet Pressure: Min 5” to 10.5” inches water column.
FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
c. Gas Pressure Required at Burner: 10” psig inches water column.
6. Electrical Characteristics:
a. Volts: 120. b. Phase: Single. c. Hertz: 60. d. Full-Load Watts: 84. e. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: 6 amp. f. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: 3 amp.
7. Minimum Vent Diameter: 4” inches. a. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. b. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valve: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
8. Direct-Vent System: Through-wall or roof, coaxial- or double-channel vent assembly with domestic-water heater manufacturers' outside intake/exhaust screen. a. domestic tank-less heater working-pressure rating. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank. 9. Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped for combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves. Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
2.2 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Domestic-Water Compression Tanks:
BELL AND GOSSET 1BN326 2. Description: Steel, pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory- installed butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank. 3. Construction:
a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 Annex G barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets. c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.
4. Capacity and Characteristics:
a. Working-Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). b. Capacity Acceptable: 2 gal. (7.6 L) minimum. c. Air Precharge Pressure: 38 PSI.
FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Comply with ANSI/CSA LC 3. Include dimensions not less than base of domestic-water heater, and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 (DN 20) with ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads or with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads.
C. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2.
D. Heat-Trap Fittings: ASHRAE 90.2.
E. Manifold Kits: Domestic-water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet piping for field installation, for multiple domestic-water heater installation. Include ball-, butterfly-, or gate-type shutoff valves to isolate each domestic-water heater and calibrated or memory-stop balancing valves to provide balanced flow through each domestic-water heater.
F. Comply with requirements for ball-, butterfly-, or gate-type shutoff valves specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping," Section 220523.13 "Butterfly Valves for Plumbing Piping," and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."
1. Comply with requirements for balancing valves specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
G. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CSA 9.1-M, manually operated. Furnish for installation in piping.
H. Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18/CSA 6.3, appliance type. Include 1/2-psig pressure rating as required to match gas supply.
I. Automatic Gas Valves: ANSI Z21.21/CSA 6.5, appliance, electrically operated, on-off automatic valve.
J. Domestic-Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel bracket for wall mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect assembled domestic-water heaters specified to be ASME-code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
B. Hydrostatically test commercial domestic-water heaters and storage tanks to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating before shipment.
C. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Tank-less, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install tankless, domestic-water heaters at least 18 inches (457 mm) above floor on wall bracket.
1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. 2. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 5. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.
B. Install domestic-water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.
1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping," Section 220523.13 "Butterfly Valves for Plumbing Piping," and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping."
C. Install gas-fired, domestic-water heaters according to NFPA 54.
1. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supply piping to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters without shutoff valves. 2. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters without gas pressure regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner. 3. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters if required for operation of safety control. 4. Comply with requirements for gas shutoff valves, gas pressure regulators, and automatic gas valves specified in Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping."
D. Fill domestic-water heaters with water.
E. Charge domestic-water compression tanks with air.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for domestic-water piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."
B. Comply with requirements for gas piping specified in Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping."
C. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
D. Where installing piping adjacent to fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and re- inspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain gas-fired, tank-less domestic-water heaters.
END OF SECTION 223400
FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400 - 7
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 224100 - RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Faucets. 2. Lavatories. 3. Kitchen sinks. 4. Water closets. 5. Toilet seats. 6. Supply fittings. 7. Waste fittings.
1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted plumbing fixtures.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Lavatories LAV-1: [Rectangular], vitreous china, pedestal wall hung.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] or comparable product by one of the following:
a. American Standard America. b. Barclay Products Limited. c. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. d. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C. e. Eljer, Inc. f. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. g. Kohler Co. h. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC. i. Peerless Pottery Sales, Inc. j. Sterling; a Kohler company. k. St. Thomas Creations. l. TOTO USA, INC.
RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 224100 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3. Fixture:
a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1. b. Rectangular Nominal Size: [20 by 18 inches (508 by 457 mm)]
2.2 Faucet-Hole Punching: [One hole] LAVATORY FAUCETS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Lavatory Faucets: [Single-control mixing] valve.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] or comparable product by one of the following:
a. American Standard America. b. Bradley Corporation. c. BrassTech Inc. d. Central Brass Company. e. Chicago Faucets. f. Danze, Inc. g. Delta Faucet Company. h. Eljer, Inc. i. Elkay Manufacturing Co. j. Franke Consumer Products, Inc. k. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. l. Griffin Products, Inc. m. GROHE America, Inc. n. Hansgrohe, Inc. o. Houzer, Inc. p. Hydrotek International, Inc. q. Intersan Manufacturing Company. r. Just Manufacturing. s. Kohler Co. t. Matco-Norca. u. Moen Incorporated. v. Price Pfister, Inc. w. Rohl LLC. x. Speakman Company. y. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. z. Watermark Designs, Ltd. aa. Wolverine Brass, Inc. bb. Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures. cc.
RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 224100 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
ee. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. ff. Delta Faucet Company. gg. Eljer, Inc. hh. Ferguson Enterprises, Inc.; ProFlo Brand. ii. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. jj. Moen Incorporated. kk. Sterling; a Kohler company. ll. WhiteRock Corp. mm. Wolverine Brass, Inc. nn.
3. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. 4. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor. 5. Body Material: [General-duty, copper or brass underbody with brass cover plate]. 6. Finish: [Polished chrome plate]. 7. Maximum Flow Rate: [2.2 gpm (8.3 L/min.)]
2.3 KITCHEN SINKS
A. Kitchen Sinks KS-1: One bowl, integral with solid surface countertops.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Commercial Enameling Company. b. Eljer, Inc. c. Kohler Co. d. American Standard America. e. Bootz Industries. f. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. g. Eljer, Inc. h. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC. i. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. j. Lyons Industries, Inc. k. Aristech Surfaces; a product group of Aristech Acrylics LLC. l. DuPont; DuPont Surfaces. m. Formica Corporation; a Fletcher Building Limited company. n. Franke Consumer Products, Inc.
RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 224100 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
o. InPro Corporation. p. Rynone Manufacturing Corp. q. Swan Corporation (The). r. Wilsonart International. s.
3. Fixture: a. Standard: ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 for stainless-steel kitchen sinks. b. Overall Dimensions: 25-5/8” x 22-1/16” c. Metal Thickness: 18 Gauge. d. Bowl:
1) Dimensions: 23” x 17” 2) Drain: 3-1/2-inch (89-mm) [grid]
a) Location: [Centered in bowl].
e. Center Bowl:
1) Dimensions:
a) Location: [Centered in bowl].
4. Faucet:
a. Disposer: [Not required]. b. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fitting: [Not required].
2.4 SINK FAUCETS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Sink Faucets [kitchen sink].
RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 224100 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings] or comparable product by one of the following:
a. American Standard America. b. Bradley Corporation. c. BrassTech Inc. d. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. e. Central Brass Company. f. Chicago Faucets. g. Danze, Inc. h. Delta Faucet Company. i. Eljer, Inc. j. Elkay Manufacturing Co. k. Fisher Manufacturing Co. l. Franke Consumer Products, Inc. m. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. n. GROHE America, Inc. o. Hansgrohe, Inc. p. Hydrotek International, Inc. q. Intersan Manufacturing Company. r. Just Manufacturing. s. Kohler Co. t. Moen Incorporated. u. Price Pfister, Inc. v. Rohl LLC. w. Speakman Company. x. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. y. Watermark Designs, Ltd. z. Wolverine Brass, Inc. aa. Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures. bb. American Standard America. cc. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. dd. Delta Faucet Company. ee. Eljer, Inc. ff. Ferguson Enterprises, Inc.; ProFlo Brand. gg. Moen Incorporated. hh. Sterling; a Kohler company. ii. WhiteRock Corp. jj. Wolverine Brass, Inc.
3. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. 4. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor. 5. Kitchen Sink Option: Separate hand spray complying with ASSE 1025. 6. Finish: [Polished chrome plate]. 7. Maximum Flow Rate: [2.5 gpm (9.5 L/min.)] unless otherwise indicated. 8. Mixing Valve: [Single control]. 9. Backflow-Prevention Device for Hand Spray: [Required].
RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 224100 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
10. Centers: [Single hole]. 11. Mounting: [Deck]. 12. Handle(s): [Lever]. 13. Spout Type: [Swivel gooseneck]. 14. Spout Outlet: [Swivel aerator/spray]. 15. Drain: [Grid].
C. Water Closets WC-1/WC-2: Floor mounted, floor outlet, close coupled (flushometer tank), vitreous china.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
a. Capizzi. b. St. Thomas Creations. c.
3. Bowl:
a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5. b. Bowl Type: Pressure-Assisted. c. Height: [Handicapped/elderly]. d. Rim Contour: [Elongated]. e. Water Consumption: [Low]. f. Color: [White].
4. Toilet Seat:
a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. b. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated-copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated wall flange. c. Stop: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression stop with inlet connection matching water-supply piping type and size.
RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 224100 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1) Operation: [Wheel handle]
d. Riser:
1) Size: [NPS 1/2 (DN 15)]. 2) Material: [Chrome-plated, soft-copper flexible tube] [ASME A112.18.6, braided- or corrugated-stainless-steel flexible hose] riser.
2.5 TOILET SEATS
A. Toilet Seats
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [product indicated on Drawings]
a. American Standard America. b. Bemis Manufacturing Company. c. Centoco Manufacturing Corporation. d. Church Seats. e. Eljer, Inc. f. Ferguson Enterprises, Inc.; ProFlo Brand. g. Jones Stephens Corp.; Comfort Seat Brand. h. Kohler Co. i. Olsonite Seat Co. j. Pressalit Inc. k. Sanderson Plumbing Products, Inc.; Beneke Div. l. Sperzel of Lexington. m.
3. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5. 4. Material: Plastic. 5. Type: [Commercial (Standard)]. 6. Shape: [Elongated rim (Open front)]. 7. Configuration: [Open] front [with] cover. 8. Size: [Elongated]. 9. Hinge Type: [Self-sustaining, check]. 10. Hinge Material: [Plastic]. 11. Seat Cover: [Not required]. 12. Color: [White].
2.6 SUPPLY FITTINGS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.
RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 224100 - 7 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
C. [Lavatory] [Kitchen Sink] [and] Supply Fittings:
1. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated-copper tube matching water- supply piping size. Include chrome-plated wall flange. 2. Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression stop with inlet connection matching water-supply piping type and size.
a. Operation: [Wheel handle]
3. Risers:
a. Size: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) for [lavatories]. b. Size: [NPS 3/8 (DN 10)] [NPS 1/2 (DN 15)] for [kitchen sinks]. c. Material: [ASME A112.18.6, braided- or corrugated-stainless-steel flexible hose] riser.
2.7 WASTE FITTINGS
A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.
B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) offset tailpiece for accessible lavatories.
C. Drain: Pop-up type with NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) straight tailpiece as part of faucet for standard lavatories.
D. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) offset tailpiece for accessible kitchen sinks.
E. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) straight tailpiece for standard [kitchen sinks].
F. Trap:
1. Size: [NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32)] [NPS 1-1/2 by NPS 1-1/4 (DN 40 by DN 32)] [NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)] for [lavatories]. 2. Size: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) for [kitchen sinks]. 3. Material: Chrome-plated, [two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032- inch- (0.83-mm-) thick brass tube to wall] [two-piece, cast-brass trap and ground- joint swivel elbow with 0.032-inch- (0.83-mm-) thick brass tube to wall] [one-piece, cast-brass trap with swivel 0.029-inch- (73-mm-) thick tubular brass wall bend]
2.8 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 224100 - 8 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
B. Install floor-mounted water closets on closet flange attachments to drainage piping.
C. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
D. Install pedestal lavatories on pedestals and secured to wood blocking in wall.
E. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture. Comply with valve requirements specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
F. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of compartment.
G. Install toilet seats on water closets.
H. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
I. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.
J. Install traps on fixture outlets.
1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes unless otherwise indicated.
K. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible [lavatories] [and] [sinks]. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Plumbing Piping Insulation."
L. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 224100 - 9 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
M. Seal joints between plumbing fixtures, counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping."
C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."
D. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible [lavatories] [and] [sinks]. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Plumbing Piping Insulation."
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust plumbing fixtures and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.
B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. After completing installation of plumbing fixtures, inspect and repair damaged finishes.
B. Clean plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.
C. Provide protective covering for installed plumbing fixtures and fittings.
D. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.
END OF SECTION 224100
RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 224100 - 10 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 231123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:
1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig (690 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 100 psig (690 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated. 3. Minimum Operating Pressure of Service Meter: 5 psig (34.5 kPa).
B. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa) or less.
C. Natural-Gas System Pressures within Buildings: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is more than 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa), and is reduced to secondary pressure of 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa) or less.
D. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following:
1. Piping specialties. 2. Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with associated components. 3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected models. 4. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. 5. Dielectric fittings.
B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) assembly option in subparagraph below if Contractor installs service meter. 2. Detail mounting, supports, and valve arrangements for service meter assembly and pressure regulator assembly.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For natural-gas piping and equipment indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the items involved.
B. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated with other services and utilities.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Field quality-control reports.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pressure regulators and service meters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight.
D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located.
B. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide purging and startup of natural-gas supply according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of natural-gas service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without Construction Manager's and Owner's written permission.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames."
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends. 4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
a. Material Group: 1.1. b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings, and spiral-wound metal gaskets. e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel underground.
5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE.
a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.
6. Mechanical Couplings:See Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming manufacturers. Retain first subparagraph and list of manufacturers below. See Section 016000 "Product Requirements."
a. b. Stainless-steel or Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish. c. Buna-nitrile seals. d. Stainless-steel or Steel bolts, washers, and nuts. e. Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. f. Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall be factory equipped with anode.
B. Corrugated, Stainless-Steel Tubing: Comply with ANSI/IAS LC 1.
1. 2. Tubing: ASTM A 240/A 240M, corrugated, Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Coating: PE with flame retardant.
a. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1) Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2) Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
4. Fittings: Copper-alloy mechanical fittings with ends made to fit and listed for use with corrugated stainless-steel tubing and capable of metal-to-metal seal without gaskets. Include brazing socket or threaded ends complying with ASME B1.20.1. 5. Striker Plates: Steel, designed to protect tubing from penetrations. 6. Manifolds: Malleable iron or steel with factory-applied protective coating. Threaded connections shall comply with ASME B1.20.1 for pipe inlet and corrugated tubing outlets. 7. Operating-Pressure Rating: 5 psig (34.5 kPa).
C. Aluminum Tubing: Comply with ASTM B 210 and ASTM B 241/B 241M.
1. Aluminum Alloy: Alloy 5456 is prohibited. 2. Protective Coating: Factory-applied coating capable of resisting corrosion on tubing in contact with masonry, plaster, insulation, water, detergents, and sewerage. 3. Flare Fittings: Comply with ASME B16.26 and SAE J513.
a. Copper-alloy fittings. b. Metal-to-metal compression seal without gasket. c. .
2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:
1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. 4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. 5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa). 6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 8. Maximum Length: 72 inches (1830 mm.)
B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.
1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector. 2. Nitrile seals. 3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected. 4. For indoor or outdoor applications. 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable. 6. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES
A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.
B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.
1. CWP Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa). 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch (25 mm) and smaller. 6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) to NPS 2 (DN 50) shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body. 7. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.
C. One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.
1.
D. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.
1.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
E. Two-Piece, Regular-Port Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.
1.
F. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.
1.
9.
2.5 EARTHQUAKE VALVES
A. Earthquake Valves: Comply with ASCE 25.
1. 2. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Maximum Operating Pressure: 5 psig (34.5 kPa). 4. Cast-aluminum body with nickel-plated chrome steel internal parts. 5. Nitrile-rubber valve washer. 6. Sight windows for visual indication of valve position. 7. Threaded end connections complying with ASME B1.20.1. 8. Wall mounting bracket with bubble level indicator.
B. Earthquake Valves: Comply with ASCE 25.
1.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 7 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Maximum Operating Pressure: .5 psig (3.45 kPa) 4. Nitrile-rubber, reset-stem o-ring seal. 5. Valve position, open or closed, indicator. 6. Composition valve seat with clapper held by spring or magnet locking mechanism. 7. Level indicator. 8. End Connections: Threaded for valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
2.6 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. General Requirements:
1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for regulators NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
B. Service Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.
1.
C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.
1.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 8 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.7 SERVICE METERS (EXISTING TO REMAIN)
A. Diaphragm-Type Service Meters: Comply with ANSI B109.1 and ANSI B109.2.
1.
B. Turbine Meters: Comply with ASME MFC-4M.
1.
2.8 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B. Dielectric Unions:
1.
a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F. c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
C. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
1.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 9 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
2.9 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored yellow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.
B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.
C. Comply with NFPA 54 the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.
3.3 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 10 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
G. Locate valves for easy access.
H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.
I. Install piping free of sags and bends.
J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.
M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.
N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.
P. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipe with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit. 2. In Floors: Install natural-gas piping with welded or brazed joints and protective coating in cast-in-place concrete floors. Cover piping to be cast in concrete slabs with minimum of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed piping in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate. 3. In Floor Channels: Install natural-gas piping in floor channels. Channels must have cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation. 4. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 11 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker barriers.
5. Prohibited Locations:
a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts. b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions.
Q. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.
R. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
S. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.
T. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.
U. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.
V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."
W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."
X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."
3.4 SERVICE-METER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
A. Install service-meter assemblies aboveground.
B. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service regulators. Shutoff valves are not required at second regulators if two regulators are installed in series.
C. Install strainer on inlet of service-pressure regulator and meter set.
D. Install service regulators mounted outside with vent outlet horizontal or facing down. Install screen in vent outlet if not integral with service regulator.
E. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service meters. Install dielectric fittings downstream from service meters.
F. Install service meters downstream from pressure regulators.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 12 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
G. Install metal bollards to protect meter assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for pipe bollards.
3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.
B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.
C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.
D. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing.
E. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.
3.6 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
C. Threaded Joints:
1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
D. Welded Joints:
1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators. 2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter.
F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 13 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
G. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten.
H. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."
B. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
C. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches (2438 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 2. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): Maximum span, 108 inches (2743 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): Maximum span, 108 inches (2743 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch (13 mm). 5. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 5/8 inch (15.8 mm).
D. Install hangers for horizontal drawn-temper copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/8 (DN 10): Maximum span, 48 inches (1220 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 2. NPS 1/2 and NPS 5/8 (DN 15 and DN 18): Maximum span, 72 inches (1830 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 3. NPS 3/4 and NPS 7/8 (DN 20 and DN 22): Maximum span, 84 inches (2134 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 4. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 96 inches (2440 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).
E. Install hangers for horizontal, corrugated stainless-steel tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. NPS 3/8 (DN 10): Maximum span, 48 inches (1220 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 14 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2. NPS 1/2 (DN 15): Maximum span, 72 inches (1830 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 3. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Larger: Maximum span, 96 inches (2440 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.
B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.
C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.
D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches (1800 mm) of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.
E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.
3.9 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification.
B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.10 PAINTING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting interior and exterior natural-gas piping.
B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating.
1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (flat). d. Color: Gray.
C. Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 15 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q.
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat). d. Color: Gray.
D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.12 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain earthquake valves.
3.13 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:
1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
B. Underground, below building, piping shall be[ one of] the following:
1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.
C. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
D. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded or wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 16 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.14 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES MORE THAN 0.5 PSIG (3.45 kPa) AND LESS THAN 5 PSIG (34.5 kPa)
A. Aboveground, branch piping IPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be[ one of] the following:
1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
C. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
D. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded or wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
3.15 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following:
1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve.
B. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller shall be one of the following:
1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve.
C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following:
1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve.
END OF SECTION 231123
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 231123 - 17
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealants and gaskets. 5. Hangers and supports. 6. Seismic-restraint devices.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Division 23 Section "Nonmetal Ducts" for fibrous-glass ducts, thermoset fiber-reinforced plastic ducts, thermoplastic ducts, PVC ducts, and concrete ducts. 3. Division 23 Section "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field-fabricated casings for mechanical equipment. 4. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct- mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.
B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports with seismic restraints shall withstand the effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and ASCE/SEI 7. SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical
1. Seismic Hazard Level A: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.48. 2. Seismic Hazard Level B: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.30. 3. Seismic Hazard Level C: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.15.
C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation indicating that duct systems comply with ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment." 2. Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that duct systems comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." 3. Duct-Cleaning Test Report for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation of work performed for compliance with ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.4 - "Ventilation System Start-Up." 4. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 5. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For adhesives and sealants, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, and static-pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, seismic restraints, and vibration isolation.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal:
1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. 5. Design Calculations: Calculations, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation for selecting hangers and supports and seismic restraints.
E. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Perimeter moldings
F. Welding certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to - Steel," for hangers and supports. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports. 3. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."
D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.2 ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Lindab Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. SEMCO Incorporated. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.
B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches (1524 mm) in Diameter: Flanged.
C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1. Fabricate round ducts larger Than 90 inches (2286 mm) in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.
D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 (Z180). 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.
D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article.
E. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.
F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.
G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).
2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS
A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:
1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. 2. Tape Width:3 inches (76 mm). 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum. 10. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 11. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.
D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.
1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:
1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg (0.14 L/s per sq. m at 250 Pa) and shall be rated for 10-inch wg (2500-Pa) static-pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots.
2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.
F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.
H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.
2.6 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Hilti Corp. 4. Kinetics Noise Control. 5. Loos & Co.; Cableware Division. 6. Mason Industries. 7. TOLCO; a brand of NIBCO INC. 8. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd. 9.
B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.
C. Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 7 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. Include matching components and corrosion-resistant coating.
D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603, galvanized-steel cables with end connections made of cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with an automatic-locking and clamping device or double-cable clips.
E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod.
F. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.
B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.
G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.
H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.
J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 8 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.
L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."
3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.
B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.
C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.
3.3 DUCT SEALING
A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":
1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and Lower: Seal Class B. 6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg (500 Pa): Seal Class A. 7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B. 9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and Lower: Seal Class C. 10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg (500 Pa): Seal Class B. 11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 9 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.
3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."
B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches (610 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each branch intersection.
D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet (5 m).
F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.5 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."
1. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet (12 m) o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet (24 m) o.c. 2. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet (3.7 m).
B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads.
C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators.
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 10 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members.
G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling. Notify the Architect if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless-steel anchors for applications exposed to weather.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. .
C. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 11 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.7 START UP
A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
3.8 DUCT SCHEDULE
A. Supply Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units
a. Pressure Class: Positive 1-inch wg (250 Pa). b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
2. Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units
a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg (500 Pa). b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.
3. Ducts Connected to Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg (750 Pa). b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.
4. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:
a. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg . b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.
B. Return Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa). b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:
a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa). b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 12 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6. e.
C. Exhaust Ducts:
1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:
a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg (500 Pa)NA Seal Class: C if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. b. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
D. Elbow Configuration:
1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a. Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.
b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s):
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
c. Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 13 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."
a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3- 1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.
1) Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow. 3) Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow. 4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.
b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches (305 mm) and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches (356 mm) and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.
E. Branch Configuration:
1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."
a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.
2. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.
a. Velocity 1000 fpm (5 m/s) or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm (5 to 7.6 m/s): Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm (7.6 m/s) or Higher: 45-degree lateral.
END OF SECTION 233113
METAL DUCTS 233113 - 14 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 233416 - CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: For each product.
1. Backward-inclined centrifugal fans. 2. Forward-curved centrifugal fans.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals: Product data for each type of product.
B. Informational Submittals: Field quality-control reports.
C. Closeout Submittals: Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. AMCA Compliance: Comply with AMCA performance requirements and bear the AMCA- Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Capacities and Characteristics: ERV-1 ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATORS
1. Total Airflow: 140 cfm. 79 (L/s). 2. External Static Pressure: 0.2” inches wg (Pa). 3. Class: I. 4. Arrangement: Horizontal fan . 5. Housing Material: Reinforced steel 24 gauges G90 galvanized steel. 6. Special Housing Coating: Color-match enamel Powder-baked enamel; RenewAire- 130. 7. Wheel Size (Diameter): 8” inches (mm)>. 8. Wheel Material: Aluminum. 9. Special Wheel Coating: Powder-baked enamel. 10. Brake Horsepower: N/A 11. Drive Type: Direct. 12. Fan Rpm: 0.1 HP. 13. Outlet Velocity: 300 fpm (m/s). 14. Motor: AMPS 1.3 120 WATTS
a. Electrical Characteristics:
CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1) Motor Size: 0.1 HP. 2) Motor Rpm: N/A. 3) Volts: 120. 4) Phase: Single. 5) Hertz: 60. 6) Full-Load Amperes: 1.2. 7) Minimum Circuit Ampacity: 102 Watts.
15. Vibration Isolators: Spring having a static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm). 16. Spark-Resistance Class: C.
2.2 BACKWARD-INCLINED CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. 2. Aerovent; a Twin City Fan company. 3. Central Blower Company. 4. Chicago Blower Corporation. 5. Cincinnati Fan. 6. CML Northern Blower Inc. 7. Howden Buffalo Inc. 8. Loren Cook Company. 9. New York Blower Company (The).
C. Description:
1. Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor, drive assembly, and support structure. 2. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations. 3. Factory-installed and -wired disconnect switch.
D. Housings:
1. Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff. 2. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories. 3. Horizontally split, bolted-flange housing. 4. Spun inlet cone with flange. 5. Outlet flange.
E. Backward-Inclined Wheels:
CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Single-width-single-inlet and double-width-double-inlet construction with curved inlet flange, backplate, backward-inclined blades, and fastened to shaft with set screws. 2. Welded or riveted to flange and backplate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate.
F. Shafts:
1. Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning. 2. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with protective coating of lubricating oil. 3. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range.
G. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings:
1. Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball or roller bearings with adapter mount and two- piece, cast-iron housing.
H. Belt Drives:
1. Factory mounted, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning. 2. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5. 3. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. 4. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. 5. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. 6. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements of diamond- mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation. Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place. 7. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
I. Accessories:
1. Access for Inspection, Cleaning, and Maintenance: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. 2. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as housing. 3. Variable Inlet Vanes: With blades supported at both ends with two permanently lubricated bearings of same material as housing. Variable mechanism terminating in single control lever with control shaft for double-width fans. 4. Discharge Dampers: Assembly with opposed blades constructed of two plates formed around and to shaft, channel frame, and sealed ball bearings; with blades linked outside of airstream to single control lever of same material as housing. 5. Inlet Screens: Grid screen of same material as housing. 6. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate heat from shaft. 7. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99. 8. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans. 9. Weather Cover: Enameled-steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing.
CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.3 FORWARD-CURVED CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or provide from list below if AMCA-certified fans are required; not all manufacturers are AMCA members.
1. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. 2. Central Blower Company. 3. Howden Buffalo Inc. 4. Lau Industries. 5. New York Blower Company (The).
C. Description:
1. Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor, drive assembly, and support structure. 2. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations. 3. Factory-installed and -wired disconnect switch.
D. Housings:
1. Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff. 2. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories. 3. Horizontally split, bolted-flange housing. 4. Spun inlet cone with flange. 5. Outlet flange.
E. Forward-Curved Wheels:
1. Black-enameled or galvanized-steel construction with inlet flange, backplate, shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow. 2. Mechanically secured to flange and backplate; cast-steel hub swaged to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws.
F. Shafts:
1. Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning. 2. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with protective coating of lubricating oil. 3. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range.
G. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings:
CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball or roller bearings with adapter mount and two- piece, cast-iron housing.
H. Belt Drives:
1. Factory mounted, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning. 2. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5. 3. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. 4. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. 5. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. 6. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements of diamond- mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation. Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place. 7. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
I. Accessories:
1. Access for Inspection, Cleaning, and Maintenance: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. 2. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as housing. 3. Variable Inlet Vanes: With blades supported at both ends with two permanently lubricated bearings of same material as housing. Variable mechanism terminating in single control lever with control shaft for double-width fans. 4. Discharge Dampers: Assembly with opposed blades constructed of two plates formed around and to shaft, channel frame, and sealed ball bearings; with blades linked outside of airstream to single control lever of same material as housing. 5. Inlet Screens: Grid screen of same material as housing. 6. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate heat from shaft. 7. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99. 8. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans. 9. Weather Cover: Enameled-steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install centrifugal fans level and plumb.
CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1. Minimum Deflection: 1/2 inch (25 mm).
D. Equipment Mounting: Install centrifugal fans using elastomeric restrained spring isolators. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
1. Minimum Deflection: 1/2 inch (25 mm).
E. Equipment Mounting: Install centrifugal fans on vibration isolation equipment base. Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
F. Equipment Mounting: Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
G. Equipment Mounting: Install continuous-thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers or spring hangers of size required to support weight of dehumidification unit.
1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
H. Curb Support: Install roof curb on roof structure, level and secure, according to "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual," Low-Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Section, Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Install and secure centrifugal fans on curbs, and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction.[ Secure units to curb support with anchor bolts.]
I. Unit Support: Install centrifugal fans level on structural curbs. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall construction. Secure units to structural support with anchor bolts.
J. Isolation Curb Support: Install centrifugal fans on isolation curbs, and install flexible duct connectors and vibration isolation and seismic-control devices.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for flexible duct connectors. 2. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation and seismic-control devices.
K. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
L. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. See Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing For HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. 10. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Controls and equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 233416
CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - 7
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers. 2. Perforated diffusers. 3. Louver faces diffusers. 4. Adjustable bar registers and grilles. 5. Fixed face registers and grilles.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 08 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts. 2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume- control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers M1.1 SUPPLY
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. c. Carnes.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
d. Hart & Cooley Inc. e. Krueger. f. METALAIRE, Inc. g. Nailor Industries Inc. h. Price Industries. i. Titus. j. Tuttle & Bailey.
3. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows. 4. Material: Steel. 5. Finish: Baked enamel, white or Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 6. Face Size: 10” with 6” round connection. 7. Face Style: three cones. 8. Mounting: Surface or T-bar. 9. Pattern: Adjustable. 10. Dampers: Radial opposed blade Combination damper and grid. 11. Accessories:
a. Equalizing grid. b. Plaster ring. c. Safety chain. d. Wire guard. e. Sectorizing baffles. f. Operating rod extension.
B. Perforated Diffuser Exhaust and Returns:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Air Research Diffuser Products, Inc. b. A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. d. Carnes. e. Hart & Cooley Inc. f. Krueger. g. METALAIRE, Inc. h. Nailor Industries Inc. i. Price Industries. j. Titus. k. Tuttle & Bailey. l. Warren Technology.
3. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows. 4. Material: Steel back pan and pattern controllers, with steel face. 5. Finish: Baked enamel, white or Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 6. Face Size: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm). 7. Duct Inlet: Square.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
8. Face Style: Flush. 9. Mounting: Surface for EXAUST AND RETURNS. 10. Pattern Controller: Fixed with curved blades. 11. Dampers: Opposed blade. 12. Accessories:
a. Equalizing grid. b. Plaster ring. c. Safety chain. d. Wire guard. e. Sectorizing baffles. f. Operating rod extension.
C. Louver Face Diffuser Exhaust and returns M1.1:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. c. Carnes. d. METALAIRE, Inc. e. Nailor Industries Inc. f. Price Industries. g. Titus. h. Tuttle & Bailey.
3. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows. 4. Material: Steel. 5. Finish: Baked enamel, white or Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 6. Face Size: 12 inches (mm). 7. Mounting: Surface. 8. Pattern: One-way core style.
a. Square to round neck adaptor. b. Adjustable pattern vanes. c. Throw reducing vanes. d. Equalizing grid. e. Plaster ring. f. Safety chain. g. Wire guard. h. Sectorizing baffles. i. Operating rod extension. j. METALAIRE, Inc. k. Nailor Industries Inc. l. Price Industries. m. Titus. n. Tuttle & Bailey.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 233713
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 238126 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat-pump units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EA 4: For refrigerants, documentation including printed statement that refrigerants are free of HCFCs. 2. Product Data for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation indicating that units comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment."
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems." 2. Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - " Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."
C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period:
a. For Compressor: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. b. For Parts: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. c. For Labor: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Carrier Corporation; Home Comfort and HVAC Building & Industrial Systems. 2. Coleman Company Inc. (The). 3. First Operations LP. 4. Friedrich Air Conditioning Company. 5. Koldwave, Inc.; a Mestek company. 6. Lennox International Inc. 7. Mitsubishi Electric & Electronics USA, Inc.; HVAC Advanced Products Division. 8. Mitsubishi Electric Sales Canada Inc. 9. Mitsubishi Heavy Industries America, Inc. 10. SANYO North America Corporation; SANYO Fisher Company. 11. Trane; a business of American Standard companies. 12. YORK; a Johnson Controls company. 13. LG.
2.2 INDOOR UNITS 5 TONS (18 kW) OR LESS
A. Concealed Evaporator-Fan Components:
1. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and insulation on back of panel. 2. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner. 3. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal- expansion valve. Comply with ARI 210/240. 4. Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to motor.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
5. Fan Motors:
a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." b. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. c. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
6. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004. 7. Filters: Permanent, cleanable. 8. Condensate Drain Pans:
a. Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection.
1) Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004. 2) Depth: A minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) deep.
b. Single-wall, Plastic Manufactured Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan.
1) Minimum Connection Size: NPS ¾” (DN 25). Use with condensate pump.
B. Wall-Mounted, Evaporator-Fan Components:
1. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by Architect, and discharge drain pans with drain connection. 2. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal- expansion valve. Comply with ARI 210/240. 3. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements; with refractory ceramic support bushings, automatic-reset thermal cutout, built-in magnetic contactors, manual-reset thermal cutout, airflow proving device, and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection. 4. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal. 5. Fan Motors:
a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." b. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. c. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. d. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1. e. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections. f. Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on exterior heat pump.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
6. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004. 7. Condensate Drain Pans:
a. Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection.
1) Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004. 2) Depth: A minimum of 1-1/2 inch (25 mm) deep.
b. Single-wall, manufacturer supplied plastic pan. c. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. Terminate with threaded nipple on [one end] [both ends] of pan.
1) Minimum Connection Size: NPS ¾” (DN 25).
d. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound.
8. Air Filtration Section:
a. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section:
1) Comply with NFPA 90A. 2) Minimum Arrestance: According to ASHRAE 52.1 and MERV according to ASHRAE 52.2. 3) Filter-Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted out from access plenum.
b. Disposable Panel Filters:
1) Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type. 2) Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 3) Dust-Holding Capacity: .25 lb (kg). 4) Initial Resistance: 1.2 inches wg (Pa). 5) Recommended Final Resistance: 0.1inches wg (Pa). 6) Arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1: 80. 7) Merv according to ASHRAE 52.2: 5. 8) Media: spun polyester in plastic clip housing and hinged; with pull and retaining handles.
2.3 OUTDOOR UNITS (5 TONS (18 kW) OR LESS)
A. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:
1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
a. Compressor Type: Scroll. b. Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and automatic-reset low-pressure switch. c. Refrigerant Charge: R-410A. d. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and liquid sub-cooler. Comply with ARI 210/240.
3. Heat-Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature-air cutoff thermostat. 4. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor. 5. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection. 6. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F (7 deg C). 7. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls."
B. Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.
C. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator fan, with the following features:
1. Compressor time delay. 2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start. 3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting, operating mode, and fan speed. 4. Fan-speed selection including auto setting.
D. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
E. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
F. Drain Hose: For condensate.
G. Additional Monitoring:
1. Monitor constant and variable motor loads. 2. Monitor variable-frequency-drive operation. 3. Monitor economizer cycle. 4. Monitor cooling load. 5. Monitor air distribution static pressure and ventilation air volumes.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.5 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS
A. Cooling Capacity:
1. Total: 9,000 Btu/h (kW). 2. Sensible: 8,600 Btu/h (kW). 3. SEER: 16.0. 4. EER: 12.5. 5. Entering-Air Temperature:
a. Dry Bulb: 95 deg F (deg C). b. Wet Bulb: 75 deg F (deg C).
6. Leaving-Air Temperature:
a. Dry Bulb: 14-118deg F (deg C). b. Wet Bulb: 53-75 deg F (deg C)>.
B. Heating Capacity:
1. Type: Electric. HOT GAS BYPASS 2. Total Capacity: 10,800 Btu/h (kW). 3. Air-Temperature Rise: 47-43 DB/WB deg F (deg C)>. 4. Coefficient of Performance: 90%. 5. Heating Season Performance Factor: 7.7. 6. Hertz: 60. 7. Steps: One.
C. Indoor Unit:
1. Fan Motor Electrical Characteristics: Powered by outdoor unit.
a. Volts: 120. b. Phase: Single. c. Hertz: 60.
2. Airflow: Max 335 cfm (L/s).
D. Outdoor Unit:
1. Type: Air cooled. 2. Electrical Characteristics:
a. Volts: 208/230 at condenser b. Phase: Single. c. Hertz: 60. d. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: 10. e. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: 15. f. Fan Motor Full-Load Amperes: 8.1. g. Compressor Full-Load Amperes: 7.6.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3. Sound-Pressure Level: 45 dBa.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.
B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure.
C. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick, reinforced concrete base that is 4 inches (100 mm) larger, on each side, than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.
D. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting base.
E. Install roof-mounted, compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium- plated fasteners.
F. Install seismic restraints.
G. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum static deflection of 1 inch (25 mm). See Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
H. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of unit.
C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" Drawings indicates the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 7 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.
END OF SECTION 238126
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - 8 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cabling used for voice and data circuits.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. VFC: Variable frequency controller.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. General Cable; General Cable Corporation. 2. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 3. Southwire Company.
B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.
C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THW-2 Type THHN/THWN-2 Type XHHW-2 Type UF Type USE and Type SO.
D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for metal-clad cable, Type MC or nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type NM with ground wire as identified.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. 3M. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. ILSCO.
B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.
2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 2
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS
A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.
B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.
D. Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
E. Exposed Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.
F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway, Metal-clad cable, Type MC, or Nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type NM.
G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.
C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.
E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.
F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 3
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.
3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.
3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test feeder conductorsfor compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. Correct deficiencies determined during the scan.
a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
B. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 4
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.
C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION 260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 5
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel slotted support systems.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. ERICO International Corporation. c. Unistrut; an Atkore International company.
2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA- 3. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA- 4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1) Hilti, Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 2
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Hilti, Inc. 3) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel.
D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1- 1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 3
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.4 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 4
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete.
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).
B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Painting" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 5
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 5. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and handholes serving communications systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.
B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
C. Samples: For wireways nonmetallic wireways and surface raceways and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches (300 mm) long.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports.
B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. 4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
D. Source quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a brand of Atkore International. 2. Republic Conduit. 3. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.
B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.
E. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
F. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.
G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
H. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70. 2. Fittings for EMT:
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 2
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Setscrew or compression.
3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
I. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. RACO; Hubbell. 3. Thomas & Betts Corporation, A Member of the ABB Group.
B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.
D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.
E. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.
F. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.
G. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.
H. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485.
I. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.
J. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
K. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.
L. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 3
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
M. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.3 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Allied Moulded Products, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection. 3. Lamson & Sessions.
B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections shall be flanged and have stainless- steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.
D. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners.
E. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
G. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 4
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
a. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. b. Panduit Corp. c. Wiremold / Legrand.
C. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing characteristics.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Hubbell Incorporated. b. Panduit Corp. c. Wiremold / Legrand.
2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection. 2. Hubbell Incorporated. 3. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions.
B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.
F. Metal Floor Boxes:
1. Material: Cast metal. 2. Type: Semi-adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
G. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, rectangular.
1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 5
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
H. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb (23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg) shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.
I. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
J. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
K. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.
L. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm deep).
M. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
N. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, concrete encased. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed and Subject to Physical Damage: GRC.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 6
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 nonmetallic in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20.
E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.
F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.
H. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F (49 deg C).
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.
B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot- water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.
E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction.
G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
H. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached. 1. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, before rising above floor.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 7
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure.
J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
K. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.
L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm) trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.
N. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.
Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.
R. Surface Raceways:
1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.
S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 8
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.
V. Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m). Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F (55 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet (30 m). 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change.
3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits. 4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
W. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
X. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 9
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
Y. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.
Z. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.
AA. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
BB. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
CC. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.
DD. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
EE. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct-Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. 2. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction. 3. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow. 4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) on each side of the coupling. b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
5. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above direct- buried conduits but a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit. 6. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 10
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.
3.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 11
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels. 8. Miscellaneous identification products.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.
C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.
B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
C. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
D. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
F. Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers diagonally over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stop stripes at legends.
G. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.
H. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 2
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.
2.2 METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size.
B. Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:
1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
C. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.
E. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224.
2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size.
B. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
C. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical- resistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.
D. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224.
E. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.
F. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 3
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.
G. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
H. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.
B. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical- resistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the conductor diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.
C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
E. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around conductor it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224.
F. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
G. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 2. Labels for Tags: Self-adhesive label, machine-printed with permanent, waterproof, black ink recommended by printer manufacturer, sized for attachment to tag.
2.5 FLOOR MARKING TAPE
A. 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and black stripes and clear vinyl overlay.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 4
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.6 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
A. Tape:
1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. 2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.
B. Color and Printing:
1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE,. 3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.
C. Tag: Type I:
1. Pigmented polyolefin, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service. 2. Thickness: 4 mils (0.1 mm). 3. Weight: 18.5 lb/1000 sq. ft. (9.0 kg/100 sq. m). 4. 3-Inch (75-mm) Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 30 lbf (133.4 N), and 2500 psi (17.2 MPa).
D. Tag: Type II:
1. Multilayer laminate consisting of high-density polyethylene scrim coated with pigmented polyolefin, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service. 2. Thickness: 12 mils (0.3 mm). 3. Weight: 36.1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (17.6 kg/100 sq. m). 4. 3-Inch (75-mm) Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 400 lbf (1780 N), and 11,500 psi (79.2 MPa).
E. Tag: Type ID:
1. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service. 2. Overall Thickness: 5 mils (0.125 mm). 3. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil (0.00889 mm). 4. Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft. (13.7 kg/100 sq. m). 5. 3-Inch (75-mm) Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf (311.3 N), and 4600 psi (31.7 MPa).
F. Tag: Type IID:
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 5
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Reinforced, detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented woven scrim, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service. 2. Overall Thickness: 8 mils (0.2 mm). 3. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil (0.00889 mm). 4. Weight: 34 lb/1000 sq. ft. (16.6 kg/100 sq. m). 5. 3-Inch (75-mm) Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 300 lbf (1334 N), and 12,500 psi (86.1 MPa).
2.7 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.
C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:
1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).
D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:
1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396- inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm).
E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)." 3. Arc-flash, per NFPA 70E.
2.8 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 6
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.
B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
2.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
E. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch (25 mm).
2.10 CABLE TIES
A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7 MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.
B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7 MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black.
C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 7
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F ((23 deg C)), According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi (48.2 MPa). 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140 deg C). 5. Color: Black.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.
F. Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate.
G. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.
H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
I. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:
1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 8
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
J. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete duct bank exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.
K. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. Power. 2. Communications.
B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.
1. Color-Coding for PhaseIdentification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors.
a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue.
c. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
C. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.
D. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.
E. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 9
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
F. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 1. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.
G. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.
H. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self- adhesive warning labels.
1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.
I. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
J. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label or Stenciled legend 4 inches (100 mm) high. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 10
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. e. Enclosed switches. f. Enclosed circuit breakers. g. Enclosed controllers. h. Push-button stations. i. Contactors. j. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. k. Monitoring and control equipment. l.
END OF SECTION 260553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 11
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Load centers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ATS: Acceptance testing specification.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. GFEP: Ground-fault equipment protection.
D. HID: High-intensity discharge.
E. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.
F. SPD: Surge protective device.
G. VPR: Voltage protection rating.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard.
1. Include materials, switching and overcurrent protective devices, SPDs, accessories, and components indicated. 2. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Show tabulations of installed devices with nameplates, conductor termination sizes, equipment features, and ratings.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental protection, knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets, hinges, and locks. 4. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 5. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 6. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 7. Include evidence of NRTL listing for SPD as installed in panelboard. 8. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 9. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 10. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations. 11. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Include an Internet link for electronic access to downloadable PDF of the coordination curves.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals, include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and GFEP Types: Two spares for each panelboard.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 2
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407 .
1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations:
1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F (minus 5 deg C) to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C). b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:
1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Panelboard Warranty Period: 18 months from date of Substantial Completion.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 3
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
E. Enclosures: Flush and Surface-mounted, dead-front cabinets, as identified.
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1 .
2. Height: 84 inches (2.13 m) maximum. 3. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware. 4. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware. 5. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. 6. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. 7. Finishes:
a. Panels and Trim: Steel , factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel .
F. Incoming Mains: 1. Main Breaker: Main lug interiors up to 400 amperes shall be field convertible to main breaker.
G. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. a. Bus shall be fully rated the entire length.
2. Interiors shall be factory assembled into a unit. Replacing switching and protective devices shall not disturb adjacent units or require removing the main bus connectors.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 4
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. 4. Full-Sized Neutral: Equipped with full-capacity bonding strap for service entrance applications. Mount electrically isolated from enclosure. Do not mount neutral bus in gutter.
H. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Terminations shall allow use of 75 deg C rated conductors without derating. 3. Size: Lugs suitable for indicated conductor sizes, with additional gutter space, if required, for larger conductors. 4. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type, with a lug on the neutral bar for each pole in the panelboard. 5. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type, with a lug on the bar for each pole in the panelboard. 6. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.
I. Future Devices: Panelboards or load centers shall have mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
1. Percentage of Future Space Capacity: Ten percent.
J. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include label or manual with size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices listed and labeled by an NRTL for series-connected short-circuit rating.
1. Panelboards rated 240 V or less shall have short-circuit ratings not less than 10,000 A rms symmetrical, and rated not less than existing service entrance equipment/panels.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Sector; Eaton Corporation. 2. Siemens Energy. 3. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 5
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.3 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Eaton Electrical Sector; Eaton Corporation. 2. General Electric Company; GE Energy Management - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy. 4. Square D; by Schneider Electric.
B. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with series-connected rating to meet available fault currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:
a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads. b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
2.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases, and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door.
B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC rating.
C. Circuit Directory: Directory card inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover.
1. Circuit directory shall identify specific purpose with detail sufficient to distinguish it from all other circuits.
D. Circuit Directory: Computer-generated circuit directory mounted inside panelboard door with transparent plastic protective cover.
1. Circuit directory shall identify specific purpose with detail sufficient to distinguish it from all other circuits.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify actual conditions with field measurements prior to ordering panelboards to verify that equipment fits in allocated space in, and comply with, minimum required clearances specified in NFPA 70.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 6
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.
C. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged, rusted, or have been subjected to water saturation.
D. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Comply with NECA 1.
C. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
D. Equipment Mounting: 1. Attach panelboard to the vertical structural surface behind the panelboard.
E. Mount panelboard center at 60 inches and top of trim maximum 90 inches (2286 mm)above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
F. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.
G. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
H. Mounting panelboards with space behind is recommended for damp, wet, or dirty locations. The steel slotted supports in the following paragraph provide an even mounting surface and the recommended space behind to prevent moisture or dirt collection.
I. Mount surface-mounted panelboards to steel slotted supports 1 1/4 inch (32 mm) in depth. Orient steel slotted supports vertically.
J. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1. Tighten bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written instructions.
K. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived systems to ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes, separate grounds for isolated ground bars, and connections to separate ground bars.
L. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 7
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
M. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten directories are not acceptable. Install directory inside panelboard door.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in power panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
E. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
C. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. Prior to making circuit changes to achieve load balancing, inform Architect of effect on phase color coding.
1. Measure loads during period of normal facility operations.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 8
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2. Perform circuit changes to achieve load balancing outside normal facility operation schedule or at times directed by the Architect. Avoid disrupting services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. 3. After changing circuits to achieve load balancing, recheck loads during normal facility operations. Record load readings before and after changing circuits to achieve load balancing. 4. Tolerance: Maximum difference between phase loads, within a panelboard, shall not exceed 20 percent.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Prior to energizing panelboards, apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 262416
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 9
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Weather-resistant receptacles. 3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 4. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors. 5. Communications outlets. 6. Floor service outlets
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.
C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing- label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions:
1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.
2.2 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General Description:
1. Straight blade, non-feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.
B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.4 TOGGLE SWITCHES
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.
B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:
1. Single Pole: 2. Two Pole: 3. Three Way:
C. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.
2.5 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.
B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather- resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.
2.6 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.
B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.
C. Service Plate: Rectangular, solid brass with satin finish.
D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Voice and Data Communication Outlets: two blank covers with bushed cable opening complying with requirements in Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."
2.7 FINISHES
A. Device Color:
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
B. Wall Plate Color: As selected by Architect.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.
D. Device Installation:
1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E. Receptacle Orientation:
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G. Arrangement of Devices: Mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.
H. Adjust locations of service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.
3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.
B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 3 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.
C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 262726
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 5
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior solid-state luminaires that use LED technology. 2. Lighting fixture supports.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.
B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.
C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."
D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.
E. LED: Light-emitting diode.
F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation. 2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires. 4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers.
LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data. 6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing and Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.
a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.
B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.2: For paints and coatings, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4.2: For paints and coatings, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
D. Samples: For each luminaire and for each color and texture with standard factory-applied finish.
E. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of luminaire with custom factory-applied finishes.
1. Include Samples of luminaires and accessories involving color and finish selection.
F. Samples for Verification: For each type of luminaire.
1. Include Samples of luminaires and accessories to verify finish selection.
G. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Lighting luminaires.
LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extend to within 12 inches (300 mm) of the plane of the luminaires. 4. Structural members to which luminaires will be attached. 5. Initial access modules for acoustical tile, including size and locations. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
a. Other luminaires. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Access panels. e. Ceiling-mounted projectors.
7. Moldings.
B. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires.
C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
D. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
E. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire.
F. Product Test Reports: For each luminaire, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
G. Sample warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 10 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products, and complying with the applicable IES testing standards.
C. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.
D. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color consistency among luminaires.
E. Mockups: For interior lighting luminaires in room or module mockups, complete with power and control connections.
1. Obtain Architect's approval of luminaires in mockups before starting installations. 2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7Seismic Performance: Luminaires and lamps shall be labeled vibration and shock resistant.
LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL.
C. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.
D. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4.
E. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C79.1.
F. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61 or IEC 60061-1.
G. CRI of minimum 70. CCT of 3000 K.
H. Rated lamp life of 35,000minimum hours.
I. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.
J. Internal driver.
K. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 V ac.
1. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
L. Housings:
1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink. 2. Painted finish.
2.3 RECESSED LINEAR
A. Minimum 1,500 lumens. Minimum allowable efficacy of 85 lumens per watt.
B. Integral junction box with conduit fittings.
2.4 SURFACE MOUNT, LINEAR
A. Minimum 750 lumens. Minimum allowable efficacy of 80 lumens per watt.
B. Integral junction box with conduit fittings.
LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.5 MATERIALS
A. Metal Parts:
1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
C. Diffusers and Globes:
1. prismatic acrylic 2. Acrylic Diffusers: One hundred percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 3. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
D. Housings:
1. Extruded-aluminum housing and heat sink. 2. Painted finish.
E. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate labels where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.
1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics: a. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating. b. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.
2.6 METAL FINISHES
A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.7 LUMINAIRE FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm) .
C. Rod Hangers: 1/4-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
D. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before fixture installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install new lamps.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install lamps in each luminaire.
D. Supports:
1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping. 3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.
E. Flush-Mounted Luminaire Support:
1. Secured to outlet box. 2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around circumference of luminaire. 3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.
F. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:
1. Attached to structural members in walls >. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.
LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 7 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
G. Ceiling-Mounted Luminaire Support:
1. Ceiling mount with four 5/32-inch- (4-mm-) diameter aircraft cable supports. 2. Ceiling mount with hook mount.
H. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires:
1. Secure to any required outlet box. 2. Secure luminaire to the luminaire opening using approved fasteners in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire. 3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.
I. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation. 2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.
B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied conditions. Make up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required during hours of darkness.
1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps or luminaires that are defective. 2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3. Adjust the aim of luminaires in the presence of the Architect.
END OF SECTION 265119
LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 8 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 265219 - EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Emergency lighting units. 2. Exit signs. 3. Luminaire supports.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.
B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.
C. Emergency Lighting Unit: A lighting unit with internal or external emergency battery powered supply and the means for controlling and charging the battery and unit operation.
D. Fixture: See "Luminaire" Paragraph.
E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and emergency lighting support.
1. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 2. Include physical description of the unit and dimensions. 3. Battery and charger for light units. 4. Include life, output of luminaire (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data. 5. Include photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IES LM-45, for each luminaire type.
a. Testing Agency Certified Data: Photometric data for luminaires and signs shall be certified by manufacturer.
EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265219 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
b. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples: For each product and for each color and texture specified.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of luminaire with factory-applied finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of luminaire.
1. Include Samples of luminaires and accessories to verify finish selection.
F. Product Schedule:
1. For emergency lighting units. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 2. For exit signs. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Luminaires. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extend to within 12 inches (300 mm) of the plane of the luminaires. 4. Structural members to which equipment will be attached. 5. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a. Other luminaires. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Ceiling-mounted projectors. e. Access panels.
7. Moldings.
B. Qualification Data: For testing laboratory providing photometric data for luminaires.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire.
EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265219 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
E. Product Test Reports: For each luminaire for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.
F. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps: 1 for every 10 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Luminaire-mounted, emergency battery pack: One for every 10 emergency lighting units. Furnish at least one of each type. 3. Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 10 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's laboratory that is accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products, and complying with the applicable IES testing standards.
C. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.
EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265219 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
D. Mockups: For interior luminaires in room or module mockups, complete with power and control connections.
1. Obtain Architect's approval of luminaires and signs in mockups before starting installations. 2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Emergency Power Unit Batteries: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year and prorated warranty for the remaining four years. 2. Warranty Period for Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265219 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. NRTL Compliance: Fabricate and label emergency lighting units, exit signs, and batteries to comply with UL 924.
C. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.
D. Comply with NEMA LE 4 for recessed luminaires.
E. Internal Type Emergency Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within luminaire body.
1. Emergency Connection: Operate one lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100 lumens each upon loss of normal power. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to luminaire ballast. 2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 3. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
a. Ambient Temperature: Less than 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) or exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C), with an average value exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C) over a 24-hour period. b. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F (minus 20 deg C) and not exceeding 140 deg F (60 deg C). c. Humidity: More than 95 percent (condensing). d. Altitude: Exceeding 3300 feet (1000 m).
4. Nightlight Connection: Operate lamp continuously at 40 percent of rated light output. 5. Test Push-Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening luminaire or entering ceiling space.
a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
6. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lithium-ion, or nickel-cadmium type. 7. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer relay. 8. Remote Test: Switch in handheld remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.
EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265219 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
9. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code- required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.
2.3 EMERGENCY LIGHTING
A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units.
B. Emergency Luminaires:
1. Emergency Luminaires: As indicated on Drawings, with the following additional features:
a. Operating at nominal voltage of 120 V ac. b. [Internal emergency power unit. c. Rated for installation in damp locations, and for sealed and gasketed luminaires in wet locations. d. UL 94 flame rating.
2.4 EXIT SIGNS
A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Operating at nominal voltage of 120 V ac. 2. Lamps for AC Operation: Fluorescent, two for each luminaire; 20,000 hours of rated lamp life. 3. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs; 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 4. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Internal emergency power unit.
2.5 MATERIALS
A. Metal Parts:
1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
B. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access:
1. Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions. 2. Designed to permit relamping without use of tools. 3. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
C. Diffusers and Globes:
EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265219 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Clear, UV-stabilized acrylic. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. 3. Acrylic: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic, with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. 4. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
D. Housings:
1. Extruded aluminum housing. 2. Painted finish.
E. Conduit: Electrical metallic tubing, minimum 3/4 inch (21 mm) in diameter.
2.6 METAL FINISHES
A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.7 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Support Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting performance of luminaires.
B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before luminaire installation.
C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings for suitable conditions where emergency lighting luminaires will be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265219 - 7 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
C. Install lamps in each luminaire.
D. Supports:
1. Sized and rated for luminaire and emergency power unit weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position when testing emergency power unit. 3. Provide support for luminaire and emergency power unit without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100 percent of luminaire and emergency power unit weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.
E. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support:
1. Attached to structural members in walls. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.
F. Suspended Luminaire Support: 1. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.
G. Ceiling Grid Mounted Luminaires:
1. Secure to any required outlet box. 2. Secure emergency power unit using approved fasteners in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of emergency power unit. 3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.
B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Perform startup service:
EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265219 - 8 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Charge batteries minimum of one hour and depress switch to conduct short-duration test. 2. Charge batteries minimum of 24 hours and conduct one-hour discharge test.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjustments: Within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site visit to do the following:
1. Inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps, batteries, signs, or luminaires that are defective.
a. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.
2. Conduct short-duration tests on all emergency lighting.
END OF SECTION 265219
EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265219 - 9
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 270526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Grounding conductors. 2. Grounding connectors. 3. Grounding busbars. 4. Grounding labeling.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BCT: Bonding conductor for telecommunications.
B. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
C. TGB: Telecommunications grounding busbar.
D. TMGB: Telecommunications main grounding busbar.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room signal reference grid. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. As-Built Data: Plans showing as-built locations of grounding and bonding infrastructure, including the following:
1. Ground rods. 2. BCT, TMGB, TGBs, and routing of their bonding conductors.
B. Qualification Data: For installation supervisor, and field inspector.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
C. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.
D. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Result of the ground-resistance test, measured at the point of BCT connection. 2. Result of the bonding-resistance test at each TGB and its nearest grounding electrode.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.
1. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of ITS Installer 2, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. 2. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as ITS Installer 2 to perform the on-site inspection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Comply with J-STD-607-A.
2.2 CONDUCTORS
A. Comply with UL 486A-486B.
B. Insulated Conductors: Stranded copper wire, green or green with yellow stripe insulation, insulated for 600 V, and complying with UL 83.
1. Ground wire for custom-length equipment ground jumpers shall be No. 6 AWG, 19- strand, UL-listed, Type THHN wire. 2. Cable Tray Equipment Grounding Wire: No. 6 AWG.
C. Cable Tray Grounding Jumper: 1. Not smaller than No. 10 AWG and not longer than 12 inches. If jumper is a wire, it shall have a crimped grounding lug with one hole and standard barrel for one crimp. If jumper is a flexible braid, it shall have a one- or two-hole ferrule. Attach with grounding screw or connector provided by cable tray manufacturer.
D. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmils (14.2 sq. mm), 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, and 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with two-hole copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
2.3 CONNECTORS
A. Irreversible connectors listed for the purpose. Listed by an NRTL as complying with NFPA 70 for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. Comply with UL 486A-486B.
B. Compression Wire Connectors: Crimp-and-compress connectors that bond to the conductor when the connector is compressed around the conductor. Comply with UL 467.
1. Electroplated tinned copper, C and H shaped.
C. Signal Reference Grid Connectors: Combination of compression wire connectors, access floor grounding clamps, bronze U-bolt grounding clamps, and copper split-bolt connectors, designed for the purpose.
D. Busbar Connectors: Cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type, mechanical connector; with a long barrel and two holes spaced on 5/8- or 1-inch (15.8- or 25.4-mm) centers for a two- bolt connection to the busbar.
E. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.
2.4 GROUNDING BUSBARS
A. TMGB: Predrilled, wall-mounted, rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, 1/4 by 4 inches (6.3 by 100 mm) in cross section, length as indicated on Drawings. The busbar shall be NRTL listed for use as TMGB and shall comply with J-STD-607-A.
1. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section. 2. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide a 4-inch (100-mm) clearance to access the rear of the busbar. Brackets and bolts shall be stainless steel. 3. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in 600-V switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V.
B. TGB: Predrilled rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, 1/4 by 2 inches (6.3 by 50 mm) in cross section, length as indicated on Drawings. The busbar shall be for wall mounting, shall be NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and shall comply with J-STD-607-A.
1. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section. 2. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide at least a 2-inch (50-mm) clearance to access the rear of the busbar. Brackets and bolts shall be stainless steel.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in 600-V switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V.
C. Rack and Cabinet Grounding Busbars: Rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, accepting conductors ranging from No. 14 to No. 2/0 AWG, NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and complying with J-STD-607-A. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section.
1. Cabinet-Mounted Busbar: Terminal block, with stainless-steel or copper-plated hardware for attachment to the cabinet. 2. Rack-Mounted Horizontal Busbar: Designed for mounting in 19- or 23-inch (483- or 584- mm) equipment racks. Include a copper splice bar for transitioning to an adjoining rack, and stainless-steel or copper-plated hardware for attachment to the rack. 3. Rack-Mounted Vertical Busbar: 72 or 36 inches stainless-steel or copper-plated hardware for attachment to the rack.
2.5 LABELING
A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the ac grounding electrode system and equipment grounding for compliance with requirements for maximum ground-resistance level and other conditions affecting performance of grounding and bonding of the electrical system.
B. Inspect the test results of the ac grounding system measured at the point of BCT connection.
C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.
D. Proceed with connection of the BCT only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Bonding shall include the ac utility power service entrance, the communications cable entrance, and the grounding electrode system. The bonding of these elements shall form a loop so that each element is connected to at least two others.
B. Comply with NECA 1.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
C. Comply with J-STD-607-A.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
1. The bonding conductors between the TGB and structural steel of steel-frame buildings shall not be smaller than No. 6 AWG. 2. The bonding conductors between the TMGB and structural steel of steel-frame buildings shall not be smaller than No. 6 AWG.
B. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
C. Conductor Support:
1. Secure grounding and bonding conductors at intervals of not less than 36 inches.
D. Grounding and Bonding Conductors:
1. Install in the straightest and shortest route between the origination and termination point, and no longer than required. The bend radius shall not be smaller than eight times the diameter of the conductor. No one bend may exceed 90 degrees. 2. Install without splices. 3. Support at not more than 36-inch (900-mm) intervals. 4. Install grounding and bonding conductors in 3/4-inch (21-mm) PVC conduit until conduit enters a telecommunications room. The grounding and bonding conductor pathway through a plenum shall be in EMT. Conductors shall not be installed in EMT unless otherwise indicated.
a. If a grounding and bonding conductor is installed in ferrous metallic conduit, bond the conductor to the conduit using a grounding bushing that complies with requirements in Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems," and bond both ends of the conduit to a TGB.
3.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
A. The BCT between the TMGB and the ac service equipment ground shall not be smaller than No. 1/0 AWG.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.5 GROUNDING BUSBARS
A. Indicate locations of grounding busbars on Drawings. Install busbars horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches (50 mm) minimum from wall, 12 inches (300 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
B. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.
3.6 CONNECTIONS
A. Bond metallic equipment in a telecommunications equipment room to the grounding busbar in that room, using equipment grounding conductors not smaller than No. 6 AWG.
B. Stacking of conductors under a single bolt is not permitted when connecting to busbars.
C. Assemble the wire connector to the conductor, complying with manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Use crimping tool and the die specific to the connector. 2. Pretwist the conductor. 3. Apply an antioxidant compound to all bolted and compression connections.
D. Primary Protector: Bond to the TMGB with insulated bonding conductor.
E. Interconnections: Interconnect all TGBs with the TMGB with the telecommunications backbone conductor. If more than one TMGB is installed, interconnect TMGBs using the grounding equalizer conductor. The telecommunications backbone conductor and grounding equalizer conductor size shall not be less than 2 kcmils/linear foot (1 sq. mm/linear meter) of conductor length, up to a maximum size of No. 3/0 AWG unless otherwise indicated.
F. Telecommunications Enclosures and Equipment Racks: Bond metallic components of enclosures to the telecommunications bonding and grounding system. Install vertically mounted rack grounding busbar unless the enclosure and rack are manufactured with the busbar. Bond the equipment grounding busbar to the TGB using No. 2 AWG bonding conductors.
G. Structural Steel: Where the structural steel of a steel frame building is readily accessible within the room or space, bond each TGB and TMGB to the vertical steel of the building frame.
H. Electrical Power Panelboards: Where an electrical panelboard for telecommunications equipment is located in the same room or space, bond each TGB to the ground bar of the panelboard.
I. Shielded Cable: Bond the shield of shielded cable to the TGB in communications rooms and spaces. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 when grounding screened, balanced, twisted-pair cables.
J. Rack- and Cabinet-Mounted Equipment: Bond powered equipment chassis to the cabinet or rack grounding bar. Power connection shall comply with NFPA 70; the equipment grounding
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
conductor in the power cord of cord- and plug-connected equipment shall be considered as a supplement to bonding requirements in this Section.
3.7 IDENTIFICATION
A. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.
1. Label TMGB(s) with "fs-TMGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for the space containing the TMGB. 2. Label TGB(s) with "fs-TGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for the space containing the TGB. 3. Label the BCT and each telecommunications backbone conductor at its attachment point: "WARNING! TELECOMMUNICATIONS BONDING CONDUCTOR. DO NOT REMOVE OR DISCONNECT!"
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Test the bonding connections of the system using an ac earth ground-resistance tester, taking two-point bonding measurements in each telecommunications equipment room containing a TMGB and a TGB and using the process recommended by BICSI TDMM. Conduct tests with the facility in operation.
a. Measure the resistance between the busbar and the nearest available grounding electrode. The maximum acceptable value of this bonding resistance is 100 milliohms.
3. Test for ground loop currents using a digital clamp-on ammeter, with a full-scale of not more than 10 A, displaying current in increments of 0.01 A at an accuracy of plus/minus 2.0 percent.
a. With the grounding infrastructure completed and the communications system electronics operating, measure the current in every conductor connected to the TMGB and in each TGB. Maximum acceptable ac current level is 1 A.
D. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground at the BCT exceeds 5 ohms, notify Architect and Owner promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
E. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526 - 7 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
END OF SECTION 000000
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270526 - 8 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 270528 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings. 3. Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, handholes, and faceplate adapters serving electrical systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface pathways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
C. Samples: For wireways, nonmetallic wireways and surface pathways and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches (300 mm) long.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Pathway routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:
1. Structural members in paths of pathway groups with common supports.
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports.
B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For pathway racks, enclosures, cabinets, equipment racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which certification is based and their installation requirements. 4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which certification is based and their installation requirements.
D. Source quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with TIA-569-B.
B. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
C. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
D. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70. 2. Fittings for EMT:
a. Material: Steel or die cast. b. Type: Setscrew for non-wet/-damp locations or compression for wet/damp locations.
3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL-467, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. 4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
E. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. General Requirements for Nonmetallic Conduits and Fittings:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with TIA-569-B.
B. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.
C. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.
D. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.
E. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.
F. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
G. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
H. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.3 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. General Requirements for Nonmetallic Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Comply with TIA-569-B.
B. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections shall be flanged and have stainless- steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.
C. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners.
D. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
E. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:
1. Comply with TIA-569-B. 2. Boxes, enclosures and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
B. Sheet-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.
E. Metal Floor Boxes:
1. Material: Cast metal. 2. Type: Semi-adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
H. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep.
I. Gangable boxes are prohibited.
J. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.
K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures:
a. Material: Plastic.
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
b. Finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.
3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC. 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC.
4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 1, except use NEMA 250 Type 4 stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size. Minimum size for optical-fiber cables is 1 inch (27 mm).
D. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, cast-metal fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
F. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings.
G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F (49 deg C) .
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101, and TIA-569-B for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum pathways. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Keep pathways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot- water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.
E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
F. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends in any pathway run. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction.
G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
H. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached.
I. Pathways Embedded in Slabs:
1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m) intervals. 2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Arrange pathways to keep a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover in all directions. 4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location.
J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure. 3. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of stubbed end.
K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
L. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated pathway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.
M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts.
N. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length.
Q. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground pathways designated as spare above grade alongside pathways in use.
R. Surface Pathways:
1. Install surface pathway for surface telecommunications outlet boxes only where indicated on Drawings. 2. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) radius control at bend points. 3. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 36 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight pathway section. Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.
S. Pathways for Optical-Fiber and Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:
1. 3/4-Inch (21-mm) Trade Size and Smaller: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 50 feet (15 m). 2. 1-Inch (27-mm) Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 75 feet (23 m). 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.
T. Install pathway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
U. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all pathways at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
V. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings.
W. Expansion-Joint Fittings:
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 - 7 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C), and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m). Install in each run of aboveground RMC conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F (55 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet (30 m). 2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change. d. Attics: 135 deg F (75 deg C) temperature change.
3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits. 4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. 5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
X. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.
Y. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.
Z. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.
AA. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
BB. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.
CC. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
DD. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 - 8 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct-Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. 2. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. 3. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups through floor. 4. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 270544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways and Cabling."
3.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 270528
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270528 - 9
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 270536 - CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Ladder cable trays.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of cable tray.
1. Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray.
1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable trays, including plans, elevations, and sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints.
1. Seismic-Restraint Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, who is responsible for their preparation. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints. 3. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported cable trays.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Include scaled cable tray layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. 2. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions. 3. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays. 4. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or below bottom of ceiling structure.
CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270536 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For cable trays, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
C. Field quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer to design cable tray supports and seismic bracing.
B. Seismic Performance: Cable trays and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the cable trays will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2. Component Importance Factor: 1.0.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE TRAYS
A. Cable Trays and Accessories: Identified as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location, application, and grounding.
1. Source Limitations: Obtain cable trays and components from single manufacturer.
B. Sizes and Configurations: See the Cable Tray Schedule on Drawings for specific requirements for types, materials, sizes, and configurations.
C. Structural Performance: See articles for individual cable tray types for specific values for the following parameters:
1. Uniform Load Distribution: Capable of supporting a uniformly distributed load on the indicated support span when supported as a simple span and tested according to NEMA VE 1. 2. Concentrated Load: A load applied at midpoint of span and centerline of tray. 3. Load and Safety Factors: Applicable to both side rails and rung capacities.
2.3 LADDER CABLE TRAYS
A. Description:
CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270536 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
1. Configuration: Two I-beam side rails with transverse rungs welded to side rails. 2. Rung Spacing: 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. 3. Radius-Fitting Rung Spacing: 9 inches (225 mm) at center of tray's width. 4. Minimum Cable-Bearing Surface for Rungs: 7/8-inch (22-mm) width with radius edges. 5. No portion of the rungs shall protrude below the bottom plane of side rails. 6. Structural Performance of Each Rung: Capable of supporting a maximum cable load, with a safety factor of 1.5, plus a 200-lb (90-kg) concentrated load, when tested according to NEMA VE 1. 7. Minimum Usable Load Depth: 4 inches (100 mm). 8. Straight Section Lengths: 12 feet (3.6 m) except where shorter lengths are required to facilitate tray assembly. 9. Width: 12 inches (300 mm) unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 10. Fitting Minimum Radius: 12 inches (300 mm). 11. Class Designation: Comply with NEMA VE 1, Class 12B. 12. Splicing Assemblies: Bolted type using serrated flange locknuts. 13. Hardware and Fasteners: Steel, zinc plated according to ASTM B 633. 14. Splice Plate Capacity: Splices located within support span shall not diminish rated loading capacity of cable tray.
2.4 MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Steel:
1. Straight Section and Fitting Side Rails and Rungs: Steel complies with the minimum mechanical properties of ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Grade 33, Type 2. 2. Steel Tray Splice Plates: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, HSLAS, Grade 50, Class 1. 3. Fasteners: Steel complies with the minimum mechanical properties of ASTM A 510/A 510M, Grade 1008. 4. Finish: Mill galvanized before fabrication.
a. Standard: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275). b. Hardware: Galvanized, ASTM B 633.
5. Finish: Electrogalvanized before fabrication.
a. Standard: Comply with ASTM B 633. b. Hardware: Galvanized, ASTM B 633.
6. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
a. Standard: Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M, Class B2. b. Hardware: Chromium-zinc plated, ASTM F 1136.
7. Finish: Powder-coat enamel paint.
a. Powder-Coat Enamel: Cable tray manufacturer's recommended primer and corrosion-inhibiting treatment, with factory-applied powder-coat paint. b. Hardware: Chromium-zinc plated, ASTM F 1136.
CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270536 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
8. Finish: Factory-standard primer, ready for field painting, with chromium-zinc-plated hardware according to ASTM F 1136. 9. Finish: Black oxide finish for support accessories and miscellaneous hardware according to ASTM D 769.
B. Aluminum:
1. Materials: Alloy 6063-T6 according to ANSI H 35.1/H 35.1M for extruded components and Alloy 5052-H32 according to ANSI H 35.1/H 35.1M for fabricated parts. 2. Hardware: Chromium-zinc-plated steel, ASTM F 1136. 3. Hardware for Aluminum Cable Tray Used Outdoors: Stainless steel, Type 316, ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594.
2.5 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES
A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and finishes as cable tray.
2.6 WARNING SIGNS
A. Lettering: 1-1/2-inch- (40-mm-) high, black letters on yellow background with legend "Warning! Not To Be Used as Walkway, Ladder, or Support for Ladders or Personnel," in visible locations, no less than 6 feet between occurrences.
B. Comply with requirements for fasteners in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Test and inspect cable trays according to NEMA VE 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION
A. Install cable trays according to NEMA VE 2.
B. Install cable trays as a complete system, including fasteners, hold-down clips, support systems, barrier strips, adjustable horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, crosses, cable dropouts, adapters, covers, and bonding.
C. Install cable trays so that the tray is accessible for cable installation and all splices are accessible for inspection and adjustment.
D. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays.
E. Join aluminum cable tray with splice plates; use four square neck-carriage bolts and locknuts.
CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270536 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
F. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure and install seismic restraints.
G. Design fasteners and supports to carry cable tray, the cables, and a concentrated load of 200 lb (90 kg). Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
H. Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans on schedules and provide clearances shown on Drawings. Install intermediate supports when cable weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray rungs.
I. Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances furnished by cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall-bracket form as required by application.
J. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading.
K. Install center-hung supports for single-rail trays designed for 60 versus 40 percent eccentric loading condition, with a safety factor of 3.
L. Locate and install supports according to NEMA VE 2. Do not install more than one cable tray splice between supports.
M. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable trays and to equipment. Support cable trays independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable trays on equipment enclosure.
N. Install expansion connectors where cable trays cross building expansion joints and in cable tray runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA VE 2. Space connectors and set gaps according to applicable standard.
O. Make changes in direction and elevation using manufacturer's recommended fittings.
P. Make cable tray connections using manufacturer's recommended fittings.
Q. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
R. Install capped metal sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed cable tray penetrations of fire and smoke barriers.
S. Install cable trays with enough workspace to permit access for installing cables.
T. Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and data processing; or of different insulation levels, such as 600, 5000, and 15 000 V.
U. Install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays after cable tray installation.
3.2 CABLE TRAY GROUNDING
A. Ground cable trays according to NFPA 70 unless additional grounding is specified. Comply with requirements in Section 270526 "Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems."
CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270536 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Cable trays with communications cable shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers.
C. Cable trays with control conductors shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers.
D. When using epoxy- or powder-coat painted cable trays as a grounding conductor, completely remove coating at all splice contact points or ground connector attachment. After completing splice-to-grounding bolt attachment, repair the coated surfaces with coating materials recommended by cable tray manufacturer.
E. Bond cable trays to power source for cables contained within with bonding conductors sized according to NFPA 70, Article 250.122, "Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors."
3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Install cables only when each cable tray run has been completed and inspected.
B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties according to NEMA VE 2. Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket. Install cable ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure-limiting device.
C. Fasten cables on vertical runs to cable trays every 18 inches (450 mm).
D. Fasten and support cables that pass from one cable tray to another or drop from cable trays to equipment enclosures. Fasten cables to the cable tray at the point of exit and support cables independent of the enclosure. The cable length between cable trays or between cable tray and enclosure shall be no more than 72 inches (1800 mm).
E. In existing construction, remove inactive or dead cables from cable trays.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Remove paint from all grounding/bonding connection points before making connections. Repair paint after the connections are completed.
B. Connect pathways to cable trays according to requirements in NEMA VE 2 and NEMA FG 1.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for compliance with requirements. 2. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in cable trays, vibrations, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause or have caused damage.
CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270536 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3. Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable trays do not exceed that permitted by NFPA 70. Verify that communications or data-processing circuits are separated from power circuits by barriers or are installed in separate cable trays. 4. Verify that there are no intruding items such as pipes, hangers, or other equipment in the cable tray. 5. Remove dust deposits, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any blockage of tray ventilation. 6. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque in suspect areas. 7. Check for improperly sized or installed bonding jumpers. 8. Check for missing, incorrect, or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace with specified hardware. 9. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable trays. Test entire cable tray system for continuity. Maximum allowable resistance is 1 ohm.
B. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed cable trays and cables.
1. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to safeguard exposed cables against falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable tray can be constructed of wood or metal materials and shall remain in place until the risk of damage is over. 2. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray manufacturer. 3. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by cable tray manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 270536
CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 270536 - 7
City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 270544 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sleeves for pathway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. LEED Submittals:
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For sealants, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES
A. Wall Sleeves:
1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends. 2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND 270544 - 1 CABLING City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.
C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:
1. Material: Galvanized-steel sheet. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness:
a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm). b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).
2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable.
1. Sealing Elements: Nitrile (Buna N) rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.
2.4 GROUT
A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire- rated walls or floors.
B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND 270544 - 2 CABLING City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS
A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below.
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated. 2. Sealant shall have VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.
C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:
1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:
a. Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.
2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pathway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting. 5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND 270544 - 3 CABLING City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.
E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pathway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at pathway entries into building.
B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
END OF SECTION 270544
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND 270544 - 4 CABLING City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
SECTION 271500 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. UTP cabling. 2. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects. 3. Telecommunications outlet/connectors. 4. Cabling system identification products. 5. Cable management system.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.
B. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways.
C. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection.
D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
E. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.
F. LAN: Local area network.
G. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates.
H. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.
I. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 1 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used:
a. Nominal OD. b. Minimum bending radius. c. Maximum pulling tension.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Owner. 2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cabling and asset identification system of the software. 3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts. 4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following:
a. Cross-connects. b. Patch panels. c. Patch cords.
5. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components.
C. Samples: For workstation outlets, jacks, jack assemblies, in specified finish, one for each size and outlet configuration.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.
B. Source quality-control reports.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.
B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list.
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 2 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Patch-Panel Units: One of each type. 2. Connecting Blocks: One of each type. 3. Device Plates: One of each type.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.
1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, Cabling Administration Drawings, and field testing program development by an RCDD. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Level 2 Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. 3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION
A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called a "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols. 1. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or consolidation point between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector. 2. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 3 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet (90 m). This maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet (4.9 m) to the workstation equipment or in the horizontal cross-connect.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-B.1 when tested according to test procedures of this standard.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Grounding: Comply with J-STD-607-A.
2.3 UTP CABLE
A. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, formed into 25-pair, binder groups covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket.
1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:
a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or CMG. b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262. c. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR or CMP, complying with UL 1666.
2.4 UTP CABLE HARDWARE
A. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.
B. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.
C. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables.
1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.
D. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.
1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated.
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 4 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
E. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals.
F. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 48-inch1200-mm lengths; terminated with eight- position modular plug at each end.
1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging. 2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.
2.5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS
A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
B. Workstation Outlets: Two-port-connector assemblies mounted in single faceplate, unless noted otherwise on drawings.
1. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Section 262726 "Wiring Devices." 2. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial work area cords.
a. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle. 3. Legend: Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.
2.6 GROUNDING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 270526 "Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors.
B. Comply with J-STD-607-A.
2.7 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.
B. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.
B. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 5 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
D. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES
A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by communications service provider.
3.2 WIRING METHODS
A. Install cables in pathways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal pathways and cables except in unfinished spaces.
1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Comply with requirements in Section 270528 "Pathways for Communications Systems." 3. Comply with requirements in Section 270536 "Cable Trays for Communications Systems."
B. Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.
C. Wiring within Enclosures:
1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. 2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. General Requirements for Cabling:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 4. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. 5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 6 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. 7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- (3-m-) long service loop on each end of cable. 11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.
C. UTP Cable Installation:
1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.
D. Open-Cable Installation:
1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches (1524 mm) apart. 3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.
E. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.
F. Separation from EMI Sources:
1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm). b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches (610 mm).
3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 7 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm).
4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:
a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches (76 mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm). 6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping."
B. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.
3.5 GROUNDING
A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.
B. Comply with J-STD-607-A.
C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch (50-mm) clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground.
D. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 270526 "Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems."
3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels.
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 8 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
B. Using cable management system software specified in Part 2, develop Cabling Administration Drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use unique, alphanumeric designation for each cable and label cable, jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with same designation. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as- built conditions.
C. Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Painting" for painting backboards. For fire- resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.
D. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.
E. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. Follow convention of TIA/EIA-606-A. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in software and format selected by Owner.
F. Cable and Wire Identification:
1. Label each cable within 4 inches (100 mm) of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. 2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet. 3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet (4.5 m). 4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.
a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building- mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular device as shown. b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.
5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.
G. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A.
1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 9 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels. 3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 4. Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection.
a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568- B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.
5. UTP Performance Tests:
a. Test for each outlet, perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2:
1) Wire map. 2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements). 3) Insertion loss. 4) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss. 5) Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss. 6) Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT). 7) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT). 8) Return loss. 9) Propagation delay. 10) Delay skew. 6. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP systems after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed. a. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network.
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 10 City Council Chambers Audio Visual and ADA Improvements 13 June 2016 City of Arroyo Grande, Public Works Department Ravatt Albrecht Job 16.601
D. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.
E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 271500
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 271500 - 11